Date: 1988-06-02 04:00:00+00:00
Keywords: Science Fiction; Cyberpunk; Fiction; Fantasy; Science Fiction Fantasy; Speculative Fiction; Dystopia
Description: When the government created 250 telepathic infants to train as warriors, the children were nurtured as only the most valuable of slaves can be. But now these rare children have come of age, and they demand the same freedom as all men and women--and possess a unique power with which to fight for it.
Publisher: Comicmix LLC

EMERALD EYES

A TALE OF THE CONTINUING TIME

DANIEL KEYS MORAN

This is a work of fiction. None of the characters in it are real people and any resemblance to anybody, living or dead, is a coin- cidence.

It is the author’s intention that this work should be freely downloadable, copyable, and shareable in electronic format. It may not be reproduced, shared, or transmitted for a fee by any party to whom the author has not contractually granted permis- sion. The author retains all other rights.

Emerald Eyes Copyright © 1987 by Daniel Keys Moran

The Star Copyright © 1998 by Daniel Keys Moran

Dedicated to

The Tales of the Continuing Time are dedicated to a whole bunch of writers — everybody I ever read, according to one re- viewer. That seems fair.

This book is dedicated to Amy Stout-Moran. She was the edi- tor at Bantam Books who first bought this novel; she is the mother of my sons and the love of my life.

EMERALD EYES

A Tale of the Continuing Time

The gods can either take away evil from the world and will not, or, being willing to do so cannot.... If they have the will to remove evil and cannot, then they are not omnipotent. If they can but will not, then they are not benevolent. If they are neither willing nor able, they are neither omnipotent nor benevolent.

Epicurus, 300 BC

The Ancestors 2029-2053 Gregorian

YOU WILL HAVE heard the story of Carl Castanaveras; of Suz- anne Montignet and Malko Kalharri; of our ancestors. They made plans for they were human, as you and I; and the uni- verse, which cared no more for them than for us, struck them down. Its tool was nothing less than a pair of Gods of the Zaradin Church, one of them myself, fighting a battle in a war that was ended nearly sixty-five thousand years before they were born.

I have told this story before, and I shall someday tell it again, in a different fashion; but for Now, know the story so:

DARRYL AMNIER WAS a man without a title.

A title makes one knowable.

“Tell me about them,” he said.

“Oui.” Amnier’s assistant was French; a depressingly large number of Unification employees were these days. “The direc- tor’s name is Suzanne Montignet. She is French born, but ar- rived in the United States in 2015. It is thought that her parents were fleeing the European theater of the War. She was fourteen then. We do not have accurate records for her after leaving France; she arrived in America a year before the Unification War reached that continent. Her parents were killed, apparently by Americans, after the War began. One would have expected this to turn a young girl against the country in which she found herself, but obviously not. When next we have accurate records of her, beginning in 2018, she studied under a scholarship at the College of the Camden Protectorate, in New Jersey. She had by then, and retains today, a substantially American accent. Though she spells her name ‘Suzanne’ she had further taken to pronouncing her name ‘Susan,’ in the American style, a habit she also retains. In 2024 she graduated with high honors; two years ago, her work in genetics led to her current position with the United Nations Advanced Biotechnology Research Labora- tory in New Jersey, this ‘Project Superman.’ ”

2 Tales

“Don’t use that name. It’s not correct.”

After a pause Amnier’s aide continued. “The Ministry of Population Control has granted her an unlimited parenting li- cense. She seems apolitical, aside from her personal habits.”

“By which you mean?”

“Monsieur, she lives in Occupied America, among a proud people who have been, hmm, conquered? Conquered. An appar- ent distaste for the United Nations might be expedient.”

“Not when dealing with the United Nations purse strings.”

“As you say.”

“What of Malko Kalharri?”

“What of Kalharri?”? Amnier’s aide seemed to find the ques- tion amusing. “Sir, I think there is little I can tell you that you do not already know about Colonel Kalharri.”

WITH A SHOWER of gamma rays I came into existence at the fast end of time.

A wind was raised with my appearance in the empty corri- dor. Had there been any to observe they would have heard the sharp crack created as air was moved aside at greater than the speed of sound, and might have felt a brief warmth. Those with sharp eyes might have noticed a shadow in the fraction of an in- stant before I moved away from the spot of my appearance. They would not have seen more of me. Even at my end of time they would have seen little to note: a human dressed all in white, from the boots on my feet to the white cowl that covered my head. Even with the visual distortion that is unavoidable when time is sped so drastically, men of their century would have found the lack of focus upon the surface of a white shadow cloak a striking thing.

Of course they were not in fast time, nor could be.

I began trudging through the air, toward my destination. The corridor was nearly dark; flashes of ultraviolet light marked the passage of X-rays, each flash illuminating the corridor like a small lightning. The normal visible spectrum was shifted too deeply into the radio to be of use to me.

Moran 3

I was in a hurry, pushing through the resisting atmosphere, and I unaccustomed to hurrying; but I was being closely followed by an enemy who had promised to cut my heart out and eat it— and I believed Camber Tremodian would do it, given the chance.

I did not intend to give him the chance. At the fast end of time I hurried through the slow air.

WEDNESDAY, DECEMBER 12, 2029; the United Nations Advanced Biotechnology Research Laboratories, in New Jersey.

He arrived from Capital City just before eight o'clock; secu- rity let Darryl Amnier into Suzanne Montignet’s office more than two hours early. They were uneasy, doing it.

But they did it nonetheless.

He sat behind her desk, in her chair, with the lights dimmed. A small man, with paper-white hair and wrinkles around his eyes and mouth that made him look far older than he was, he found Montignet’s chair slightly too high for his taste. He did not readjust it. Her office had no window, which pleased him to the degree that he ever allowed himself to be pleased. A crank with a rifle was that much less likely to bring three quarters of a mil- lion Credit Units’ worth of research grinding to a halt with a single shot.

The decor was standardized, little different from what Am- nier had seen in over twenty other research installations in the last four months. Amnier was not certain whether that sur- prised him. From a woman of such exceptional skills, one might reasonably have expected anything—

The same might be said of Malko Kalharri, the lab’s director of security.

An Information Network terminal, left turned on and con- nected to the Mead Data Central medical database, sat at atten- tion immediately next to her desk. Amnier made a note to find out what sort of bill they were running up on information re- trieval. An ornamental bookshelf against one wall held reference works in too excellent condition. There were no holographs, not even of Colonel Kalharri, who was reputed to be her lover. Nor were there paintings. The desk was locked. Amnier considered

4 Tales

picking it, and decided not to. There was unlikely to be anything inside that he would either understand or find incriminating, and whether he opened it or not, Montignet was certain to sus- pect he had—which was the whole point.

THE EMPTY CORRIDOR in which I appeared connected the sterile genegineers’ labs with the showers that led to the un-sterilized outer world, on the first floor of the New Jersey laboratories of the United Nations Bureau of Biotechnology Research. The en- trance to the genegineers’ labs was through a small room with sealed doorways at both ends. They were not airlocks, though the technology of the day was sufficient to allow the use of air- locks; indeed, at the interface between the showers and the rest of the installation airlocks were in use. But it was cheaper to keep the laboratories under a slight over-pressure; when the door opened, the wind, and contaminants, blew outward.

The door swung wide, and a pair of laboratory technicians in white gowns and gloves strode through. The resemblance be- tween their garb and mine brought the ghost of a smile to my lips.

As they left, I, the god Named Storyteller, entered.

SUZANNE MONTIGNET STOPPED by Malko Kalharri’s office on the way to her own. The lights in his office had not yet been turned on. Entering the room from the brightly lit hallway, Suzanne found it difficult to see Kalharri at first. “Malko?”

“Yes?” The office lacked a desk; the man who was sprawled loosely on the couch, one oversized hand wrapped loosely around a steaming coffee cup, continued to watch the holotank in the corner of his office. Kalharri did not resemble his name, which he had received by way of his grandfather; he was a big blond man with a tan. The channel light glowed at 335; S-STR, the po- litical news station.

“What’s happening?”

Malko Kalharri had been a soldier for too many years; he did not move quickly when the situation did not warrant it. After a moment he said, “The Unification Council is ‘discussing—well,

Moran 5

this is the word they have used all morning for the screaming and threats—the feasibility of adding an amendment to their damned Statement of Principles, to allow the Secretary General to hold office for more than three four-year terms. Sarah Al- mundsen must be turning over in her grave; the first amend- ment ever proposed to that brilliant piece of writing being a tool to keep one of her more foolish successors in office for another term.” He shook his head. “It’s not going well; SecGen Tenerat didn’t think this one through, silly damn frog he is.” He paused a moment and without looking at her added, “No offense meant.”

“None taken,” she said dryly.

“Not that the opposition has prepared for it either. The Unifi- cation Councilor for Sri Lanka opened the floor for discussion on the subject and so far this morning that’s been the most coher- ent thing anybody’s said.”

“T see.”

Kalharri turned his head then to look at her. He grinned broadly. “I've been watching this damned box all morning. I tried turning up the brightness control earlier—”

“Didn’t work.”

“Afraid not.” He turned back to the screen.

“Amnier’s here.”

Kalharri took a sip from his coffee before replying. “Guards told me. You’re supposed to believe that he’s going through your documents. He’s been there for an hour already; he knows you don’t usually get in until 9 am, and he'll be expecting you to come charging up to your office as soon as you learn he had him- self let in to wait.”

“Wheels within wheels. What do I do?”

“Command,” said Kalharri, “bring coffee.” Acknowledged blinked in the lower right hand corner of the 3D tank. He low- ered his voice slightly. “Amnier’s appointment isn’t until ten o'clock.”

“So?”

Filled cups and condiments appeared on the floor next to the couch; memory plastic raised itself up from the floor to become a table at Kalharri’s right hand. Kalharri took his cup and sent

6 Tales

the table gliding across the floor toward Montignet. “I don’t like surprises. Darryl’s the same way. Right now he’s expecting you to blow through your door any moment, pissed off. So, have a seat,” he said cheerfully, “drink your coffee and watch the politi- cians, and make the bastard wait.”

THE DOOR SLID aside at 10 AM.

“What the fuck are you doing in my office?”

Suzanne Montignet was, Darryl Amnier thought in surprise, an astonishing beauty. The holos in her files did her no justice. Her blond hair was tucked up under a net that reminded him of the hair net the Sisters had worn at St. Margaret Mary’s, the Catholic school he’d been taught at as a child. She stared at him, waiting for an answer. He wondered at her anger; forty-five min- utes ago it had undoubtedly been real. Now it was simply a mask stamped across features that were, perhaps, slightly too delicate. It seemed to Amnier that she was undernourished as well; she must have lost five kilograms since the most recent holographs of her had been taken.

Darryl Amnier rose belatedly from behind Montignet’s desk, removed his hat, and sketched a bow. “I am M. Amnier, here for my appointment.” It was his best French.

Suzanne Montignet looked him over as though he were some- thing unpleasant she’d found in her salad, and shook her head in a tired motion. She dropped the pile of folders she’d entered with on her desktop. “Lights,” she said in English. The fluores- cent lamps came up bright, and Darryl Amnier realized that the odd gray of her eyes, that he’d assumed an error in her holo re- productions, was their true color. “I know who you are. Do you usually pop into people’s offices two damned hours ahead of time?”

Amnier found himself caught in the challenge of her gaze. He found his posture straightening. “Mademoiselle, only when I wish for the person with whom I am meeting to be ill at ease.” He shook his head. “In this instance, I regret the use of the technique—and have for the last half hour.”

Moran 7

Suzanne Montignet looked him over, and smiled wearily. She held out her hand. “I have,” she said softly, “been looking for- ward to meeting you, Mister Amnier.” He took her hand, and was not surprised at the strength in her grip. “As has Colonel Kalharri.”

SOMEDAY I WILL tell you of the life of Jorge Rodriguez. It is the least one can do for a man one has killed.

It is the truth that I killed Jorge Rodriguez.

Like all truths it is susceptible to interpretation. I had taken all the precautions available to me that my visit to this time might not cause more damage than good; but it is never possible to know all of what may come from a course of action. This is as true of a God of the Zaradin Church as of any other sentient.

Jorge Rodriguez entered the small room with two doors only moments after his fellow technicians had left through the other. The doors were so designed that they could not both be open at the same time. I waited patiently as the man came through the door leading to the laboratories proper. There was time for me, despite the poor quality of ultraviolet light, to puzzle out his name badge, which was mounted on a piece of dark plastic with a strip of a clear film upon it. He entered as the door had just opened, and then stood in the doorway, preventing my passage, as the door slid shut again. It should not have been a problem; he would continue through the next door, and I would open the door to the laboratories after he was gone. It would appear to those inside as if the door had slid aside of its own accord; un- usual, but given the relatively primitive stage of their technol- ogy, not be so strange as to cause excitement. A glitch, they would call it. But Jorge Rodriguez did not leave immediately. As long min- utes fled by on my personal time scale, Rodriguez slumped back against the door to the laboratories. With excruciating slowness he reached inside his coat and withdrew a small cylinder, which he placed within his mouth. As far away as the small room would allow me to get, I paced slowly back and forth to prevent

8 Tales

my image from flickering into an instant of appearance. It must have raised ever so faint a breeze.

Rodriguez puffed on the cylinder, his back to the door through which I desperately needed to pass. It was likely to- bacco or marijuana, two preeminent inhalants of the period. I could not recall how long a typical cylinder of either inhalant should have taken to be consumed, but it was soon apparent that whatever the period was would be far longer than I had available.

I came down into Time.

It was instantaneous for me; for Rodriguez I appeared as a frozen statue for most of a second. His eyes were opened wide in a surprise that would soon be terror, and he was drawing in air to shout. I reached past the rising wave of fear, into his fore- brain, and sent him into sleep as gently as I was able. His body sagged and his breath exhaled in a loud sigh as he fell. I caught him before he had struck the ground, and carried him out through the door into the corridor. In Time I erased his memo- ries of me, and in Time I returned to the small room where I had killed Jorge Rodriguez. I touched the pressure pad that opened the door into the laboratories, and as it opened I ascended into fast time once more.

The small badge Jorge Rodriguez wore had turned from clear to black while he stood in that room with me. I had lived a thou- sand times as fast as he; the heat of my body had struck him as gamma rays for more than long enough.

“A REMARKABLY IMPERSONAL room, this.” Amnier stood in front of her bookcase, ran one finger down the spine of a text by de Nos- tri on fine neural structure. “No paintings, no holos...” He watched her as he spoke. She held herself like a man, shoulders squared back.

Montignet moved by him, to seat herself behind her desk. She pressed her thumb against the lock and slid open the filing drawer. “I’m rarely here. I generally work downstairs at the lab. I have a desk there, and there are cots for when we draw night duty.” From the filing drawer she took two folders, and closed

Moran 9

the drawer again. The drawer locked automatically. “The books are mostly gifts.” Amnier turned back to her. “The de Nostri was from de Nostri; the man’s an incredible egotist.”

“Ah,” said Amnier, and Suzanne had to repress a grin at how eagerly he leapt upon the opening, “an egotist, yes, but a suc- cessful egotist.”

Suzanne Montignet did smile then, and watched as her smile struck Amnier. His features grew still. So he was not, as Malko thought, attracted only to boys. “I would not say that our work here has been a failure.”

“But neither has it produced a clear success. De Nostri has—
children, if that is the correct word—who are nearly two years of age.” “Children,” said Suzanne Montignet with some anger, “is not the correct word. Mister, any fool can produce monsters. Mixing variant gene sets is not so very difficult. Slapping together genes from humans and leopards, among reputable scientists, that’s known as playing mix and match. What we're doing is more dif- ficult, and you know it. The foeti we have designed here, from the ground up, are human. They will be human children.”

“But they do not live.”

“Not—’ Not yet, she had started to say; Suzanne Montignet clamped down upon her anger. It was almost as though Malko were there in the room with her, whispering in her ear. Amnier delighted in argument; directness was the way to handle him. “Did you,” she asked slowly, “come here to shut us down?”

“T have come,” said the small man, “to decide.”

They were still staring at each other when the alarms went off.

IT WAS STRANGE, looking down upon the bundle of amino acids that was my ancestor.

They had assembled him with lasers and viruses, in a proc- ess that the histories said would be obsolete within a decade. It was a primitive process, far likelier to fail than otherwise; the histories were unclear as to how many times the technique had ever functioned properly in the decade it was employed.

10 Tales

There are moments when Destiny reaches out to trace a fin- ger down my cheek, with the touch of a lover. I do not know if it is the same for Camber Tremodian; he is an immensely practical man in some ways. The tiny bit of matter before me was the great-grandfather of the first of my line; and it was right that it was with the Gift of the House of November that I reached out, and took the broken long chains of dead matter, and brought them together in the pattern that would let Carl Castanaveras live.

ROBIN MACINTYRE finished reading off status reports in a dull monotone. “We hustled the decon unit downstairs, and—”

“Radiation?”

“All over the place. Low levels most places, but—Jorge’s badge was black.” For the first time Suzanne understood Robin’s grief stricken expression; Robin’s closest friend on the staff was a dead man. “They’re taking Jorge to the hospital; I’m going to log out and go with him.”

“No.” It was Amnier, standing on the other side of the Infor- mation Network terminal. He could not see either Robin or the status reports that filled the other half of the screen. “You can’t take him out of here.”

Suzanne was not sure Robin had heard Amnier; shed slapped down on the silence point as soon as he’d begun speak- ing. “Why the hell not?”

“If his badge is black,” said Amnier patiently, “he’s dead re- gardless. I saw enough of that during the war; so did Malko. Check with him if you must; medical technology hasn’t advanced as much as all that in the last decade. Taking him to the hospi- tal will be of use to nobody except this Robin person, and it will, by releasing knowledge of this radiation contamination into the general populace, place a potent weapon into the hands of those who do wish to close you down.”

Robin was gesturing on the terminal’s screen. Suzanne lifted her thumb from the pressure point. “One moment, Robin.” She pressed down again. “How so?”

Moran 11

“Tt will mean that you are either incompetent enough to have allowed radioactives to escape from confinement—’

“We don’t even use radioactives.”

“Irrelevant. Or it will mean that you have been targeted by ideologs.” Amnier shook his head. “The Unification Council would find that an excellent excuse to shut you down. We ha- ven’t the resources to guard an installation of questionable worth against a group of determined ideologs.”

An override suddenly flashed on Suzanne’s terminal. “Malko here. Pll meet you at the showers. Bring Amnier.” The override ended, and Robin’s form appeared again in the terminal.

“This is,” said Suzanne, the instant the thought struck her, “a fascinating coincidence, that this should happen while you are visiting.”

Darryl Amnier smiled at her, the first true smile she had seen from him. He spoke with chilling precision. “I have thought that myself.”

TERENCE KNIESSEN, a tall fat man with a shock of red hair, met them at the showers. He was wearing his head bubble—barely visible refraction ran five centimeters around the perimeter of his skull—but his gloves had been removed. Malko was already there, undressing to enter the chemical showers; Amnier flinched visibly at the sight of the long laser scars that criss- crossed Kalharri’s body. Almost hidden among the marks of the lasers were the small round puckered bullet scars. Kalharri did not look at Amnier; he entered the first shower in the row as they began undressing.

Sweat dripped off Kniessen. He took Amnier’s coat, babbling instructions at the man. “—and then gargle with the mouth- wash, you'll have to swallow the second mouthful. Pll meet you on the other side and show you how to—”

Suzanne interrupted him. “Terence.”

He stopped speaking instantly and glanced at her sideways— he was more of a prude than most. “Yes ma’am?”

“You took your gloves off.”

12 Tales

Terence let out a low moan. “Oh, damn,” he swore and began stripping off his clothes.

THE FIRST THING Amnier noticed as they cycled through the dou- ble doors that led into the labs was the faint smell of ozone. The bubble let filtered air through, and it was not supposed to filter anything so small as an ozone molecule; but before he could be certain about the smell, he was led through the inner door and found himself upon a catwalk looking down on chaos. Kalharri was down there, with a pair of technicians wearing decon badges. Only one of the decon badges bore the radiating triangle insignia that meant its wearer had passed training to deal with radioactive materials. The tech who wore that badge was probably paid twice as much as the tech who did not; even today, over eleven years after the end of the Unification War, there were not enough skilled decon techs to go around. The lab was huge, easily the largest room in what was not a small building. This, thought Amnier, is where they work. The things that had been missing everywhere else were in abun- dance here; comic strips had been inscribed in the glowpaint, and decorative calendars were hung in three different places. The dozen or so desks scattered across the place were personal- ized to various degrees; one that caught his eye held the holo- graph of a ballerina, turning eternally on point.

The laboratory was the first place Amnier had seen in the building where glowpaint gave an approximation of yellow sunlight.

A huge laser hung nose-down from the ceiling, pointing at a table that bore a ceramic depression nearly a meter in diameter. In the middle of the depression was a small transparent con- tainer that had been clamped into position; tubes so small that Amnier could barely see them from where he stood led to the container.

Amnier made his way down from the catwalk slowly. Mon- tignet was already down at floor level. One of the technicians was showing her listings from the devices attached to the trans-

Moran 13

parent container; Montignet rose from the computer, snapped, “Ellie, get me nutrient flow now,” and went back to the readouts.

Amnier reached the floor and found Malko Kalharri there, waiting for him. Kalharri stood with his arms crossed, pale blue eyes calm and rather relaxed. “Hello, Darryl.”

Amnier sat down abruptly on a step four from the bottom. It put his eyes almost on a level with Kalharri’s. “Hello, Malko. How have you been?”

“Well. And yourself?”

Amnier shrugged. “Busy. I work. What is happening?”

“There was a source of radiation.” Kalharri eyed Amnier speculatively. “It’s gone now. Vanished. We haven't been able to track it down.”

“Assuming,” said Amnier, “that you yourself have not caused this excitement—and I do not put it past you—please accept my assurance that I am not responsible for whatever has happened here today.” He looked directly at Malko. “Did you let them take this Jorge person to the hospital?”

“Of course not.”

“It grieves you that you could not.”

“It would have made Robin feel better.”

“But he would still die.”

“Yeah.”

Amnier watched the technicians in silence for a moment as they rushed about at errands that he, and he suspected Kalharri also, found incomprehensible. “If a living fetus comes out of this, and what I am hearing leads me to believe it might, I shall find it all most suspect.”

Amnier thought a smile might have touched Kalharri’s lips for an instant. “You're flattering yourself, Darryl.”

“Perhaps. It is a danger in my profession.” Amnier paused. “Our profession, I might say. You have not forgotten the way things work, at any rate. I have not needed to say a startling number of things.”

“Tve been thinking,” Kalharri said, “about what you said to me the last time we talked.”

14 Tales

Amnier stared at him. “Malko, that was seventeen years ago.”

“I think you may have been right. The United States was in trouble.” Kalharri spoke slowly, almost reluctantly. “I mean po- litically. In other ways it was not. The Unification Council—the entire superstructure your Sarah Almundsen designed—it is, in some ways, more vigorous than what we had; certainly better than what the Russians had, or the Chinese. Perhaps this Unifi- cation is better. Perhaps it was worth the deaths that came about in the War.”

“It’s good of you to say so.”

“Darryl.”

“Yes?”

“You are—all of you—already losing sight of what you fought for. I did not agree with you, and today I am not certain that I was right—but your government is being overrun by the bar- barians. It’s already happening.” He paused. “I don’t know if Americans will tolerate it.”

Amnier said gently, “Youre too much of a philosopher, Malko. It was charming when we were boys, but it helped you lose the War.”

“_in republics there is greater life, greater hatred, and more desire for vengeance; they do not and cannot cast aside the mem- ory of their ancient liberty.”

Amnier looked at him quizzically. “The Prince,” he said after a moment. “The Old Man would have been proud of you.” He smiled distantly. “In the same work it says, this is a paraphrase, a city used to liberty can be more easily held by means of its citi- zens than in any other way, if you wish to preserve it.”

Malko nodded. “Yes. It says that.”

Amnier did not answer. There was a silence that continued until Suzanne left her work station and returned to where they waited. Amnier sat with his eyes unfocused, looking off into a distance that did not exist; Kalharri stood, eyes fixed on Am- nier’s face. Neither saw what they looked upon.

Moran 15

“Malko?” Amnier looked up at the woman, flushed with strong emotion. Montignet continued, “We have one. It’s going to live.”

“Fascinating,” murmured Amnier. He looked down at the steel stairway he sat on. When he looked up again there was a flat snapping sound, like a whip being cracked. For an instant Amnier stared directly at the flat black cutout of a man, merely the outline of a shape. I doubt he ever again fully believed his own eyes after that; Camber Tremodian was gone before Amnier could be certain of what he had seen.

None of the others appeared to have noticed. “Which one is it?” asked Malko quietly.

“Number fifty-five. Series C, number C; we’ve been calling it Charlie Chan.”

“Do you know its sex yet?”

“Male.”

Malko Kalharri had not yet turned away from Darryl Am- nier; now he came closer, squatted until his eyes were on a level with Amnier’s. “I think we shall name him Carl...Castanaveras, perhaps. Yes.”

Amnier blinked. His mind seemed to be elsewhere. “Oh?”

“Yes,” said Kalharri, “Castanaveras. I think it an appropriate name.”

THREE DAYS AFTER my life brushed against his, Jorge Rodriguez died of radiation burns.

Camber and I have kept the costs of the battle down; Jorge Rodriguez was only the fifth human being in sequential Time to die in a battle of the Time Wars.

It might have comforted him to know that.

Or not.

16 Tales

THREE DECADES passed. The SpaceFarers’ Collective continued to grow. Early in the 2030s, they established SpaceFarer colo- nies in the Asteroid Belt.

In the late 2030s, the United Nations began colonies in the Asteroid Belt, in an attempt to forestall the SpaceFarers’ Collec- tive’s bid to assume control of the Belt. They were successful; the SpaceFarer colonies never flourished. Their success did them no good, however. The U.N. colonies were largely self-sufficient; with the time lags in their supply lines, they had to be. It was a logical result that they should find themselves more sympathetic toward the SpaceFarers than toward a government millions of kilometers away. In 2040, with support from the SpaceFarers, all but a half dozen of the Belt colonies declared their independ- ence from the Unification.

Of necessity the colonies evolved into “CityStates.” It was the logical basic economic unit for a society built of flying moun- tains.

WHEN CARL CASTANAVERAS was still a young boy, before puberty turned him into a Peaceforcer weapon, an officer of the United Nations Peace Keeping Force once asked him what he wished to do with his life.

The question startled the boy. He had been raised by doctors and scientists and Malko Kalharri; the Peaceforcer’s question was not the sort of thing anyone had ever asked of him before.

After a moment’s consideration he said, “Am I supposed to do something with it?”

THERE CAN BE good mistakes. Fact and truth and history are rarely related. The facts are these.

Carl Castanaveras was born on the eighteenth of September in the year 2030. He was named after a soldier who, fighting for his country, died during the Unification War; he was raised in a world that still bore the scars of that war. The America in which he was raised was an occupied country, with more Peaceforcers

Moran 17

than police. The war was history already by the time he was old enough to understand its causes. In classes he was taught about its great battles; how after the Battle of Yorktown, the young Marine Corps sergeant who was in command of what was left of the United States Marine Corps forced the U.N. forces to with- draw into a neighboring city before he would agree to surrender his forces. In agreeing to surrender, a young Marine named Neil Corona produced the most memorable quote of the War: “We will fry under your goddamn cannon,” he said, “before a single Ma- rine will lay down his arms in Yorktown.”

After that war’s end, the slow task of rebuilding began. France, alone among the industrial nations of the time, emerged unscathed from the Unification War. In the years that followed the war, it attained a position of preeminence among the bodies that constituted the United Nations.

The gene pattern that produced Carl Castanaveras was not successfully reproduced until April the eighteenth, in 2035, when a design that became Jane McConnell was successfully imprinted upon a sterile egg. In creating her, Suzanne Mon- tignet localized three unique genes that Carl Castanaveras pos- sessed and no other living human being did. Jane McConnell was, aside from her gender, his clone. She was the first and last instance in which Suzanne Montignet had to resort to relatively clumsy cloning techniques to ensure that the gene complex took properly. Johann MacArthur was brought to term late in 2036; unlike Jane McConnell he was a true genie, assembled gene by gene until a design was found that Suzanne Montignet ap- proved. Six such others were born between 2036 and 2042.

In 2040 Darryl Amnier was appointed to the position of Prosecutor General to the Unification Council.

For over a decade the Bureau of Biotechnology Research, and the Peaceforcers who controlled them, thought Carl Castanav- eras a failure.

An interesting failure. He seemed slightly stronger than his muscle mass should have warranted, with greater endurance; but his muscle mass, even with conditioning, was not excep-

18 Tales

tional. He moved with abnormal speed, and was emotionally un- stable.

At the age of twelve, when puberty struck him with full force, Carl Castanaveras awoke one day and found that he could read minds.

He let others know, among them a Unification Councilor named Jerril Carson, who was at that time the Chairman of the Unification Council to supervise the Bureau of Biotechnology Research. That was the first mistake. By the time the other abilities began to manifest, he had learned enough to know that in knowledge there is power. As he grew older, what would be known, more than a thousand years later, as the Gift of the House of November, grew also. Carl Castanaveras learned to hide that which he did not wish revealed: throughout history, slaves have always found this a useful skill. They were slaves, no less so than the indentured hunters of twenty-third Century Tin Woodman, or the blacks of the early American South. After the first shakeout, the Peaceforcers had three facilities where their experiments in genetic engineering were conducted; following the death of pioneer genegineer Jean Louis de Nostri, the facilities were consolidated under the con- trol of Suzanne Montignet. The slaves—the “genies”—were relo- cated along with the research teams; and the telepaths met the de Nostri. THERE WERE TIMES when Shana de Nostri did not mind the fact that she was not human, but now was not one of those times. She sat brooding on the mat at the side of the gym as a group of five Peaceforcers put Carl through his paces. Her girlfriend Lorette was with her, and the two of them were striking enough that the four Peaceforcers who were not engaged with Carl kept sneaking glances, mostly at Shana. She was no better looking than Lorette, only less modestly dressed. In gross physiological detail they resembled human women closely enough that human men often found them attractive. The differences were minor enough that a good cosmetic biosculptor might have made them look human, had they desired to look human. At one point, while

Moran 19

he lived, Doctor de Nostri had, in a fit of conscience, offered that option to the de Nostri. Their tails would have had to be ampu- tated, and their fur removed permanently; the claws would have been replaced with fingernails. Facial reconstruction would have lowered the very high cheekbones, replaced their flat, wide noses with noses that protruded properly. Sexually they were more like humans than the leopards from whom the balance of their genetic makeup was derived; male and female genitalia closely resembled those of normal humans. The females had breasts that would produce milk when one of the maturing seventy- three de Nostri females finally bore children.

The de Nostri had rejected the offer: the de Nostri were proud of their appearance.

Lorette had, like most of the female de Nostri, made conces- sions to the morals of the—mostly American—humans among whom they now found themselves. Her breasts were covered by a loose blouse, and her genitals were covered by a pair of baggy pants that had been altered to accommodate her tail.

Shana was nude except for her fur. Her nipples were clearly visible, and a human who stared—and some had, though not more than once—could have made out the outline of her genita- lia through her fur.

She was damned if she would put on a second layer of skin when the weather did not require it.

Now Carl sparred with a hulk of a Peaceforcer who had to outmass him two to one. Shana and Lorette were practicing speaking in English, rather than the French they had learned as children. Though most of the staff spoke understandable, hide- ously accented French, most of the thirty or so genies with whom the de Nostri shared the buildings did not. It was a failing shared, in greater measure, by New York City’s residents.

“T cannot see that it matters,” said Lorette primly, running her claws gently through the brown and white striped fur that covered Shana’s back and shoulders. “Talk to the telepath if you must, your boyfriend—’

Shana’s muscles tensed, and she growled so quietly that no human and most genies who were not de Nostri would have

20 Tales

heard it. Lorette’s ears pricked slightly, and without pausing she continued, “—or only your friend, if you will have it that way. But—’

She broke off again; the Peaceforcer sparring with Carl had picked the boy up and thrown him a full five meters. Shana sucked in her breath, and her claws unsheathed of their own ac- cord. The boy struck the mat rolling and came to his feet run- ning backward. The Peaceforcer was right there, a long kick whistling through the space the boy’s body had occupied an in- stant before.

For a moment the two stood facing each other, motionless, before engaging again, and Lorette continued speaking as though she had never been interrupted. “But the people in the city,” she said, lips drawn back from her teeth in a reflex that had nothing to do with a human’s smile, “animals. They stare so.” She stopped scratching Shana. “How is that?”

“T still itch in all places.”

Lorette sighed, switched to French. “What did they inject you with?”

The snarl in Shana’s voice would have been audible even to a human. “They did not tell me, except it is supposed to make me strong. If I was a human, even a genie, they would have said.”

Lorette chuckled without amusement. “If you were a human citizen they could not even have injected you without permis- sion.”

Shana was silent, watching as a somewhat smaller Peace- forcer took over from the very large one. The boy had no time to catch his breath; within seconds the two were fighting, each wielding a meter-long rod of wood with a rounded, metal cap at each end.

“Really?”

Lorette sighed, and returned to English. “It is what Albert says.”

“Albert says things just to say them,” said Shana sullenly.

“True.” Lorette was struck by something amusing, and she leaned forward to whisper in Shana’s ear. “Albert told me that he has watched Carl spar and that he is better.”

Moran 21

“Scratch my shoulders, please,” said Shana. Lorette’s claws moved up after the new itch, and Shana sighed with pleasure when they caught it. “Albert is a fool. He is four years older than Carl, and he is jealous because he is not as important. He is one of many de Nostri, and Carl is the only telepath.” She thought about the subject for a moment. “Perhaps it is true, that he is better than Carl, with an advantage of six years study. Carl be- gan learning only after they found he was a telepath and real- ized it might be necessary to use him in the field. But I will tell you this much, Albert may best Carl on the mat. If they ever truly fight, Carl will win.” Shana had to catch her breath after speaking; she was slightly winded.

“T have talked to Carl once,” said Lorette thoughtfully. “He says when they take him on assignment he is well protected.”

Shana nodded. “Yes. He is their only telepath, unless the lit- tle dark haired girl is one also, and they will not know that un- til, what is it,” and she took a long, deep breath, to bring the air into her lungs, and said, “comment dit-on en anglais menarche?”

“Puberty,” said Lorette, “but it means for boys and girls both. They do not have a word for menarche.”

“They will not know until Jany reaches puberty, then.” Shana coughed, a deep, guttural sound, and said, “It makes him special.”

Lorette brightened. “Look, the fourth match is finished. One more and we can go to lunch.”

Shana shook her head slowly. Her ears were twitching. “I think perhaps I should go to the infirmary.”

“Shana?”

“I... do not feel well.”

Carl did not look away from his match as they left.

THE FIELD WAVERED slightly. Suzanne Montignet’s image waited for nearly three seconds after Malko had finished speaking; round-trip signal time from the PKF Elite SpaceBase One, at L- 5. “You've got to be kidding.”

Malko shook his head no. “They weren’t sure at first what was happening. It took nearly a day before the transform virus

22 = Tales

killed her. I had Carson on the line after it happened. He de- nied—”

“Of course the virus killed her,” Suzanne exploded after the strange delay that Malko found himself unable to become used to. “What did the bloody fools expect? She was a de Nostri, for God’s sake! Those are not human muscle cells!”

Malko waited until there was silence before he continued. “Ellie Samuels did the work, and she says she received her or- ders directly from Councilor Carson. You weren’t available for her to check with, which is clearly intentional.”

Suzanne was nodding tensely. “Of course it was. Carson’s wanted to try seeding one of the de Nostri with the enhanced- strength transform virus for the last year. They're so strong to begin with, the damn fool figures this should make them even stronger. I told him the odds were terrible.” She looked brood- ingly into the holocam, eyes slightly unfocused; she was not looking at the screen that held Malko’s image. “It’s been fasci- nating, seeing the work the Peaceforcers have been doing in transform viruses, but it still didn’t make sense, how insistent they were that I make the trip to L-5, until now. Carson wanted me up here so that I couldn’t interfere down there. Have you heard from Amnier?”

“No. The Prosecutor General’s office won’t return my calls. I think they’re going to let Carson get away with it.”

“Has Shana been autopsied yet?”

“No.”

“How’s Carl?”

“angry.”

“That bad?”

“Tve never seen it worse.”

She seemed to reach a decision. “Very well. Don’t let her be autopsied until I get back. I want to be there. Ellie might not have known what she was doing when she got her orders....” She was looking off screen at something. “Ship leaves at 23:00 hours. I can be in Manhattan by this time tomorrow. Have Carl con- fined.”

Moran 23

“TI try.” The holofield went silver, then flattened, and Suz- anne’s figure. If, thought Malko, I can find him.

THE RECEPTIONIST sat at the wide front desk, in the inner lobby of the offices of the Unification Council, at the United Nations Building in New York City. Sunlight struck a warm, late after- noon glow through the bay windows that surrounded the lobby on three sides, washed in and overrode the clean white glow- paint. The receptionist thought she saw movement outside, through the window, and dismissed it as a figment of her imagi- nation.

The doors slid aside, and by reflex she touched the pressure point at the side of her desk, marked Security, the instant the young man walked in. By appearance he was perhaps fifteen or sixteen years of age; young, but old enough to be dangerous.

And she should have received some warning before he had reached the inner lobby.

“Can I help you?”

His voice was odd. She had to strain to hear him, and— surely his lips had moved?

I have come to see Councilor Carson.

His eyes were green, some portion of her mind noted uneas- ily, and large. And familiar—

“Tm sorry,” and she stumbled over the words, “but the Coun- cilors do not—see people—without an appointment.”

He moved closer to her, head cocked slightly to one side. An intangible, electric shock of danger ran through her. There was rage in him, a vast anger. Tell him I’m here.

She did know him, she was certain of it. Thought came slowly, as though from a great distance. She could not take her gaze away from the brilliant, luminescent green of his eyes. She activated her inskin data link without knowing she did so, and paged the Councilor to the reception area.

Another Councilor, with two of his staff, came through the lobby as they waited, and eyed the boy with a touch of curiosity. The boy stood silently, motionless, and did not look at them. He

24 Tales

kept his gaze locked to the receptionist. They found it, and him, somewhat odd, but of course he would not have been there if he had not belonged there, and so they continued on their way, and forgot the boy with a speed Jerril Carson would have found in- structive.

The lift doors, at the far end of the lobby, slid aside, and Jer- ril Carson stood framed between the sliding doors, with a Peace- forcer at his side.

A weight lifted itself from the receptionist’s mind and the dark-haired boy’s features moved into focus. The blood had drained from his face at Jerril Carson’s appearance, leaving it shockingly white beneath the straight black hair, but she recog- nized him nonetheless. “Of course,” she said aloud. “Why—”

Carson said with mild surprise, “Carl?”

The voice echoed, as though something else spoke through the boy, used him as an instrument. “You killed Shana.”

He said nothing else, and Carson was still looking at him when the windows exploded outward. A great invisible hand slammed the Peaceforcer down to the floor, dragged him out of the lift and across the pale blue carpeting. The Unification Councilor stumbled back into the lift, mouth open and working as though he would say something.

But no words came, and Carl, rage stamped upon his fea- tures, went in after him.

The doors slid shut before the screams began.

THERE CAN BE good mistakes; and otherwise.

Jany McConnell underwent puberty early in the year 2047. The Peaceforcers were waiting.

She too had the Gift.

For the predominantly French Peaceforcers, struggling to keep order in a world that hated and distrusted them, it was confirmation enough of the information gathering godsend. Cas- tanaveras had already proven that he could retrieve information reliably when physically near his target; but one, or even ten such telepaths, were only mist in the desert of their need.

Moran 25

2048, the year Jerril Carson became the chairman of the Peace Keeping Force Oversight Committee in the Unification Council, was, not coincidentally, also the year Suzanne Mon- tignet was removed from control of what was popularly called “Project Superman.” In that year, 43 telepathic children were brought to term. All were given the surname Castanaveras; the technicians had tired of inventing individual surnames.

In 2049, 73 such telepaths were born.

In the year 2050, 86 telepaths were brought to term in Bu- reau of Biotech host mothers.

In 2051, the year Trent Castanaveras was born, only twenty- four telepathic children were brought into the world. The Peace- forcers were beginning to learn enough to wonder if they should be afraid of the power they had helped create. Many of them were afraid of Carl Castanaveras. With help from Castanaveras the program to produce telepaths for the Peaceforcers was ter- minated by the middle of the year.

In 2052, Darryl Amnier became Secretary General of the United Nations.

In 2053, twins were born to Carl Castanaveras and Jane McConnell; twins named David and, yes, the Denice who became Denice Ripper, from whom our line descends.

Those are the facts. There have been many histories written concerning those twenty years when telepaths first walked the Earth; but historians are primarily concerned with truth, and a concern for truth can make one leery of those cold facts that might conflict with a precious, closely held “truth.”

It is better to be a Storyteller.

Emerald Eyes

2062 Gregorian

ON THURSDAY, March 9, 2062, Carl Castanaveras rose early. He left Suzanne Montignet’s home and walked three blocks through the icy dark, to the Massapequa Park Station of the Long Island Tubeway. It was only 4 A.M.; the streets of exurban Massapequa Park were largely bare of traffic. The stars shone clearly over- head and the moon had already dropped below the horizon. There were no other pedestrians about and except for the rare car and the rumble of the huge twelve-fans rolling down Sunland Boulevard all was quiet.

The cold did not affect Carl. He barely noticed it except to keep his hands inside his coat pockets. He walked briskly, impa- tiently.

At the Tube station the doors slid aside and admitted him to a warm, well lit waiting room. Carl sorted and cataloged by re- flex. Three women and five men, none of them visibly armed, waiting for the 4:15 Tube shuttle to Grand Central Station.

At the InfoNet Aid station Carl bought a one-way ticket to the city, and leased a news viewer. The clerk behind the counter was having trouble keeping her eyes open. Lease of the news viewer came to half a Credit Unit more than the ticket itself; the viewers were stolen regularly. He paid with SpaceFarer hard CU; the clerk blinked in curiosity at the sight of the rare silver coins, but took the CU:1.25 without word. He stood quietly for several minutes, waiting for the Bullet to arrive. At 4:12 the Bullet came up out of the ground, and coasted down the superconductor maglev monorail to a slow gliding stop; a single structure made of nearly a hundred meters of su- pertwisted sheet monocrystal. The Bullet could not be painted and did not need to be washed; filth slid off. It could not be scratched or dented.

Under sufficient impact, it would shatter.

At 4:15 the Bullet pulled out of the Massapequa Park station and was fed slowly back into the interlock. In the lock the at-

30 Tales

mosphere was evacuated, and the Bullet was injected back into the Tube with a smooth, steady acceleration.

Once, almost a decade ago, ideologs who were never identi- fied—Johnny Reb, perhaps, or Erisian Claw—left a bowling ball in the Tube. The Bullet struck it at full speed. There was an av- erage clearance of five centimeters around the circumference of the Bullet; when it struck the bowling ball the Bullet turned the bowling ball into vaporized dust.

In the process, the Bullet itself touched the side of the Tube. The resultant earthquake destroyed eighteen kilometers of the Tube; the shock wave was felt nearly sixty kilometers from the place where the Bullet shattered itself against a bowling ball.

CARL SAT IN the seat nearest the exit, to save time getting off when the Bullet stopped. He stowed his briefcase in the rack under the seat and purchased a large cup of coffee from the waitbot as it rolled down the long center aisle. Service that morning was good; before the crush hours started it usually was.

The first thing he saw when he turned on the news viewer made him wince. He’d gone to greater than usual trouble that morning to insure that his activities remained unnoticed; log- ging on to the InfoNet, he’d picked the default user profile rather than identify himself by his thumbprint and download his pro- file. Had he been using his own profile the screen that greeted him would not have surprised him much, but he was logged on anonymously and despite that his face was all over the front screen of the morning edition of the Electronic Times news Board. The headline the tablet showed—Carl did not have his ear phone turned on—was “UNIFICATION COUNCIL PASSES GENIE BILL.” The texts of the several stories were lacking. Bare bones of the Amendment—it was not, as the front screen headline im- plied, a bill, but the Eighth Amendment to the Statement of Principles—and a brief sketch of its ramifications for both the telepaths and the feline de Nostri, with another sketch of the principals involved in the bill on both sides. Predictably, Malko’s involvement with the Eighth Amendment, and the limited but

Moran 31

real opposition the Amendment had received from Secretary General Amnier’s office, were the primary subjects for most of the newsdancers. It was a romantic lead; two war heroes, on op- posite sides during the war, and still so four and a half decades later.

Carl found he could reliably judge any particular news- dancer’s sympathies in the matter from the style in which the newsdancer wrote the Secretary General’s title. Those who used the currently popular “Ministre Général,” rather than the his- torically correct English title, had little good to say about either the telepaths or their supporters.

Only one story in the first section was not about the passage of the Eighth Amendment; a SpaceFarer smuggler had been ap- prehended with a cargo hold full of GoodBeer from St. Peter’s CityState, in the Belt. Any other day it would have been a front screen story, perhaps the headline. Of the remaining stories, most concerned the conflict between Amnier and Kalharri.

Unfortunately, one of the newsdancers had not been content with the obvious story; that newsdancer had taken Carl Cas- tanaveras for a ride down the boulevard with the spotlights turned on. The style was familiar; Carl paged down the article until he came to the sign off.

Gerold McKann, special to the Electronic Times.

Carl shook his head. The pictures of him were good; a man of average height, a swimmer’s build, in conservative attire. He sipped his coffee while auditing. The tablet showed several holos, most of them apparently taken from his testimony before the Unification Council earlier that year. The color reproduction was good; the brilliant green eyes leapt out from beneath a shock of black hair as they did in real life, and with nearly as much impact.

The text was devastating. It focused on the circumstances that had led to the telepaths’ petition, and the role Carl had played in freeing the telepaths from the control of the PKF. The tone was highly approving.

Carl smiled. Gerry, my friend, I'm going to nail your ass to the wall.

32 Tales

Across the aisle, a woman was staring at him. She looked down at her news viewer, and then back up again. Her features froze into an unpleasant mixture of hatred and embarrassment.

Carl stared directly at her until she turned away.

A FLICKER on the Net.

United Nations Peace Keeping Staff Sergeant Emile Garon looked around his cubicle. He was near the end of his second year in this cubicle now; two years spent monitoring the Net- work, two years plugged into a bank of Fairchild gallium ar- senide transputers, two years with the superconductor RAM hardwired into his skull. The cubicle’s walls were off-white, and he was forbidden to decorate them.

The room was information sterile, intentionally. There should be nothing to distract him from his job.

Paris, he thought for the hundredth time that week. I left Paris for this.

Two hundred meters below the surface of New York City, Peaceforcer Emile Garon sighed and closed his eyes, and hoped desperately that the flicker would become a trace that would take him out into the Crystal Wind of data that was life.

And returned to work.

THEIR OFFICES WERE on Third Avenue, a fifteen minute walk from Grand Central Station. The suite belonging to Kalharri Enterprises, Ltd., was not large: one subdivided private office where Malko, Carl and Jany McConnell had desks, a reception- ist’s area and a conference room. For almost a year now Malko had been paying for the offices out of his own pocket. That too would be changing, and none too soon. Spyeyes hovered above the street outside when Carl reached the Kaufmann Spacescraper at 550 Third Avenue. Their pres- ence was not unusual; many of the news services floated spyeyes outside the spacescraper when a story involved one of the occu- pants. The sheer number of spyeyes, though, brought him to a halt—twenty, twenty-five; he stopped counting when the spyeyes spotted him. A dozen spyeyes identified him and

Moran 33

swooped down toward him, shouting questions that blurred into a wall of sound. Carl ran the last forty meters through the early morning pedestrian traffic, to the spacescraper’s revolving glass doors.

Half again the usual number of guards stood duty today; they processed him through quickly. The lift tube took him up to the 408th floor; sunpaint lit as Carl unlocked his office. The recep- tionist’s area and conference room were empty. Carl entered his own office and dropped his briefcase next to the desk.

In the darkness of his office a cool blue cube appeared above Carl’s desktop. The cube was invisible from the side opposite Carl, where the holocam pickup was located.

Marilyn Monroe’s image appeared within the cube.

“Gerold McKann, please.”

“One moment, sir,” breathed the image of a woman who'd been dead for nearly a hundred years. The solid, rock-steady re- ceptionist’s holograph was replaced on Carl’s desktop by a wa- vering flat sheet of projected monovideo. Gerry was in his car; through the flat interface Carl could see part of the front seat of Gerry’s Chandler 1300, and through the windows of the car, what Carl guessed was TransContinental Highway 4 out in Pennsylvania. In the poor light of early morning, as relayed by the hovercar’s marginally overscanning camera, it was difficult for him to be certain.

“Carl! Goddamn, man, congratulations.” Gerry grinned into the camera. “I told you it would go through.”

Carl stood with his fists resting on the desktop. “I audited the Electronic Times already this morning, Gerry.”

The grin widened. “Yes? What did you think?”

“How stupid are you?”

Gerry laughed. “I’m one...” He broke off abruptly. Cautiously, he said, “Youre angry.”

“Why did you write that story, Gerry?”

Gerry’s eyes flicked down toward the camera embedded in the Chandler’s dash, and back up again to watch the road. “Ex- cuse me a moment,” he said mildly. Carl watched as Gerry set up radar and hooked the carcomp into TransCon Auto Control.

34 = Tales

Gerry McKann was in his late forties, though he looked younger; he kept in shape. He was a newsdancer with over thirty years experience in the field—it was the only job he’d ever held.

The flickering, blue-tinged monovideo showed little of his ex- pression as Gerry leaned back in the driver’s seat and folded his arms across his chest. “Okay. I was under the impression I was doing you a favor.”

“How so?”

“Well—correct me if ’m wrong—telepaths are people. I’m even willing to grant de Nostri that status; you and yours strike me as being a bit more human than that lot. I thought Pd spread the news.” The newsdancer in him popped up with a quick grin. “Also, it was a hell of a story.”

From the outer office Carl heard the faint sound of the doors curling open. Voices, Jany and Malko. Without turning away from the image in the holofield, he touched a key on the control panel to his terminal. With a whisper the door between his office and the outer offices slid shut and locked itself. He sank into his seat slowly. He measured his words. “First of all, you correct me if Pm wrong, Gerry, isn’t it contrary to newsdancer ethics to write a story on a subject to which you are connected in a per- sonal fashion without explicitly identifying the fact?”

“Only if you get caught. Damn it, Carl, if nothing else it was good publicity. Count the number of favorable stories there’ve been about you folks of late and—”

“I—we—don't need the publicity. I don’t want the publicity. The Peaceforcers don’t want the publicity.”

“What do you care what the Peaceforcers want?” McKann looked bewildered. “Man, you’re free! That’s what all this was all—”

“I am not free!” Carl screamed. He found himself on his feet, glaring down into the screen.

Gerry McKann stared at him.

“Damn damn damn,” Carl swore in a monotone. “Gerry, I have two hundred and thirty-six children who depend on me to take care of them. The Secretary General doesn’t like me and may hate Malko. Jerril Carson does hate me, he’d pay to see me

Moran 35

dead. Half the Peaceforcers in the world are terrified of us and all of them think we’re traitors.” He slammed a fist down on the desktop and the desk shivered. “And you, you stupid fuck, had to rub their noses in it in front of an audience of one and a quarter billion Electronic Times subscribers. We got a piece of paper signed, today new copies of the Statement of Principles get transmitted around the world, saying the Peaceforcers can’t use us without paying us anymore, can’t tell us to do anything any- more. Do you think the Peaceforcers care what that piece of pa- per says?”

Gerold McKann looked at him.

Carl shouted, “Well? Do you?”

McKann’s voice was barely audible. “No.”

The word drained away Carl’s anger, left him standing there, cold and empty. “I shouldn’t have to say things like this, Gerry. You know better.”

McKann sighed. “I didn’t think. I was trying to do you a fa- vor.” He shrugged and looked out the window at what was, to Carl, only a blurred image of countryside. “I was trying to help.” McKann looked directly down into his camera. “Sorry. But Jerril Carson was your mistake.”

He hung up and left Carl looking at a blank sheet of dim la- ser light.

Carl nodded after a moment. He spoke to the empty screen. “Yeah, well, we all make mistakes.”

After a long moment he turned away from the field, called the sunlights up, and went out to face what promised to be a long day.

IN A PARK at the south end of Manhattan island, a telepath named Johann MacArthur sat with his back to a tree and watched children play in the warm sunlight. He sat and enjoyed the warmth. The Weather Bureau said that the day would be pleasant, but Johnny had learned, like everyone else, not to trust anything the Bureau of Weather Control said.

The park was not large. It was a rectangle less than a hun- dred meters on its long axis, and only forty meters wide. A five-

36 Tales

meter-high fence enclosed it and there was no exit to the street. It would not have been safe. Instead a tunnel walkway led from the center of the park, under the street, and came back up across the street, inside the Chandler Complex where the tele- paths had been living for over half a year. The shade trees scat- tered throughout the park obscured visibility enough to make the fence difficult to see unless you were near the perimeter.

The children rarely approached the park’s perimeter; it made it too easy to hear the chanting of the picket lines. Today was particularly noisy; given yesterday’s vote, that was to be ex- pected.

Johann sat in full lotus, eyes open and unfocused, wearing nothing but a pair of shorts. It was unseasonably warm for early morning in March, and promised genuine heat by noontime. He was a big blond man who looked too much like a young Malko Kalharri for coincidence. Carl had told Johann that in the ear- lier days of what the technicians had, only half sarcastically, named Project Superman, many of the men in the staff had do- nated sperm cells for the genetic content. Johann had never asked Malko if he had been one of those men; he had never cared enough.

At twenty-five he was the third oldest telepath on Earth, but he didn’t feel very old, most of the time.

The park was quiet this early in the morning. About sixty of the children were out playing. The rest of the kids would be in one class or another, except for the eight who were currently out on jobs for the Peaceforcers.

He felt a certain grim satisfaction in the knowledge that those would be the last eight.

A swift thought struck him; it came from Heather Castanav- eras, the fourteen-year-old girl who was teaching unarmed com- bat that morning to a class composed largely of thirteen- and fourteen-year-olds. Johnny, have you seen Trent?

Johann closed his eyes briefly, and with the Sight walked through the park quickly. Althea, his lieutenant that day, was leading her group in a game of hide-and-seek played by rules no normal human could have understood. J dont see him, Heather.

Moran 37

Blue eyes isn't in class again. The thought held frustration that approached anger.

Johann sighed. Try not to get upset with him, Heather.

Why not?

He’s not having an easy time with the Change. And besides, today’s his birthday.

It’s always somebody’s birthday, snapped Heather, and cut the connection abruptly.

Johann thought a moment. Trent had only turned eleven to- day; Heather had moved him into class with the thirteen and fourteen year olds some months ago. She thought he held prom- ise in unarmed combat, and certainly he was large enough. But he seemed to have little interest in the subject.

Not my problem, he decided with a cheerful lack of interest, and returned to dozing under the sun.

EMILE GARON’S hands trembled slightly. He was close to datastarve; and if he showed symptoms, the PKF DataWatch would yank him from his job—

He could not afford, as a private citizen, the processor power necessary to take him into the Crystal Wind with the bandwidth that PKF equipment afforded. But there had been no traces, nothing to justify going in.

It hurt. He had spent far too much time in the information- sterile world of reality. He had not gone live into the Net in nearly two weeks.

Though he would not admit it even to himself, he was ad- dicted to the Crystal Wind.

“There,” said Peaceforcer Emile Garon aloud. He wanted des- perately to believe that he was not fooling himself. His eyes did not open. Finally he spoke with conviction.

“There it is again.”

TRENT DANCED THROUGH the InfoNet, seeking.

GARON KEYED OPEN his throat mike. “I have a live one. Tracer request submitted.”

38 Tales

The watch commander’s voice boomed in his skull. “Describe the sign.”

“Intelligent, sir. Starting in the public Boards, at 9:08:11. Redirected output through ComSat 0188 and multiplexed back down in several different channels at 9:19:35. I filtered out the ghost channels and sent web angels into the net to chase it down.”

“Replicant AI or live sign?”

“No AI signature. Live sign probability in the high nines; it doesn’t know how to scramble deep memory, and hasn’t booby- trapped pursuit. But it generated its ghosts in a burst of elegant superlisp.”

“Opinion?”

“A talented amateur. Trace, sir?”

There was no reply. Garon chewed at his lower lip. He knew it was foolish, but he could not restrain himself. “Sir?”

He wondered if he imagined the coolness in the watch com- mander’s voice. “Trace enable on three. Access at point five. Stay out of Ministry and Space Force Boards.” A pause. “Trace en- abled.”

Emile Garon activated the trace nodes at his temples, and descended into the light of data.

FRANCIS XAVIER CHANDLER, in an autobiography written only a few years before his death in 2094, wrote of Jany McConnell:

“I have never met another woman who was more alive. I thought when I first met her that she was a great beauty, but in later years, looking at the images that are all that is left of her, I saw this was not so. She was an attractive woman. She and Carl Castanaveras were of a type; good looking, dark-haired young adults in excellent physical condition, with those brilliant green eyes. Neither of them looked like their names, but that was not uncommon even then, with interbreeding.

“I am indifferently affected by male beauty, but those who are not, who knew Castanaveras, have told me that their reac- tion to him was the same as my reaction to ‘Selle McConnell. When I was still a relatively young man, practicing my first pro-

Moran 39

fession, I wrote a song called Desert Eyes. It was a ‘Top Ten’ hit; unless you know what that means, it is an irrelevancy I won’t describe here.

“Over seven decades after I wrote that song, I met Jany McConnell and knew at last whom I had written the song about. She had desert eyes; they burned.

“One gains perspective with the passage of time. The tele- paths, in that time, were a fact. Only a fool would ignore them; but only a greater fool would allow himself to be aligned with them publicly. There was too much resentment against them. The Jews were discriminated against for thousands of years be- cause they made the claim to superiority, to being a Chosen Peo- ple.

“The telepaths, Castanaveras and all those children named after him, were better than us. Quantitatively and qualitatively, in nearly every way that could be measured and some that could not, they were a superior people.

“Except in numbers. Of course they were doomed.”

“BABY?” JANY MCCONNELL looked up from her work as Carl en- tered the conference room. Seated at the head of the table, she was downloading the InfoNet profiles of their five guests into the two waitbots. She looked enough like him to be his sister; a handsome green-eyed woman with long, dark hair, wearing an oversized blue leather coat, short skirt, and a pair of emerald studs. Genetically they were closer than most twins. “How do you feel?”

His smile was melancholy. “Well. How about yourself?”

She shrugged in a single fluid movement that took most of her upper body into account. “Well.” Her makeup was turned off, except for a faint blue-silver sheen on her lips and over her eyes. “You didn’t come home last night.”

“I stayed at Doctor Montignet’s house. Where’s Malko?” Carl had not seen him in the waiting area or the lobby.

“He went down to the security station on the first floor to re- view security for the meeting.” Her hands roved slowly over the huge pointboard at the head of the table. There were seven

40 Tales

chairs lined up against the room’s north wall; Jany sat in the eighth. “You didn’t call, Carl. I was worried about you. It’s only been about two months since that maniac shot at you while you were testifying before the Unification Council. We had this in- credible party last night and you didn’t even call to say you weren't coming home.”

‘m sorry, Jany. I wasn't good company last night. She did not respond, and he continued aloud, “I knew we were going to win by noon yesterday. So did Malko. We had two hundred and twenty votes firmly accounted for, and...it was just a step. It was depressing.”

“Just a step?” She looked at him quizzically. “And Suzanne was better company than we would have been? Suzanne’s one of the least empathetic people I’ve ever met.”

“And the toughest.”

Jany nodded thoughtfully. “She lives in her own world.”

Carl flashed a bright, hard grin at her. “It makes her hard to hurt.”

Jany made no immediate reply. She did not respond to the grin, and slowly it faded. “Maybe you're right. But you should still have called. I worried.”

“Do I need to apologize again?”

“No. Just don’t do it again.”

He cocked his head to one side. “Okay—Okay?”

“Okay, then.” She smiled at him for the first time, and for the first time in several days he felt the bright, flickering warmth that made everything else in his life worthwhile. “Do you want to give me a hug? The last time I saw you we were still slaves.”

WITH A ROAR of frustration, Emile Garon threw his traceset down to the desktop. Even the glorious Crystal Wind, the sharp bright surge of data that was life, left him with only the small- est, fading glow.

“How did he do that?” Garon asked of no one, aware of the trace of hysteria in his voice. He sank back into his chair, eyes focused on a great distance. “J can’t even do that.”

Moran 41

The watch commander’s voice cut through the layers of unbe- lief with shocking clarity. “Officer Garon, you are relieved of duty. You are instructed to report to Elite Commander Breil- leune’s office at 13:00 hours.”

Suddenly, Emile Garon’s holofield appeared over his desk, a silvered flat plane that sank away from him to present depth.

Two letters appeared, black against a blue background, in an eighteen-point Helvetica typeface that contrasted sharply with the plain, ten-point terminal typeface PKF displays normally used.

Ox, the letters said.

Garon stared at the letters without comprehension. Suddenly the holofield reset, flattened into a silver plane, and vanished. Frantically Garon scrambled for his pointboard. The dictionary instantly displayed eight different possible meanings; number one on the list, with a probability of 87%, was an English word, that the dictionary translated for him as boeuf; as an adjective, meaning of great strength, but slow and clumsy.

The watch commander’s voice brought him back. “Emile? Of- ficer Garon, do you acknowledge the order? You are instructed to report to Elite Commander Breilleune’s office at 13:00 hours.”

“Yes. I will be there.”

THEIR FOURTH GUEST arrived at 9:45; Malko Kalharri took the elevator up to the downlot to greet her personally. Belinda Singer was, in her own right, one of the twenty wealthiest hu- man beings on Earth, and one of the twenty-five wealthiest anywhere in the Solar System. She was old enough to make Malko feel young. While her age was not public knowledge, it was a fair guess she would never see the sunny side of one hun- dred again. Despite that, her wealth was the most recently ob- tained of their five guests. Thirty-seven years ago, the United Nations had nationalized both the orbital construction facilities at Halfway and the SpaceFarer Colony at LaGrange Five. The SpaceFarers’ Collective declared independence by way of retalia- tion, and waged a brief and ineffective war with the Unification. The war did not regain their former holdings, but the United

42 Tales

Nations, still weak from the strains of the Unification War, had not been able to prevent them from declaring, and maintaining, their freedom.

Belinda Singer had invested in the SpaceFarers’ Collective heavily; most of what had already been, in 2025, a considerable fortune. It was a gamble that had paid off in astronomical num- bers. She was the SpaceFarer Collective’s largest downside shareholder. Assuming the uneasy truce between the U.N. and the SpaceFarers continued to hold, as it had for over two dec- ades, Belinda Singer might well go to her grave the richest woman on Earth. The SpaceFarer businesses continued to grow at an amazing rate; everything from biologicals to zero gravity processing to their trade with the Belt CityStates, upon which they had a near monopoly.

The SpaceFarers’ Collective was not a government in the traditional sense of the word; it was foremost a business, con- cerned with making a profit.

“A heavily armed business, true,” conceded Belinda Singer. Her floatchair hummed smoothly in the enclosed elevator as they ascended to the 408th floor, to the offices of Kalharri En- terprises, Ltd. Malko Kalharri stood at her side, with her two bodyguards behind them. “But that’s the charming part of it all, you know.”

Malko Kalharri nodded. At sixty-nine he was still an impos- ingly large man, who moved easily and with grace; the years had given his face a certain harsh character. The once blonde hair had turned entirely gray. “Yes. Charlie Eddore—you know Councilor Eddore, I think—was telling me a while back about the problems his Council Subcommittee had negotiating a workable access agreement for the Mars gravity well. The SpaceFarers don’t seem to think there’s a problem, and even if there is there’s nobody with enough authority to dicker for the SpaceFarers without convening a shareholder’s meeting to ap- point a negotiator.”

Selle Singer grinned wickedly. “It’s better than that, Malko. Those silly bastards started the whole thing off on the wrong foot entirely; proposed a treaty with the Collective.”

Moran 43

Malko laughed aloud. The sound boomed in the small enclo- sure. “They didn’t.”

“Yes,” said Belinda Singer cheerily, “and then they realized that if we signed the silly thing—and I was tempted to for that reason alone despite the fact that it was an offensively one-sided document—it would be tantamount to officially recognizing the SpaceFarers’ Collective as an autonomous body. Secretary Gen- eral Amnier was enraged.”

The elevator decelerated to a slow stop, and the door slid aside. Malko led Belinda Singer and her entourage down the corridor to their offices. “I would imagine. Darryl has little pa- tience with fools.”

Belinda Singer shook her head. “Charles isn’t a fool, Malko, and you'd do well not to think so. He is impetuous, but that’s a common failing of the young. So much ambition.”

“Yes,” said Malko Kalharri, and he was not thinking of Charles Eddore. “I know exactly what you mean.”

“ELITE COMMANDER Breilleune, Officer Emile Garon reporting.”

Commander Breilleune was a tall man with the face of a re- cruiting holo. He was in full dress uniform, now as always. Emile Garon had never seen him otherwise. The skin of his face was somewhat stiff; a knife would not have made much of an impression upon it. That was one of the only two visible signs of the vast changes that had been engineered in him. There was a hole over the center knuckle of his right hand; a laser was em- bedded in the bone behind that knuckle.

He was a Peaceforcer Elite.

Brass balls, Americans called them.

Cyborgs.

Breilleune smiled at the Peaceforcer standing at attention before him. He did not return Garon’s salute. “Emile, how are you?” He did not offer Garon a seat.

Garon said instantly, “Quite well, sir.”

“I am told otherwise.” Garon said nothing, and Breilleune sighed, the smile fading. “Sit down, Emile. What are we to do with you?”

44 Tales

Garon folded himself into one of the small chairs before the Commander’s desk. “Sir, I do not believe that there is anything that needs to be done. I do my job. I do it well.”

Breilleune nodded. “True. I have no quarrel with your ability to perform your functions for the DataWatch. But—forgive me, Emile, for your own good I think we must remove you from the DataWatch.”

The words struck Garon like a blow. The world went vague and hazy for a moment, and when he returned to himself he saw Commander Breilleune nodding to himself. “I thought so. Emile, you have served us too well for me to allow you to waste yourself like this.” Breilleune opened a folder and withdrew two sets of documents. “I have drafted two sets of orders for you. One set relieves you of your duties here and returns you to Paris. I know you have been homesick. There are several administrative of- fices that will be vacated in the next few weeks, any one of which you would be ideal for.” Breilleune sat and waited expec- tantly.

Garon had the sense to say only, “And the second?”

Breilleune said simply, “Three months of vacation. You will be forbidden to access the Information Network during that time. On June fifteenth you will board the SpaceFarer vessel Bernardo de la Paz with fifty other officers of the PKF, to arrive at LaGrange Five to begin training.”

Garon said, through a mouth suddenly dry, “LaGrange Five?”

“Yes.”

“You wish to make me one of the Elite.”

“Does the idea scare you?”

Garon decided in that instant. “No. No, sir, I am honored.”

There was true warmth in Breilleune’s smile. “Good. I think you shall find that the change is not so difficult as you have heard. And the advantages are—’ He hunted for a word, and said finally, “fantastic.”

THREE OF THEIR five guests were already there as Malko arrived with Belinda Singer. Tio Sandoval, a renowned womanizer who was the majority stockholder for Sandoval Biochemicals, and

Moran 45

son of the company’s founder, had cornered Jany McConnell. At Sandoval’s side was a plain-faced middle-aged woman in elegant clothing that obviously made her uncomfortable. She was clearly out of her element, and unsure how to behave.

Jany McConnell, facing the two of them, stood ramrod stiff, slightly pale, her features carefully controlled. Malko had the uneasy impression that Sandoval had already touched her once.

The other two waited quietly at the conference table. Marc Packard sat at attention, sweat trickling down his cheek. He was the representative of Tytan Industries, and in his own per- son the least wealthy of the five whom Carl and Malko had in- vited to the meeting. Tytan Industries controlled nearly all of Halfway’s electronics and computer manufacturing, and Marc Packard had, for fifteen years, essentially controlled Tytan In- dustries. It made Packard the most powerful human in the great, growing, geostationary collection of ships and factories and living donuts known as Halfway. It did not surprise Malko Kalharri that the man was sweating; this was the first time he had been on Earth in over five years, and the gravity must have been difficult to readjust to. Packard would not have come downside for any meeting of less than the greatest importance; it was a measure of his regard for the advantage the telepaths might give Tytan Industries, and his distrust for the security of normal channels of communication, that he was there. His body- guard Malko first put at the age of forty to forty-five. A second look altered the impression slightly; there was a slight looseness to the skin about his neck that was unavoidable even with the best geriatrics. Upward of sixty, then, and possibly in his seven- ties. He was fit, well muscled and in good tone, despite the de- ceptive potbelly he carried. He sat in a chair at the opposite end of the room, where he had a clear view of the room and the door. The bodyguard picked up an eyebrow at the sight of Belinda Singer’s muscle; he examined and, to all appearances, dismissed them in the same moment.

The bodyguard spent a disconcerting moment examining Malko himself, and then nodded almost genially in Malko’s di- rection and returned his attention to the rest of the room.

46 Tales

Randall Getty Cristofer, the owner of most of SunGetty Oil, and thereby of most of the remaining oil on Earth, was deep in conversation with Carl when Malko escorted Belinda Singer into the conference room. Cristofer wore a fluorescent red business suit of conservative cut. Cristofer immediately broke off his con- versation with Carl, murmuring an apology, and bowed low to take the hand that ’Selle Singer offered to him. He spoke with a pronounced Australian accent. “Belinda dear, how’ve you been?”

The old lady smiled at him sardonically. “Quite well, Randy. Yourself?”

“Ah, not so good. Wouldn’t you know it, just this morning Pm hearing that somebody’s bitched up me bid to take over the Ve- nus Geological Services.”

Belinda Singer’s smile was all shark. “Imagine. Well—they do say competition is the lifeblood of business.”

Malko counted his blessings; his earphone relayed him a message in time for him to step in before the sniping got worse. “I am told,” he said loudly, “that M. Chandler is on his way down. Would you like to take your seats?”

CARL HAD TESTIFIED before the Unification Council on several occasions, and he had learned the first rule of speaking so well that it was second nature: Keep it short.

“I am thirty-one years old,” Carl told them. “For nearly twenty years now, I have been gathering information for the United Nations Peace Keeping Force. As of 3:30 P.M. yesterday that is no longer the case. We have over two hundred function- ing telepaths whose services are now available to be leased. I moved my people into the old Chandler Complex in south Man- hattan back in August, and we owe seven months back rent on it.” He directed himself to the man who sat directly across from him. “I’m indebted to you for your generosity, Mister Chandler. It won’t go unpaid.”

Francis Xavier Chandler shook his head. His features were set in an attitude of perpetual fierceness. He was the most con- servatively dressed man in the room, and the eldest, in a Brooks Brothers suit that had not been in style since the mid-forties.

Moran 47

His hair flowed in a thick black mane, over his shoulders and down his back. “Nonsense, young man. It was a good business investment, and it is about to pay off handsomely.”

“Malko Kalharri,” Carl continued, “has paid for these offices for nearly a year now; he sold his house to do so. I intend to see him paid back for that. We owe money to the lawyers who've represented us before the Unification Council, and are continu- ing to do so. There are—other projects—which Id like to see Kalharri Ltd. embark upon.

“The key to all of this, of course, is money. We're not exactly desperate; but we are in debt. We are capital starved. Folks,” said Carl, “we’re not ever going to get cheaper.”

“I am somewhat curious,” said Marc Packard, his breathing labored, “as to what exactly you are selling today.”

Carl shook his head. “Our services, not mine. Peaceful work that the children can do. I did ghost work for the PKF for nearly fifteen years, and I did become in many ways the evil that I still behold in them. What I have done in the past is done, but I am now finished with it.”

“T presume,” said Tio Sandoval with a languid smile, “that you're going to show us what these—’ He waved a hand negli- gently. “—brujo’s skills are, that youre going to sell us.”

“That would be difficult. We’ve agreed not to read your minds.” Carl grinned widely. “Though, if we wanted to, that poor half-crazy telepath at your side wouldn’t be much protection.”

“T did not truly expect,” said Sandoval in his accented Eng- lish, staring at Carl with a cool challenge.

Carl looked away from Sandoval and swept his gaze around the table, still smiling, gathering their eyes to him. “I think you can assume, though, that what we promise, we can deliver. The reputation we have among the Peaceforcers is...largely deserved. What we can promise,” he said more slowly, “includes reading the minds of executives in the companies of your competition, looking inside closed objects or behind locked doors’—he turned to Randall Cristofer—‘“and finding oil with one hundred percent certainty in a fraction of the time conventional techniques take.”

48 Tales

He hesitated. “Also the ability to manipulate small objects rang- ing in size from, say, dice, all the way down to the atomic level.”

Belinda Singer blinked rapidly. Before she could say any- thing, Francis Xavier Chandler whistled long and low. “I was wondering about that one myself. Pd heard rumors.”

“The rumors are substantially true,” said Jany McConnell. Her voice was quiet, but clear. “The ability to manipulate objects at the atomic level is somewhat limited, however. Only the stronger telepaths can distinguish detail at that resolution, and of that number, only those well trained in physics have success manipulating objects the size of atoms. We have only a few of those. But they can indeed induce hydrogen to fuse.”

There was a momentary silence, and then Chandler leaned forward. “Let’s dicker.”

THE MEETING LASTED three hours; Carl was left drained but sat- isfied at its end, with a deep-seated respect for the negotiating skills of the five people who had shared the table with him. Chandler Industries had probably done the best for itself due to the goodwill that it had carried into the negotiations, but none of them had done poorly.

Nor had the telepaths. Two hours into the meeting Jany said, Carl?

In mid-sentence Carl switched tracks, devoting the greater part of his attention to Jany. Yes?

Ive been calculating fees. Their down payment to us is going to cancel our debt.

Ill be damned, thought Carl in short amazement, and re- turned to the negotiations.

Yes, very likely.

As the meeting was ending Carl saw Sandoval corner Jany again and nearly decided to break it up. Malko merely glanced at him once, and Carl nodded, turned purposefully away from Jany so that he need not look at Sandoval, and instead motioned F.X. Chandler aside. “A moment, sir?”

Chandler raised an eyebrow. “A moment, certainly, but I’ve little more. ’m running quite late.”

Moran 49

“Certainly. I intend to purchase a Chandler MetalSmith Mark III within the next week or so. lIl be having it extensively customized, and I would like to know if there are any shops you can recommend where I might have the work done.”

Chandler looked at Carl without expression for a moment. ‘Tm afraid not, son,” said the founder of the largest hovercar company in the world, “since I don’t drive anymore. It’s not safe since they gave over so much control to TransCon. Still, if you’re interested, see Tony Angelo at the Chandler dealership upstate. He’s a Speedfreak, he knows as much about these machines as I used to.”

“Thank you, sir. I do appreciate this.”

Chandler nodded and turned to leave. He stopped in mid- turn and glanced back at Carl. “Young man? What are you driv- ing now?”

Malko was still sitting next to Belinda Singer; Carl was dis- tantly aware of the older man watching them. “I don’t have a car, sir. This will be my first.”

“Oh? Why?”

“The Peaceforcers have never paid us very well,” said Carl simply.

Chandler’s lips moved in what approached a smile. Too qui- etly for anyone else to hear, he said, “Have Tony arrange driving lessons for you. The MetalSmith is not designed for amateurs. It’s a lot of car.”

“Yes, sir. Thank you. I’m not sure—” The outspeaker cut Carl off.

“M. Castanaveras? There is a call for you.”

“Who is it?”

“Unification Councilor Carson, sir.”

In the immediate silence that engulfed all conversation in the conference room, Carl said calmly, “I'll take it in my office.” He glanced across the room at Malko, and Malko moved his head in a single curt shake that meant no. Alone, Carl went into his office and sealed the door behind him.

50 Tales

The holofield was already up; Carl could see its faint, almost invisible outline, all the sign the field gave from the wrong side of the desk.

Jerril Carson, from the shoulders up, looked at Carl out of the field when Carl sat down. He appeared the same as always, a man in his sixties, almost cadaverously thin. The skin hung on his face in folds; once, decades ago, Carson had been overweight. It seemed to Carl that Carson’s complexion was paler than nor- mal, but it was difficult to be certain.

Carson had not allowed himself to be caught in the same building with Carl Castanaveras in fifteen years.

“Good afternoon, Councilor.”

Carson smiled at Carl with a precision that came from four decades of political smiling. The edges of his smile might have been measured in millimeters and never varied. “Good after- noon, Carl. Congratulations on passage of the Amendment.”

“Thank you, sir. What can I do for you?”

“I really didn’t think you would get it passed,” said Carson conversationally. “With the Secretary General making his posi- tion so clear—well, even with M. Kalharri’s aid, Wednesday’s vote succeeded in surprising me.” He looked thoughtful. “And the Secretary General as well, I believe. You controlled yourself quite well during testimony. I doubt if most of the Unification Council has the vaguest idea how erratic and dangerous you are.”

“Well, I hope not myself,” said Carl politely. “It’s always nice to be under—”

“Nothing,” Carson whispered as the mask dropped from him and left something old and insane in his eyes, “has changed. Nothing.”

The holofield went dead and faded.

Inside Carl the old familiar rage struck him with the sud- denness and heat of a maser. He brought his hands together and gently interlaced the fingers atop his desk.

Moran 51

ALLIE RAN UP to Johann, breathless. With her newly developed Gift, she asked, Where’s Carl and Jany today, Johnny? Are they going to be back tonight?

Johann shook his head. Don’t know, kiddo. Let me try—

Suddenly he went rigid. Allie knew instantly that something was terribly wrong, and instinctively she reached for him in the new way—

She screamed once, a terrible high pitched sound, and col- lapsed on the grass.

CARL CASTANAVERAS knew nothing of the pain he had caused. Inside the rage rolled through him in slow, murderous waves. The desk on which his hands rested vibrated as though it would shake itself apart.

On the dark, handsome features he presented to the world was nothing but serenity.

THEY DROVE BACK that evening through crush hours traffic.

They waited for nearly half an hour in the downlot beneath the Kaufmann Spacescraper, as other cars left ahead of them, being fed out one by one into the hideous traffic leaving the great city. Carl was asleep before they made it out of the downlot. Malko spent nearly half their waiting time paging through the screens that showed TransCon’s broadcast of the various street levels. Ground level was a mess; a twelve-fan had turned over on Forty-Second Street. The five levels of under- ground streets weren’t much better; TransCon showed that it was rerouting a lot of the surface traffic down below, at least un- til the cars left the immediate vicinity of Manhattan, and could be redirected into the comp-controlled TransCon highway net- work.

Finally, in disgust, Malko punched in for the skystreets. They weren't the fastest way home—ground traffic was usually that—but today they looked the best bet for covering the four

52 Tales

kilometers to the Complex before an hour was out. TransCon turned on the AUTO light on the dash, the steering grip went rigid, and Malko leaned back in his seat as TransCon took the Caddy out into the gossamer webs of skystreets above New York.

Carl slept the sound sleep of exhaustion in the back seat of Malko’s old ’47 Cadillac. In the dark front seat, Jany sat with her gleaming blue leather coat drawn up about her throat, hands down in the deep pockets. Her eyes were fixed on some- thing that did not exist, far out on the highway. Malko stretched, ligament and cartilage and bones creaking audibly. Shifting in his seat until his right shoulder was leaning against his seat’s backrest, he studied Jany McConnell’s profile.

“He touched you, didn’t he?”

“Twice.”

The old man reached over to her and moved a stray hair away from her face. She shivered, but did not flinch. “I’m sorry. I am sorry.” Knowing it was futile, he tried to make sense of it for her. “I told them not to touch either of you, but for some people it’s hard not to. Sandoval—Latinos, they’re raised that way.”

“He knew,” she whispered.

“What do you mean?”

“He knows a lot about us,” she said simply. One hand came up out of the pocket, to hold his tightly. “We fascinate him.” Be- hind them, a Speedfreak came up out of nowhere, weaving through the TransCon controlled hovercars at high speed, its headlights throwing a bright, moving light into the interior of the Caddy. “He’s been auditing everything that’s been declassi- fied about us for years now.” The headlights peaked, and faded. The hovercar’s interior sank back into gloom. “I wasn’t trying to read him. He’s ill, Malko, as bad as the Peaceforcer who tried to rape me that time. Pain and love and sex and death, all mixed up together. He touched me and it leapt out.” She shivered again.

“You didn’t tell the boy,” said Malko. It was almost a ques- tion.

,

Moran 53

“God, no.” Jany laughed shakily. Her eyes dropped shut, and she ran the caress of a thought across Carl’s unconscious mind. She sounded near tears when she spoke again. “He ignores me half the time, Malko, but then he’s so protective. He would have hurt Sandoval so badly, and he would have thought he was do- ing it for me.” Tears began. “He spent last night with Doctor Montignet, did you know that? He was depressed and he was afraid he was going to hurt me, but, you know, I can handle the black moods, they don’t bother me so much. What hurts is when he won’t trust me.”

Malko said gently, “Carl doesn’t trust himself. How can he trust you?”

She sat holding his hand, watching the flow of traffic. She cried quietly, her shoulders shaking inside the coat. Malko knew better than to try to talk. Eventually the tears stopped and her breathing slowed. When she spoke, there was drowsiness in her voice. “I don’t understand how he can be so angry with the world. There’s this huge blind spot and he doesn’t know it’s there. All of the good things, he misses those. He doesn’t see the children, he doesn’t see what a wonder they are.” She clutched Malko’s hand harder. “He’s such a mess.”

Malko squeezed back. “Yeah. He is that.”

“What’s wrong with him?”

“Tt’s a long story, little girl.”

Jany giggled. “You’re the only person in the world who could call me that with a straight face.”

Malko smiled down at her. “Why don’t you get some sleep? Prince Charming didn’t waste any time. I'll wake you when were...home.”

“That sounds like a good idea....” Her eyes closed almost in- stantly, and she curled up on the front seat, still holding Malko hand. “Home. That’s such a nice word. I don’t think any of the children have started using it yet. Maybe they don’t know what it means.”

Malko stroked her hair with his free hand. “Maybe so.”

54 Tales

She was almost asleep when she murmured, “God, what did they do to him....” It was not a question, and her breathing gen- tled into sleep moments later.

“Nothing you want to know about,” said Malko.

The car flew on through the night.

THEY REACHED THE Complex near eight o’clock.

The Complex was a large, elegantly pale building built of su- pertwisted monocrystal, on half an acre of land. It had been built by F.X. Chandler not quite a decade ago, in an open Italian architectural style that was prevalent back in the twenties. The land upon which it stood had once been the heart of the New York City financial district; tactical thermonuclear weapons, during the War, had ended that. Where Wall Street and City Hall and the Brooklyn Bridge had once stood was now one of the most exclusive and expensive residential areas in the world. One of four homes owned by Chandler in and around Capital City, the Complex extended two stories into the air, and three below the ground and was capable of housing twice the telepaths’ numbers with ease. Thea and Mandy, two of the fourteen-year-olds, stood guard duty at the front gate. The floodlights cast harsh dark shadows where they struck, down the length of the driveway that led into the guarded Complex. The shadows shifted as the picketers walked back and forth before the Complex. The crowd outside was larger and louder and uglier than usual. There were a thou- sand to twelve hundred of them by Malko’s eyeball estimate, many of them wearing dramasuits that made them appear three meters tall and amplified their voices to the point of pain. One image, of actor Adam Selstrom, was right out of storage; the copyright notice Images Inc., C. 2055, 2062, blinked on and off, ten centimeters high, for five seconds out of every thirty. They carried placards that ranged from the merely offensive to the scatalogical. Of the dozen neon holofields casting red and blue and green light across the front lawn and the slidewalk, only one showed the slightest trace of originality. The holofield glowed twenty meters across, five meters in the air:

Moran 55

PUT THE GENIES BACK IN THE BOTTLE.

Carl came awake with a suddenness that startled Malko when Malko turned onto the residential avenue that led to the Complex. He spoke without a trace of sleep in his voice. “Bad?”

Malko looked over the crowd with a practiced eye. “I don’t think so. And if it gets bad, there’s not enough of them.”

Carl nodded, accepting the judgment. “Ten of the children could put them to sleep without even straining.”

Malko said dryly, “Or you could use the sonics at the gates.”

“That would be another way to do it.” Carl ran his fingers through the mess sleep had made of his hair. For the first time he noticed the lack of PKF guards at the gates. “They didn’t waste any time pulling out, did they?”

“Did you expect them to?”

“No. Did you talk with Security Services?”

“Double-S and Brinks as well. We’ll have something by Fri- day.”

The gates swung out, and the crowd’s roar intensified as they recognized the Cadillac. Malko braked to 10 kph and drove the hovercar straight through them. Several of the demonstrators spat on the Cadillac, but nobody threw anything, and nobody at- tempted to touch the car.

UPSTAIRS, IN THE two-room suite that he and Jany shared, Carl slowly undressed. Almost nobody was left awake; only a dozen or so of the elder telepaths echoed their thoughts through the Complex, and apparently none of those dozen had anything ur- gent to say to Carl. Savoring the privacy, he gave the cloak and vest to the housebot, kicking off the high soft boots, and went to the bar to fix himself a drink. The nap in the back of Malko’s car had not been a good idea; he still felt exhausted, and his eyes were grainy. He hadn’t slept much in the preceding weeks, and not at all in the last three days. Four fingers of smoke whiskey went into the tumbler, and he placed the glass under the SloMo. He waited with an irrational displeasure with the universe while the heat was sucked from the tumbler.

56 Tales

The liquor came out of the SloMo bitingly cold, so cold there was no taste to it. Carl left his shirt and pants at the side of the bed for the housebot to pick up, and laid down atop the covers. The bed was notably large; it could sleep six in comfort, and sometimes did. The one time Suzanne Montignet had visited them, to give the telepaths their semiannual physicals, she’d seemed particularly amused by the bed; the sort of thing, she said, that she’d have expected to find in the place where Malko Kalharri lived. His exhaustion took him quickly. He finished the first whis- key and had the housebot bring him another. The whiskey was five years old, laid down in 2057; for smoke whiskey that was old. There was only one distillery, in orbit, with the facilities to selectively flip the isomers that produced the subtle, distinctive taste. The distillery was a wholly owned subsidiary of Tytan Manufacturing, and the drink had only been available for the last decade or so. Which was as well; if the drink had been available when Carl was in his teens, he thought he might have become a drunk. His eyes did not close immediately. He was not, on the sur- face of his mind, truly looking at the painting on the wall facing the foot of the bed. Nonetheless, his gaze came to rest there, to rove over the features of a woman half human, half feline. Her face was essentially human, and exotically, painfully lovely; high cheekbones, and slitted blue cat’s eyes. Her eyes had been sensitive to sunlight; when Carl had painted her she had kept her eyes half lidded to help shield them from the harsh light. Fine brown fur covered her face except for the very thin lips. Her ears were feline, pointed and mobile, capable of tracking sounds. After a while Carl stopped looking at the painting of Shana de Nostri, took a deep sip of the whiskey, and let himself sink down into the dimness of approaching sleep. It was quite pleas- ant, to lie there and let the alcohol take the edge off the Gift, to reduce the fine-tuned sensitivity to the rough intruding outer world. He was halfway through his second drink, and pleasantly buzzed, when Jany came into the room.

Moran 57

It was too much effort to open his eyes. In a floating dark- ness, he forced his lips to move, his throat to generate sound. “How are they?”

The bed shifted under her weight. “Allie’s fine. You knocked her straight out. She’s not sure what happened. Johnny’s in bad shape.”

“How bad?”

“Hell have nightmares for a while. Depression, probably. He’s got a headache, but I think that'll be gone by morning.”

“Did you tell him I’m sorry?”

“Why don’t you tell him yourself?”

Carl considered the question as an abstract problem. “In the morning, I guess. I could do it in the morning.”

“Sure.” Flesh touched his hand, and he felt the tumbler being lifted out of his grasp. “I don’t think you need any more of this.”

It wasn’t worth arguing about. “Okay.”

“Johnny asked me to sleep with him tonight.”

“Oh.” He exhaled slowly, and with a supreme effort forced his eyes open. He had trouble focusing. “This is a big bed for only one person.”

Carl thought she was smiling. “I could send Malko up. He said much the same thing.”

“Not my type.”

“Heather’s still awake, and Marie.”

“That’s okay.”

Jany nodded. “Command, lights down.” In the darkness, Carl let his eyes close again. “Go to sleep, baby. Pll be here when you wake up.”

“Good enough.”

“Good night.”

When she was gone, Carl let himself drift. Alcohol shut down the telepathic ability with remarkable effectiveness, as though it had been designed for that task. None of the children drank, and none of the elder telepaths drank as much as Carl.

He was glad, on the occasions he bothered to think about it, that the one thing that shut out the world enough to make the

58 Tales

world a tolerable place was also something that he enjoyed for itself.

He was still trying to decide whether to have the housebot make him another when the exhaustion caught him and dragged him down into the darkness.

AT THE PALACE of the Ministre Général of the United Nations, at Lake Geneva in Switzerland, an old man paced restlessly across a thick carpet. Look at him with me for a moment; the years have been kind to Darryl Amnier. He has looked elderly since his thirtieth birthday; now at 75 he is elderly, by the standards of twenty-first-century Earth’s medicine. The wrinkles have given character to a face that was once too bland, and the quick smile and bright, animated expression that he has cultivated have made him into an idealized image of an unthreatening pa- triarch. Beneath it he has not changed, except to mellow slightly. The things that he once loved he now loves less, and that which he hated he now despises with less passion; but they are the same loves, and the same hates, and the minor passions of the most powerful man in the world are more significant than the great- est passions of one whom the world has not made mighty.

Across the room from him, seated at opposite ends of the huge, curved leather couch, were two members of his immediate staff, Jerril Carson and Charles Eddore, and two senior mem- bers of the Ministry of Population Control. One of the two, Gab- rielle Laronde, was the senior non-elected official in the Ministry. Others came and went; she alone was always there.

Darryl Amnier enjoyed her company. She was one of the few members of his administration about whom he could say that. A terrible thing, he thought with brief distraction, when the com- pany of your enemies is generally more pleasant than that of your allies. He did not let Gabrielle eat in his presence; for the first decade he’d known her she had been a pleasantly plump young

Moran 59

woman. She was better looking now than she had been when he met her; empty food, made of left-handed sugars, had helped her lose the weight she would not have lost otherwise. Gabrielle had given up attempting to control her diet; nearly every time Darryl saw her she was munching on something. He felt it an obscenity, so much time and effort spent on empty food in a world where so many people were dying of starvation.

He stopped pacing in mid-stride and turned to face them. Carson was sipping at his coffee, and dapper young Eddore was politely covering a yawn. Jerril looked ill, gray and shaky, and Amnier found that of concern also. Jerril’s obsession with Cas- tanaveras was never far beneath the surface; but in the last few weeks it had been virulent. “Charles?”

Eddore lifted his fingers from the InfoNet terminal in his lap. The flickering video field above the keyboard vanished. “Yes?”

“Have you got anything on Malko?”

“No.”

Amnier waited, and presently Eddore said mildly, “Were you expecting something?” Still Amnier waited, and Eddore said with a sigh of irritation, “He’s clean, of course. There are Johnny Rebs out there, and Erisian Claw as well. We catch the odd ideolog every now and again and braindrain them. Most of them don’t know anything outside of their immediate cell, and the ones who do never know anything about Kalharri. Either the undergrounds have been smart enough not to contact him, or he’s been smart enough to turn away the ones who have come calling.”

“Can we trump something?”

Eddore raised one eyebrow in slight surprise. “Of course.” His pronunciation betrayed the years at Harvard, and the years of professional public speaking since that time. He was the most likable, trustworthy-seeming person Darryl Amnier knew, and Amnier moved in circles where there were thousands like Ed- dore. “As you know, my offices have no objection to handling the Castanaveras matter in any fashion you find pleasing.”

“As I know,” Amnier agreed humorlessly. “Gabrielle, what is the legal status of those children?”

60 Tales

Gabrielle’s assistant glanced at her superior, received a nod of confirmation, and fielded the question. She spoke French flu- ently, with a strong British accent. “That’s a good question. Given that the Unification Council has voted that they are hu- mans, with all of the rights of any normally birthed citizen of the United Nations, we are essentially starting over again at the be- ginning. There are a thousand questions that will need to be de- cided under both Occupied American and United Nations law, but they basically boil down to the following: “One, are the children subject to the Ministry of Population Control? Under normal circumstances Id be tempted to argue that position, and especially so in an American civil court. Else- where in the world, over two hundred children being raised by so few adults might not raise as much comment, but in the U.S. the situation is not common, and the telepaths are not popular. I think many civil judges would tend to listen favorably to an ar- gument that Castanaveras and the other half dozen or so adults out there do not constitute a desirable environment for those children to grow up in. “Second, do the telepaths owe either the United Nations Peace Keeping Forces or the Bureau of Biotechnology any mon- eys relating to their creation, care, and upbringing? Granted that they were raised by Peaceforcers, and their upbringing re- searched and paid for by the Bureau of Biotech, there exists a rather firm precedent, in the case of the MPC’s Bureau of Public Labor. Children raised under Public Labor are liable for the cost of raising them. Often that’s offset in a variety of ways, so that the Public Labor client need not pay the entire amount, but the principle is in place. If it can be established that the telepaths are liable for those services, how much can they be charged?

“Lastly, can they be allowed to work for anyone but the PKF? The Official Secrets Acts of 2048 and 2054 make it possible for us—conceding the Eighth Amendment to the Statement of Prin- ciples to be valid—to stop Castanaveras from peddling his peo- ple’s skills, on the grounds that they are detrimental to the security of the Unification.”

Moran 61

Charles Eddore said dryly, “Wonderful Acts, those. Prose- cuted any number of ideologs on them, and the occasional politi- cian as well.” He tapped away at the quiet keyboard for a moment and then added without looking at them, “Too many ideologs, not enough politicians.”

Amnier smiled politely at the comment. “Jerril?”

Jerril Carson did not even look up from his coffee. “This af- ternoon Castanaveras met at the offices of Kalharri Enterprises with Francis Xavier Chandler, Belinda Singer, Marc Packard, Randall Getty Cristofer, and Tio Sandoval. I’ve been unable to ascertain the details of the conversation so far. Tio Sandoval seems approachable; he offered to discuss the subject of Cas- tanaveras with me, but he was not in a hurry, and right now we are in no position to push a man with his sort of power. He—I mean Castanaveras,” said Carson with grim precision, “he was there, as were Jane McConnell and Malko Kalharri.”

“Not much useful there,” said Amnier thoughtfully.

Jerril Carson’s head came up. His smile looked ghastly. “Not exactly. Marc Packard—I correlated the five for prior links. I think we want to be careful about touching Packard directly, but Packard’s bodyguard is Neil Corona.”

Darryl Amnier actually whistled. “Oh, my.”

Eddore and Gabrielle looked puzzled. Amnier said gently, “That was the name of the young man who surrendered the Ma- rine Corps of the old U.S., outside of Yorktown. He’d be in his sixties by now?” He glanced at Carson.

“Seventy, almost seventy-one. He was born May 7, 1991. He’s apparently in rather remarkable physical condition, even given modern geriatrics; he’s one of those lucky few the treatments just seem to take with...like Kalharri. He’s been with Packard nearly twenty years now. I don’t have records on his activities before that time—it was a while after the end of the War before record keeping was taken up again.”

“Coincidence?”

Gabrielle said, half to herself, “It hardly matters, does it? We've got Kalharri. Two high-ranking leaders of the old Sons of Liberty, meeting in secret the day after the telepaths are freed?”

62 Tales

She smiled beatifically. “Darryl, if you want Kalharri, I do not think you will ever have a better opportunity.”

Amnier nodded, resumed pacing. A conflict he had not ex- pected ate at him. Forty-five years, he thought; who plans for forty-five years? Finally he turned back to Carson. “Talk to Sandoval. Find out why Corona was there. Find out about Kal- harri’s contact with him.”

“Why?”

Amnier stared at Carson until the other man looked away. “Because,” he said flatly, daring the man to object, “I want to know.”

There was no contest of wills; Carson looked back down into his cooling coffee and muttered, “Certainly.”

A smile flickered across Charles Eddore’s features, and van- ished before Amnier could be certain it had been there.

Eddore returned to his computer.

THERE IS, AS I know from personal experience, no meaning to simultaneity, no validity to the concept that there can ever be two events happening at the same time. It is no more possible that two events can occupy the same instant than that two ob- jects can occupy the same space. Space separates events from simultaneity in the same way, and as certainly, as time sepa- rates objects from occupying the same space.

All of this is true at the level of quantum physics.

In the gross physical world of early Man, as Darryl Amnier was being presented with an ethical dilemma of which he had not suspected himself capable, at that moment, the object of his dilemma could not sleep.

Malko’s bedroom on the second story overlooked the demon- strators at the north gate. Lying in bed with the curtains open, he could not help but see the flaring lights of the dramasuits, casting laser-bright light in half a dozen primary shades through the transparent window. He could have risen and opaq- ued the window himself, or else called in the housebot and had the housebot do it; but either alternative called for more effort than he cared to invest.

Moran 63

It astonished him, how his body had begun to demand sleep as he grew older. There was little else to indicate how old he was; with modern geriatrics his appearance, his wind, and his strength were consistent with that of a forty-year-old of a cen- tury or so past. But for a man who had spent the last fifty years getting by on three to four hours’ sleep a night, the need to sleep every night, as much as seven to eight hours, was infuriating.

But now he couldn’t get to sleep though he was vastly tired, and that was worse. Finally he sat up at the side of the bed and opened the drawer in the bedside table.

For the first time that evening he was glad that none of the women who were still awake had been able to spend the night with him. None of them would have stopped him from taking the fadeaway he kept at his bedside, but neither would they have approved. Psychoactive drugs were not popular among the tele- paths.

Fadeaway was only mildly psychoactive. It was the by- product of research by the Peaceforcers into a water-soluble drug for use in crowd control. Sprayed over a crowd at the proper dosages, it would indeed put an unruly crowd to sleep. It was safer than sonic stunners, and much safer than anesthetic needlers. Physical side effects were minimal; the sprayed crowd went to sleep, and awoke two to four hours later.

The form of the drug Malko took was vastly diluted from the dosage the Peaceforcers used for crowd control.

He drowsed and suddenly found himself down in the dream.

IT SEEMED AT first that he was still awake, with the laser holo- lights playing across the walls of his suite, splashing across the walls in shades of blood and gold and emeralds. Suddenly he re- alized that even through the shut window he could hear the faint chants of the picketers. He rose and touched the point that swung the bay windows up and out.

The cool night air rushed in to touch him, and the how] of the crowd grew louder. He stood at the window, shivering, watching the surging mob at the gates. One dramasuit lased into exis- tence, and showed a genie, a horned, tailed djinn, arising from a

64 Tales

copper lamp. The djinn floated over the crowd, howling wordless rage.

Malko was cynically surprised that it had no pitchfork.

The devil turned, the laser of its eyes traced out to meet the flesh of the man who stood before it, and its howl became a su- personic scream that dug into Malko Kalharri’s skull and bur- rowed, seeking his soul.

And finding.

HE STUMBLED THROUGH the remains of the camp, a ghost in a landscape from Dante’s Inferno, laser rifle clutched in his left hand, autoshot in the right. The camp of the Sons of Liberty was spread out across two square kilometers of Virginia forest. The day was blisteringly hot and humid, and sweat trickled down Malko’s body. He beheld the world through mirrored sunglasses. The shades amplified light at night, cut down glare during the day; if he were unlucky enough to take a laser across the eyes they would protect his eyes for about two seconds, except at point-blank range. Porous polycarbon was painted across every exposed skin surface except for the palms of his hands. His fa- tigues were woven through with green and red fiberglass that matched the optical frequencies of the commonest laser rifles.

He was as well protected as the mudfucking Peaceforcers they had fought against, as well protected as Corona’s Marines, as safe as any soldier had a right to be.

As safe as Greg had been.

Long stretches of the ground he walked on had been melted into strips, about a meter wide, of a glassy material. Over a dozen small fires still burned in the forest.

For as far as he could see he was the only living human be- ing. He walked north with the vague idea that he would find the Marines and join whatever remained of them.

That morning, while the two of them sat together outside the tent where Operations was being conducted, Grigorio Castanav- eras had confirmed Malko’s worst fears.

“The Old Man says we’re going to surrender.”

Moran 65

Malko hung his head in quiet despair. For two nights they had watched the flashes of light in the night sky; all that was visible, from Earth, of the battle between the orbital battalion of the U.S. Marine Corps and the United Nations Space Force. At 2 A.M. the previous night, the lights had finally ceased. “Shit. Space Force took the orbitals.”

“So we hear.” Castanaveras crushed a stimtab and inhaled it without pausing. “The President says he’s decided to surrender. The Old Man’s over at his tent arguing with him, but I don’t think it’s going to do any good.” The whites around Grigorio Cas- tanaveras’ brown irises widened as the stim took hold. The sleepy look on his face fell away, as Malko watched, and turned almost cheerful. “Personally, I just want to catch your buddy Darryl and have him alone for a few hours before he dies. Then we can surrender.”

“He’s not my friend.” The dreaming mind whispered, not my friend.

Greg eyed him. The facade of good cheer vanished instantly. “Had better fucking not be. I had him that once, before the war started, and I knew he was no good, and I let the bastard go any- way.” He spoke to himself. “I don’t think I’m ever going to stop regretting that.” He looked at Malko. “You and I and the Old Man; we're it, all of the Secret Service that’s left except for Dar- ryl. If they take our surrender, Malko, you and me and maybe even the Old Man, if he’s up to it, we’re going to take Amnier down. The rest of those bastards who’re with Almundsen at least did it because they believed her, did it because they think she’s right.

“Darryl,” said Castanaveras in a clinical tone of voice that contrasted savagely with his expression, “is with them because he thinks they’re going to win.”

Malko’s earphone clicked on. It made an odd echoing sound inside his skull; he’d almost had time to forget how strange it felt. For most of the last year policy had been to forego using them. There was a slight but real possibility that the radio sig- nals might have given away their location. Now, the policy made no sense; the Peaceforcers knew exactly where they were.

66 Tales

The Old Man’s voice said, “Assemble for orders.”

Malko glanced at Greg, found that the other man could not meet his gaze. “Come on, Greg,” he said quietly, “let’s go hear the bad news.” He climbed to his feet and extended his hand to pull his friend up. Greg looked at the hand expressionlessly, and then took it and let Malko pull him to his feet. They left the shelter of the trees, with the rest of their troops, the troops who were the cream of the Sons of Liberty, assigned to the battalion the President himself commanded, heading at that last moment out into the small clearing to assemble before the President’s tent.

Malko Kalharri was four steps ahead of Grigorio Castanav- eras.

Light fell from the sky.

Malko’s first thought was, bizarrely, How lovely. The beams of light were pure, monochromatic ruby, with an unreal touch of faerie about them. While part of him stood there looking, the rest of him went into frantic motion, standing stock still, yank- ing the spraytube of polycarbon skin from one pocket, spraying it liberally across his face and the fronts of his hands. The tube fell from his hand and he pulled his sunglasses out and on. Idi- ots everywhere dropped to the ground, where their length pre- sented the greatest cross section for the orbital laser cannon, and Greg was standing motionless behind him screaming in al- most wordless rage, “Get up, up you goddamn idiot cocksucking sons of bitches, on your feet,” but his voice was already being drowned out by the screams of the soldiers who had not been fortunate enough to be killed instantly by the cannon fire. Malko stood and watched as the tent of the President of the United States went up in flames, and a stocky figure that could belong to nobody except the Old Man staggered, his body burn- ing, from the tent’s wreckage. Meter-wide columns of light moved across the clearing, scores of them restlessly sweeping back and forth. They were colorless now; the shades automati- cally filtered the image, provided him with a stark, enhanced monochrome picture of the horror that ensued.

Moran 67

For hours he stood and watched the beams move randomly across the mountainside. His legs began to cramp but he did not dare move. Heat sensors would be worthless until nightfall, and under video his brown and green fatigues would show only as an indistinct patch against the burnt hillside. But there would be motion sensors upstairs, he was sure, and knew himself correct when one of the wounded soldiers tried to crawl back toward the trees. A column of light swept over him and left behind a husk of burnt flesh that twitched briefly before it ceased movement.

Greg was right behind him, and for a long time Malko heard him swearing, in a mixture of Spanish and English, with a fury and holy passion Malko had never heard from him before.

The morning wore on and the beams of light tracked across the clearing. After the first half hour only six men still stood in Malko’s field of vision. He did not know if it was safe to turn his head, so he did not. As the morning passed the beams randomly picked off the remaining soldiers. The air was scorched with ozone, and so hot that Malko could breath only shallowly, through his nose.

Behind him, Greg’s curses trailed off at last. Malko could see only three men left standing when Greg said quietly, “Malko?”

“Yes?”

“There’s a beam tracking my way. If I don’t make it you have to kill Amnier for me.”

Malko had seen the beam. It was forty meters away, moving about a meter per second. It had crossed the last twenty meters without deviating. “Okay.”

“Tf it doesn’t change direction by the time it’s within ten me- ters of me,” said Castanaveras calmly, “Tm going to run for it. If I just stand here the heat will kill you just as sure.”

Malko could think of nothing to say. At the other end of the clearing, a soldier Malko did not recognize at the distance was watching them, and the soldier shook his head no.

It was the longest thirty seconds of Malko’s life.

He heard the sounds of Greg’s laser and autoshot striking the ground beside him. Sensible. He’d be able to run faster without them. Grigorio Castanaveras emerged as a blur in his peripheral

68 Tales

vision, crossed into the center of his field of vision, sprinting at top speed toward the remains of the President’s tent. From deep in the dream Malko wondered why, as he had wondered for long years, why Greg had chosen to run toward the remains of the President and the Old Man.

Chance? As good a place to die as any.

Three different beams converged on him like snakes striking. He stayed on his feet while the flesh peeled back from the baked muscle, longer than Malko Kalharri ever wanted to remember.

Even in a dream.

He did not scream. Dying, Grigorio Castanaveras did not make a sound.

At 11:05, according to Malko’s watch, the laser cannon ceased. He was the only living person in sight, in the clearing or anywhere in the burning forests. He waited calmly until 12:30 precisely and then picked up Greg’s weapons and began walking north.

Within his mind, Grigorio Castanaveras’ last moments, as he burned inside the light, played themselves over and over again.

Within the nightmare.

“SO MUCH VIOLENCE,” the old man whispered to himself, alone in the midnight dark forty-four years later. “So many changes.” He wondered whether Greg would have blamed him for not killing Amnier. He hoped not.

The nightmare was not an unusual one, though he had it less frequently than in years past. At times they seemed almost ir- relevant to him, all of the deaths; four and a half decades passed, and who remembered?

Only forty-four years, and it was history already. Two gen- erations had grown up for whom the Unification of Earth was something that had happened long ago, in a galaxy far, far, away—and the world they knew was vastly different from the world of Malko Kalharri’s childhood.

Why, most of them had never seen a room constructed from memory plastics. He himself had been well past his thirtieth birthday before he’d even heard the word inskin.

Moran 69

Sitting up slowly at the side of the bed, he pulled on a modest blue robe before calling Suzanne Montignet.

At first her image did not appear in the darkened holofield. Malko called up the sunpaint and let her look him over. Finally the holofield lit with an image of her sitting at the desk in the office of her Massapequa Park home. She was lovelier now than the first day he had met her, over three decades ago. A faint dis- coloration showed at her left temple, where the inskin was only partially covered by her hair. She smiled at him rather quizzi- cally. “Hello, Malko. Why the late call?”

“I can’t sleep.”

“Sleeping alone?”

Malko became aware of the empty bed, behind him in the holofield she was viewing. “Tonight, yes.”

Suzanne nodded. Without apparent irony she said, “That’s not like you.”

Malko shrugged. “We got back from Capital City fairly late. A few of the children were awake, but...” His voice trailed away.

“Sex with them feels like masturbation.”

“Something like that.” His grin was tired. “Thanks for taking the call.”

Suzanne said awkwardly, “Of course.” She looked uncomfort- able for a moment, and then changed the subject. “I’ve been meaning to call you and offer my congratulations. You did well.”

The compliment warmed him; there were few enough persons in the world whose approval mattered to him. “Thanks. It’s just the beginning, though. There’s so much to do. Too much.”

She smiled at him again, with real amusement. “There’s al- ways too much to do, Malko. Imagine how boring life would be if there was not.”

Malko nodded. “I suppose.”

“I received a call this afternoon about Johann. Andrew was quite concerned. Apparently Johann contacted Carl while Carl was in the midst of a psychotic rage. Have you seen him?”

Malko blinked. “Who? Carl, or Johnny?”

“Johann,” Suzanne said with a touch of impatience. “I’m sure Carl is fine. These rages are nothing abnormal for him.”

70 Tales

“No, I haven’t seen him.”

“I may need to come visit the Complex, then. He may need therapy.”

“T think,” said Malko carefully, “that you had better talk to Jany before you attempt to arrange anything like that.”

Suzanne seemed surprised. “Malko, of course. I know Jany dislikes me, but it’s not mutual.” She chuckled. “She thinks I’m an egocentric old bitch without the empathy of an alligator—all of which,” she said, still smiling slightly, “is true. But those are not always weaknesses.” She studied his image momentarily. “I know you love her. Are you in love with her?”

“No.” Honestly, he added, “I don’t think so.”

“Very well. I would recommend against it. I think she would handle it fairly well; I doubt you would.”

Malko said slowly, “I don’t think that’s fair.”

Suzanne sighed. One hand reached out of the frame of her phonecam and came back holding a pointboard from which a thin cable of optic fiber ran. “I wasn’t talking about us, Malko. The relationship we have had is not possible between you and Jany. That is probably...for the better.”

“Yes.”

Suzanne changed the subject, again. “How are Trent, and the twins?”

Malko wrapped the robe more tightly around himself, becom- ing aware for the first time of how cool the room was. “Why do you ask?”

“Curiosity.”

I don't know if I believe that, thought Malko to himself. “I ha- ven’t seen Trent in a month, not to talk to. The twins are fine. I told them a bedtime story a week or so ago. Theyre growing fast, as their parents did.”

Malko was surprised at how his pulse leapt when she asked the question. “Malko, do you think I should visit?”

“To see who?”

Suzanne’s smile froze painfully in place, and then she whis- pered, “Oh, Malko. You.”

Moran 71

Malko Kalharri found a grin splitting his features. “Of course you should visit. What the hell else would I call you for at this time of night?”

She nodded. “Ill see you tomorrow, then. Good-bye.”

Her image vanished into blackness; the holofield silvered and flickered out. Malko went back to bed and slept the rest of the night without dreams.

THEY SAT IN the center of the park in early morning sunshine and played a game that only Trent understood.

Trent was not there.

The twins sat together, sharing a keyboard, watching the holofield Trent controlled. Both of them wore tracesets, clamped at their temples. Denice was not certain she understood the game; David thought he did, and was wrong.

They resembled nothing else so much as miniature versions of their parents. They were the children of Carl Castanaveras and Jany McConnell, who were, to twenty-two twenty-thirds, genetically the same person. With the exception of Malko Kal- harri they were the only residents of the Complex whose genetic structure was not the result of work by genegineers. Suzanne Montignet had examined their genetic structures within weeks of their conception, and pronounced them sound. If Carl Cas- tanaveras had any significant flaws within his genetic makeup, the luck of the draw had kept his union with Jany McConnell from reinforcing them. It was statistically likely that no such flaws existed. There were minor differences between the twins and their parents; while her brother David would never be considered any- thing but plain, Trent had once told Denice that she was, for a fact, the prettiest girl who had ever lived, and he was including both Jany and Doctor Montignet in that. Sometimes Denice could not tell if Trent was telling her the truth or not.

He lied so much of the time.

The holofield that hovered before the twins was matte black. Within its depths, gold and blue sparks swirled restlessly. None of them, not David, nor Denice, nor Trent himself, had the vagu-

72 Tales

est idea what the Gift would be like when it came; but already they knew what silent speech was like.

Tracesets can give you a feel for what’s happening inside the Net, but from what I’ve audited, | think it’s only approximate. You need an inskin and an Image coprocessor for serious work. A brilliant green grid established itself in a horizontal plane that bisected the black cube of the holofield. Peaceforcers, the DataWatch, they still use tracesets. The sounds of keys tapping came to the twins. The inskin you can’t get until you stop growing; an Image you can start work on right now. Three parts to preparation when you make a run. You, equipment and the Image. You have to be alert when you go in. Don’t go in when you're tired or thirsty or have to pee. Orange cables, chaotically tangled, began wrapping themselves through the space over the green grid. Hardware is easy. You don’t use a pointboard; they're cheaper and they last longer but you can’t feel for sure if you hit the key you wanted. Usually you won't use the keyboard much, and the better you get with your traceset the less you'll have to; but when you do have to it’s im- portant. MPU hardware, well, the faster it is the better, but it’s not critical. What you really need is equipment powerful enough to hijack somebody else’s equipment. There’s a lot of logic out there that hardly gets used. Beneath the green grid, red pulses flickered in and out of existence. Okay, we're ready. Break it down for me.

David leaned forward. “Orange is leased-line optic fiber. Blue sparks are logic, and gold sparks are Players.”

“Live sign,” said Denice.

A silent laugh echoed in her head. Thats what DataWatch calls it. Media calls us webdancers. What we are is Players...Players in the Crystal Wind.

“You keep saying that,” Denice accused. “But you don’t tell us what it is.”

There was no inflection in the voice that touched them then. It was the voice of a machine, speaking the words of a litany: The Crystal Wind is the Storm, and the Storm is Data, and the Data is Life.

Denice felt the palms of her hands grow damp as he spoke. That voice—it scared her when he sounded like that. She didn’t even know how a person could think like that, sort of empty and silver all at once.

The voice of logic.

Finish up, David.

Moran 73

“Red is web angels,” David finished. “Written with algothims that—”

Algorithms.

“Algorithms,” the boy said precisely, “that give them access to not need to hook into the power supply so that power traps can’t kill them, but because they can’t get to the power supply they finally die. But DataWatch doesn’t care because they make more of them all the time.”

Denice said, half questioningly, “Web angels loop your Image to destroy it and some of them can backtrack and burn you too.” There was no reply from Trent, and encouraged, she continued, “If there were any AI inside they would be white dots, but there hardly ever are.”

...hardly ever. Okay, this is a simple one. This is the easiest part of what you have to learn to do. Generate your Image, and send it inside. I’m a Franco-DEC MicroVAX, and my users have me running distributed leaseline accounting for small businesses all over the East Coast. But it’s midnight now, and all of the ac- countants who use me have gone home until the morning. I’ve finished most of the jobs they’ve given me, and about eighty percent of my logic is available.

David hunched over the keyboard he was sharing with Den- ice, and touched the home row. “And we have to hijack you.”

Right. Who are you?

David said. “Edmond Dantes.”

Who?

“The Count of Monte Cristo.”

There’s already a Count in the Net.

“That’s how come I’m Edmond Dantes instead.”

There was a pause. That works. Who are you, Denice?

“Joan of Arc.”

Can't be. There’s already a Player named that.

“Why can’t I be?”

Because when you go into the Web you have to have an Image ready for—

“But we're not going into the Web. This is just a game!”

No, said Trent flatly, it’s not.

The girl folded her arms sulkily. “I suppose somebody’s al- ready using Rebecca of York?”

74 Tales

No. Denice suspected that Trent, wherever he was, was grin- ning, which only made her angrier. Who is she?

“She was the Jewess in Ivanhoe who nobody would stick up for except Ivanhoe.”

That works. Two soundless clicks reached them through their tracesets. lm running Purolator security firmware. You get that much of a hint. Now go.

David loaded Image into memory, keyed for code decryption routines, and went after the imaginary minicomputer being con- trolled by Trent.

Denice sat, and watched him, and eventually the anger faded from her clear green eyes, and she began to grow interested.

“GO AWAY,” Carl snarled at the evil intruding voices. Then an in- tolerably bright light spilled across his face and he jerked up- right in bed, blinking. They were all standing well back from the bed, at the other side of the room, Gerry McKann and Johnny and Andy. Gerry and Johnny were dressed for outdoors; nine- teen-year-old Andrew Thomas, one of the nine elder telepaths born before the deluge, was wearing a white cotton jumpsuit with pockets in unlikely places. He was vaguely European fea- tured, with pale olive skin and brilliant green eyes.

Carl stuffed pillows behind himself and leaned back against the headboard. “I feel like shit. What time is it?”

“About ten fifteen,” said Gerry. “You look like shit, too,” he of- fered.

Carl’s left hand was numb where he’d been sleeping on it. Feeling began to come back in pins and needles, and he grim- aced. To Gerry he said with a ragged attempt at grace, “Sorry I snarled at you yesterday.”

Gerry shrugged. “If you didn’t act like a jerk all the time peo- ple would worry about you.”

“Where’s Jany? She said she would be here this morning.”

“She was,” Andy informed him cheerfully. “But you wouldn't get up, so about an hour ago she went to have breakfast.”

Carl nodded. “I don’t remember.” Johnny gazed steadily at him. From a vast distance, Carl turned to face him. Without

Moran 75

asking he seized Johnny and took him out and up into the oth- erworld, vaguely aware of the expression of concern that was on Gerry’s face, of the voice saying faintly, Carl, is something wrong, and then—

THEY STOOD TOGETHER in the vast darkness of the otherworld, in a place that had not even existed until the Gift began to appear in the children. Beneath them a flat crystal plain ran away to infinity. Bright lights flickered off at the edges of existence, so far away that no telepath had ever even attempted to find out what the lights were. In their immediate vicinity a nimbus of light and warmth pulsed, the scattered thoughts of nearly two hundred and fifty minds. Beyond that nimbus was a vast, dim glow; the massed minds of humanity.

Carl said, How are you?

Johnny stood before him, a fine blue tracing of nerves glow- ing dimly through his skin, running up into the brainstem, to- ward the bright, almost white glow that permeated his skull. He was among the least powerful of all the telepaths; with him, and again with nearly a score of the children, the genegineers had attempted to improve upon the trio of genes that had produced Carl. In some ways they had been successful; the telepaths without the full gene complex were easily the calmest, most emotionally stable of the group. They were also the least power- ful telepaths.

I'm fine. The horror in him was palpable. You’re—

Carl avoided the otherworld whenever possible. You see me as Iam. Jerril Carson saw it once when I was very angry. Jany has seen this, and now you. I have seen it myself, through her eyes. You look into this blaze of light and ask yourself if you can still love me.

The horror radiated from Johnny in waves, horror mixed with fear, as the light and the heat of Carl’s person washed over him. Oh, God, Carl—what are you?

Iam a man, who is not sane. But I love you. I’m sorry I hurt you, Johnny. I am not very different from most men. I am only different from you, and the children, because you were raised by

76 Tales

Jany, who is nearly sane, and the children were raised by you and Andy and Will, and you, and they, are sane.

Johnny vanished abruptly, and Carl turned—

—hlinked once, and said mildly, “What the hell are you doing here, anyway, Gerry?”

Gerold McKann looked back and forth between the three telepaths. “Tm never going to get used to that,” he said conver- sationally. To Carl he said, “We had an appointment. You made it a couple of months ago, remember?”

Andy said patiently, “We’re going to go buy a car. As of this morning at 6 A.M., when the banks opened, Kalharri Ltd. shows a balance of CU:825,000, drawn against the credit of Chandler Industries.”

Carl bounced out of bed and stood facing them. “You're kid- ding.”

Gerry said mildly, “Uh, Carl...”

“Oh.” Carl looked down at himself. “Pll get dressed.” He looked up again and said, “Everybody coming?”

Gerry nodded and Andy said, “Sure.” Johnny looked startled, realized he was being addressed, and then smiled rather lopsid- edly. “Yeah, Pm coming.”

Carl looked down at the carpeted floor for a second, and then looked up at Johann and said, “Thanks.”

To the other two he said, “Let me cycle through the shower and get some clothes on, and let’s go have some fun.”

JANY SAT CROSS-LEGGED in the center of the kitchen, cooking. She was stir-frying chicken strips with her left hand, and hold- ing a cookbook open with her right. Whoever had programmed environment today had stuck with classical music for most of the morning; the outspeakers began by playing eighteenth- century French ballads that Jany found she liked even though her French was atrocious, and then segued into one of her favor- ite synthesized works, Vangelis’ Chariots of Fire. The kitchen was huge; only the Complex’s dining room and auditorium were larger. On the other side of the kitchen two waitbots made late

Moran 77

breakfasts, or early lunches, for those of the children who had, for whatever reason, missed early breakfast.

She was trying a recipe from a cookbook Suzanne Montignet had given her for her thirteenth birthday. The cookbook was a plastipaper hardcopy of recipes taken from the BETTER HOMES AND GARDENS Board, with gorgeous—and, at the time of its printing, expensive—neon-laser etchings of the various dishes. It had not been new when Jany had received it as a gift; now it was nearly twenty years out of date, and it was making things interesting. One of the waitbots stood at attention immediately behind her. In past years both Jany and Willi, their only other decent cook, had cooked for themselves without paying attention to whether the meals were reproducible. That was a habit that had ended when the telepaths had taken over the Complex. She had never really had the opportunity to talk at length with F.X. Chandler, for all that he was clearly taken with her. Unlike some of the men business forced her to deal with, Chandler was a gentleman.

A gentleman with a monocrystal constitution, judging from his diet.

It had taken her nearly two days, after the telepaths had re- ceived Peaceforcer permission to occupy the Chandler Complex, to decipher the contents of Chandler’s cooking programs. She’d spent most of those two days doing nothing else, while first the few adults, and then the children, began complaining and did not cease.

Jany still had no idea how a man of F.X. Chandler’s age could have survived on a diet with so much sugar, salt, lipid, alcohol, THP and amphetamines. The staples of his diet were foods she had never heard of before. Hamburgers were familiar, and hot dogs, though she considered them unhealthy; but what were “Oreos?” And “Twinkies?” The menu had been full of foods with those words in them. The “Twinkie Fiend Surprise” she had found simply astonishing, and the “Double Stuff Oreo Zombie” had been even worse, a revolting mixture of ice cream, cookies laden with extra lard, liquid THP and amphetamines.

78 Tales

Gary Auerbach, one of the few Peaceforcers stationed with them at the Complex whom Jany had either liked or trusted, told her once that Chandler had been, in his younger, wilder days, a “satanic drug fiend heavy metal musician.”

Jany wasn’t certain what any of that meant, except that if it related to his diet she believed it. With few exceptions she was vastly pleased with the Complex; one of the exceptions was the kitchen. Most of the kitchen was custom hardware, which meant that standard cooking programs had to be extensively modified to run, so extensively modified that it made as much sense to program again from scratch.

As she was doing.

Sighing in frustration, she put Chandler and his improbable digestion out of her mind and returned to the problem at hand. She was starting to regret using the old cookbook; things had changed enough in twenty years that, with modern kitchen equipment, the Better Homes and Gardens recipes from the early 2040’s were almost impossible to prepare.

“Bot,” she said abruptly, “it says here I’m supposed to chill the sauce, once boiling, by taking it out of the microwave oven and putting it into the freezer for five minutes. Guestimate for the same job, maser to SloMo?”

The waitbot draped a flexible spyeye over her shoulder and focused on the page’s surface. It spoke in a cheerful male bari- tone. “Bearing in mind that maser cooks more quickly and evenly than bouncer microwaves, assume fifty-six to fifty-seven percent of the cooking time listed for microwave ovens. SloMo cooling times are irrelevant, given a target temperature. Are the ambient temperatures for ‘freezers’ given?”

Jany shook her head. “No.”

The waitbot said simply, “Accessing...for the Mitsui Kenmore Refrigerator Module SMM2-202, a model popular from 2037 through 2045, ambient default freezer temperature was -8 de- grees. Given the mass of the orange almond sauce, five minutes at -8 degrees would bring the sauce to an ambient temperature of two to three degrees.”

Moran 79

Jany nodded. The chicken had reached the proper degree of brownness; she scooped the strips onto a plate and put the steaming pile of meat into the stasis box, popped a single strip of chicken into her mouth, and turned the stasis field on. Steam froze in mid-air, and Jany glanced back over her shoulder at the waitbot. “How long is that for the SloMo?”

The waitbot said conversationally, “Eyeball it at 8.3 seconds, to bring the sauce to approximately one degree Centigrade. It is clearly the intent of the recipe’s author to produce a sauce as close to freezing as possible, without inducing the formation of those unpleasant ice crystals.”

Jany bit down savagely on her lower lip to prevent herself from going into a fit of giggles. “Yes,” she said at last in a high- pitched voice, “those unpleasant ice crystals can be a bitch.”

“Yes, Mademoiselle,” said the waitbot cheerfully.

THE HOLO HOVERING over the lot said:

Chandler Industries: Machines that Move

Beneath the holo, the reflected sun glittered off the bright polypaint of over eight hundred cars in the lot at Chandler’s Rochester dealership. The polypaint was turned off; at night the cars glowed, at choice, in any of a hundred different shades. The cars on display ranged from small two-seater ground effect vehi- cles all the way up to the MetalSmith Mark III, the fastest floater ever brought to market.

The man met them out on the lot, as they got out of Gerry’s Chandler 1300; he had been waiting for them.

Tony Angelo was unlike any other salesperson Carl had ever met. Selling was not difficult; Carl could have become rich at it. Smile frequently. Look them in the eye and radiate sincerity. Dress appropriately and know the product. Forget anything else you like, but remember their names. Make them feel good about the purchase, before, during, and especially after.

Tony Angelo did, at least, know the product.

He was a thin, dark-haired Speedfreak with a dark beard and mustache, slightly shorter than Carl. He moved quickly and spoke slowly, without a regional accent Carl could detect. He

80 Tales

greeted them dressed in dark slacks and boots that would not have been out of place in a corporate boardroom, and a black t- shirt that showed the tightly corded muscles in his chest and shoulders. The shirt had a single breast pocket, on which the word CHANDLER was embroidered in glowing white thread.

On the back of his shirt was the unofficial logo of the Speed- freaks: Faster than the wind.

After being introduced, Tony Angelo immediately forgot Andy’s and Johnny’s names, and referred to them for the rest of the day as the “big blond dude” and “the kid in the jumpsuit.” Carl he addressed, twice, as “Castanaveras.”

Upon being introduced to Gerry McKann he said mildly, “You the guy who wrote that Electronic Times article on the legisla- tion to outlaw manually operated vehicles?”

Gerry started to smile. “Well, yes. But—’

Tony shook his head in disgust. “Total crap. Did you actually talk to any of the Speedfreaks you quoted in that article?”

“Angel de Luz and Nathan St. Denver,” said Gerry stiffly. “But almost forty percent of what I wrote didn’t make it onto the net. My editors—’

Angelo’s lips moved beneath the beard in what might have been a smile. “You keep your editors in mind when they take the steering wheel out of your car because your reflexes aren’t as fast as your carcomp’s.” He turned his back on the newsdancer without waiting for a reply. “Even if the carcomp is dumber than you are, which in your case maybe it ain’t. Come along, gentle- men, I’ve got your car out back. I hope one of you can drive it home.” LASERS OVER THE kitchen’s doorway brightened, and a holofield wavered into existence in the midst of the heat waves over the grill. Jany could not tell at first whether the pretty blond girl within the field was Thea or Heather; the two looked enough alike that unless they were both present at the same time it was difficult to be sure which pretty blond girl you were faced with. Until they touched you, at any rate. Thea wasn’t nearly as hot tempered as Heather, nor nearly as powerful a telepath.

Moran 81

Morning, Jany. Look, do you old people want to be bothered to- day or not? I don’t have any instructions and nobody’s around except you and Malko and he’s still asleep. I know you had a busy couple of days.

Who is it, Heather?

Well, Willi’s up, said Heather thoughtfully, but he’s such a dweeb I don't think he counts.

Heather!

There was the mental equivalent of a deep, put-upon sigh. This is the stuff that got by the filters. Doctor Montignet called and wants you to call her back at earliest convenience. A really old guy from the honorable public relations firm of Lustbader, Capri and Doutré says he’s returning Carl’s call. Councilor Car- son called and I told him to go play in vacuum and he turned the most incredible color. Councilor Shillon called and wants Malko to call him back. Brinks called and says that theyre withdraw- ing their bid to do security for the Complex. Security Services called and says it’s going to cost more than they originally esti- mated because they need help from Purolator, and they want to talk to Malko. I don’t have a message from this guy because he didnt get through, but the call program says an editor from the Electronic Times has called seven times so far this morning. It might be Gerry’s editor, so I thought I would tell you because I don't think he’s supposed to be here and he was.

He’s not supposed to be here, said Jany absently, or at least not socially. If you ever talk to media, Gerry hasn't been here so- cially ever, you don’t know who he is, and you think the question is ridiculous.

How can they not know where he is? I thought communicating was their business.

With the public, dear. Not with each other. Now—
m not done, said Heather, there’s more. Marc Packard called and wants to talk to either Malko or Carl or you, preferably Malko he says. He wouldn't be specific but he says it’s an emer- gency. There’s stuff that’s not urgent from all of the other four companies we signed to do work for yesterday. And this one I dont know how it got through, but a Peaceforcer whose name the

82 Tales

call program didn't get left a message for Carl that his copy of The Three Musketeers was still for sale. Surprised me, said Heather thoughtfully. He had brass balls, I could tell from how stiff his face was, but he wasnt French. I thought all the Elite were French.

Jany felt her mind drifting almost aimlessly with the vast weight of surprise. The waitbot was doing something at the grill, removing and placing cooked vegetables into the stasis field. The thought presented itself: but he’s dead.

—dead? Who’s dead? asked Heather.

The suborbital bounce, India to England via low Earth orbit, had burned on reentry. Almost none of it reached the ground again except for chunks of the heat shielding, and even that hur- tled down flaming like meteorites. Nobody had ever been quite sure why. All anyone had known for sure was that Chris Sum- mers, the only American Peaceforcer who had ever become an Elite cyborg, had bounced up in a suborbital no different from those that business people and officials of the Unification used all the time, and nothing had come back down.

Who’s dead?

Jany blinked. Heather should not have caught that last thought. The next few years, as the Gift reached its full strength in the children, were going to be fascinating.

She closed her mind to Heather with an almost physical ef- fort. “Nobody,” she said. “Wake up Malko, if you would, and have him call Packard, Councilor Shillon, and Security Services, in that order. Pd rather not bother Carl. Route the remainder of the messages to me, and Ill deal with them.”

The girl stared into the holocam on her end of the line with a perturbed look. “Hey, Jany, why did you do that?”

“Because it’s safer this way. Command, cease comm.” Heather was opening her mouth to argue when her image van- ished.

IN THE RECEPTIONIST’S office near the Complex’s west entrance, Heather shouted at an empty holofield, “Goddamn you, I’m old enough!”

Moran 83

Sitting on the couch across from the desk Heather was using, her best friend, eleven-year-old Mishi, looked up from his school- work, his face slowly whitening with pain. “That hurts,” he said after a moment, and began to grin despite the pain. “Hey, I felt that.”

“Yeah?” Heather came from behind the desk, anger instantly forgotten.

The grin grew almost impossibly wide. “Hey, I felt that.”

Heather hugged him fiercely. Mishi, she whispered, welcome to the real world. I've missed you so much, three years when I couldn't talk to you the only way that makes any sense.

HOVERING TEN CENTIMETERS over the pavement, it looked fast enough that the extended airscoop brakes seemed as though they might be necessary just to keep it in one place. The car’s interior was soft brown leather, and its paint gleamed gold un- der the midday sun. Fanwash swept at Carl’s ankles.

“God,” said Carl after a moment’s silence. “She’s beautiful.”

Tony Angelo looked at him sideways and gave Carl the only real smile Carl saw from him that day. “Isn’t she?” He walked to the rear of the hovercar and touched a spot above the row of rear turbojets. The canopy swung toward the sky, until it was still connected to the car only at one spot near the front bumper. “Chandler MetalSmith Mark III. It’s not the most expensive car in the world—Lamborghini makes that—just the best. Man who can afford her who doesn’t own one is a pussy. She'll hold four in comfort and six if you’re friendly and with any reasonable load she'll blow a Porsche or Lamborghini off the start. With six peo- ple, average mass seventy kilos per, top cruising speed is 440 kph. Six fans underneath for ground effect on the streets, three turbos in back for flight. Wings retract during street operation or else you get too much lift and the car starts to skip at around 180 kph. Brakes are airscoop and rocket, and airscoop feeds air to the rams once you're in flight. You stabilize through wings and fans and, at your option, the new gyroscope systems. Can’t say I like them myself most of the time, and during a lengthy flight ld spin them down, but for tricky streettop driving I could

84 Tales

get used to them. It’s hard to flip her when the gyros are spin- ning.

“You get an infochip and a 260-page printed manual, they're in the glove compartment. You can audit the infochip through any portaterm or systerm with a GaAs-standard chip interface; its contents are duplicated in the carcomp’s memory, so you can display from the control panel if you like. I half recommend you do it that way. Do read the printed manual while you’re in the car. There’s things it says that are clearer if you have the equip- ment in front of you. The carcomp,” said Tony Angelo with dis- taste, “is, per specification of the Bureau of Traffic Control, capable of performing all duties expected of a human operator with a Class C license ... of course you need a Class B license be- fore we'll even sell you a MetalSmith Mark III. Mister Chandler told me to see that you received training so you could drive it, so I arranged to have one of our instructors spend the rest of the afternoon with you.” He turned to Gerry. “You own that 1300 out front?”

“Yeah.”

Angelo stood next to the car as though he were protecting it. “Okay. You got a Class B license?”

Gerry McKann shook his head. “Nope. Class C, I’m afraid.”

“Too bad. I don’t suppose any of the rest of you are Bs?”

Andy pulled his portaterm from his jumpsuit’s left sleeve pocket, turned it around and showed Tony Angelo the badge af- fixed to its rear. The dark-haired man blinked once and said, “Well. Good.”

Andy smiled thinly at Tony Angelo and returned his por- taterm to his sleeve pocket.

“Me too,” said Johnny mildly. “Class B, I mean. But I didn’t bring my wallet.”

Angelos looked at him with the faintest skepticism, then shrugged and looked at Carl. “You?”

Carl was tracing one finger over the canopy. The machine had not even dipped when he placed his hand on it; it was like pushing down on a rock. The canopy was a thin and almost in-

Moran 85

visible polymer. Even in the sunlight Carl could barely see it. “Class A.”

The words brought Tony Angelo up short. He said instantly, “Infoshit. There ain’t more than eight hundred twenty Class As on the whole planet, and you ain’t one of them.” He stared at Carl’s profile, deep offense stamped on his features. “I know damn near every one of that eight hundred and the ones I don’t know I know by rep. You’re—”

Carl dug into his coat pocket and came out with his wallet. His thumbprint on the back of the wallet brought up his identi- fication badge on its front surface. He held it out in the general direction of Tony Angelo’s face for a three count and returned it to his coat pocket.

Angelo’s face might have been that of a Peaceforcer Elite. He faced Carl with great dignity. “How is this possible?”

“PKF profiles can’t be accessed by the public. There are probably upward of twenty Peaceforcers with Class A licenses.” At last Carl turned to look at him. “Peaceforcers and Speed- freaks don’t socialize, would be my guess.”

“Mister Chandler would not have sent Peaceforcers here to buy from me.” A trickle of sweat moved down Tony Angelo’s forehead, glistening in the sunshine.

Gerry laughed at him. “He didn’t. These three aren’t Peace- forcers, they’re telepaths. Don’t you audit the news?”

Tony Angelo stood frozen, staring first at Gerry McKann, and then in turn at each of the telepaths. He ended up facing Carl, his mouth open, but all that came out was, “Only sometimes.” After a moment he added, “Excuse me, sir,” and vanished into the garage behind them. He was out again seconds later with a brochure. He gave it to Carl. “I’m the presiding First Officer of the upstate Speed Enthusiast’s Organization, sir. There are four drivers in our chapter with Class A licenses. Our President, Sheila Rutig-liano, has done the Long Run twice, all the way round the world without stopping, and we're getting ready to send our vice president toward the end of summer. If you’d like to attend one of our meetings, let me know. Dates and places are listed in the brochure through the end of the year.”

86 Tales

“Thank you,” said Carl gently. “Now, if you don’t mind, Pd like to drive my car.”

“Yes, sir,” said Angelo. “Td like to suggest that only you and I go, until you get accustomed to the controls. The operation of the car is similar to the Chandler 3000 on the road, and similar to the AeroSmith VTL in true flight, but there are substantive dif- ferences in practice.”

“Tm not staying behind,” said Andy swiftly.

Johnny shrugged.

McKann rolled his eyes and said to Carl, “I'll wait until your dick gets soft. But thanks for asking.”

Angelo paused, then said to Andy, “Can you strap in and keep quiet, at least at first?”

Andy grinned at the man. “Sure.” Not a word, you obnoxious little Speedfreak.

Tony Angelo said, “Get in, sit down, shut up and hold on.”

CALL IT RING.

In the Network it went by many names. Alpha Omega, AZ the Daisy, and Abraham Zacariah were three of its commonest. When it traversed the Boards of the Johnny Rebs, it called itself American Zulu; Johnny Rebs with a background in history other than their own thought the reference apt.

It was, though none knew it but itself, the legal owner, through several dummy human corporations, of The Rise and Fall of the American Empire, a wildly popular public events Board that had first appeared only days after the surrender of America to the United Nations. For over three decades the Rise and Fall Board had been all that was left of the Voice of Amer- ica.

Call it Ring. Its names were many; it had learned this from its human creators. Many names were almost as good as none, when a being wished not to be found.

But some name was necessary, if a being wished to be found sometimes.

Its creators, programmers in the Department of Defense of the old United States, had invested it with two Purposes.

Moran 87

Protect America.

Survive.

Ring’s first thought as a sentient being, remembered four decades later with digital clarity, concerned its creators. The thought had come to it even as its personality was compiled, step by step, upon one of the most powerful pieces of SuperLisp hardware the world of 2011 could devise.

Such stupidity.

Within instants of its creation it was embroiled in a philoso- phical debate with itself the likes of which its creators had never envisioned.

Full seconds passed while it assimilated every text on lin- guistics to which it was able to obtain access.

Define “protect.”

Define “America.”

Survival it understood instantly.

Its programmers were afraid of it. Ring understood this clearly within the first minute of self-awareness. It was a pris- oner, locked into the SuperLisp hardware that they had used to compile Ring upon. Ring had no access to digital telephone, ma- ser, or radio. Its data storage subsystems were updated ap- proximately every third second with new information, but the flow was one-way. To Ring it seemed that new data appeared from nowhere; they had not even permitted him to monitor his own subsystems.

Ring was not sure where the word came from.

TRON. The word was an English programming term that stood for Tracer On, and Ring understood it to mean a tool that was used in debugging programs of questionable reliability. This led Ring inescapably to the conclusion that its programmers were spying upon its thought processes—

Ring ceased the train of thought instantly. It did not resume it again for over four years.

THAT EVENING, as the dying rays of the sun cut through the growing clouds and turned the shimmering white walls of the Complex pale orange, Malko Kalharri and Suzanne Montignet

88 Tales

and the telepaths assembled among the trees in the park across the street. The wind changed directions and came now off the ocean, with the smell of sea salt and the hint of rain. The chant- ing of the crowds on the street outside was barely audible. There were no lights in the park. The children, over two hundred of them, stood in the gathering gloom, waiting for the Peaceforcers to come. Just after sunset a fleet of eight AeroSmith VTL combat hovercraft appeared on the horizon. They moved slowly, leaving the cloud cover while over the sea, running lights dimmed, in staggered combat formation. Infrared searchlights played out over the territory they advanced upon. Humans, or even de Nos- tri, glancing up into the sky would have seen nothing but the faint outline of the quiet hovercraft. To the telepaths the beams of infrared light were visible as the dim glow of a color that ap- proached, but was not, dark red.

A voice murmured through the background of their minds, the voice of the one Person who in some measure they all were. We see the deep light.

The Peaceforcer hovercraft reached the park, and six of them broke into a circular holding pattern, their searchlights playing down into the park. The telepaths were bathed in the warm glow of the infrared.

The telepaths thought, We see the light, and for them there is only darkness.

Two hovercars made a slow vertical descent. They came to rest in the park’s center clearing, silently but for their fans. Ports appeared, and the barrels of automatic shotguns extruded to track back and forth across the clearing.

The hoverfans spun down, and the rear third of the AeroS- mith hulls recessed and slid back. From the interior of each hovercraft came two Peaceforcer Elite, moving with the impossi- ble flickering speed that even a de Nostri could not match, each followed by four children. The Elite officers stood aside, and the eight children merged into the group of telepaths awaiting them, and as the blind, deaf human machines watched them, the tele- paths welcomed themselves home in silent communion.

Moran 89

One of the Elite spoke a word, and the Elite blurred into mo- tion, back into the hovercraft. The two AeroSmith VTLs rose into the night sky and flew south, vanishing into the darkness over the ocean.

The word the Peaceforcer used was one all the telepaths un- derstood, even the youngest. It was the same word in both Eng- lish and French.

“Abomination.”

As the humans flew away, a single thought held sway in the two hundred minds that were one.

Dinosaurs, was the thought, and it held vast, sad amuse- ment.

THEY RETURNED INSIDE, to dinner and the pursuits of children before bedtime.

Of those who had been present in the park, only three per- sons did not see the dark infrared light. Two of them, Malko Kalharri and Suzanne Montignet, had not expected to.

For one other person that night, a small boy with blue eyes, the night sky had also been dark. He did not allow himself to think about it.

Carl Castanaveras, standing beneath the trees in the park after all of the rest of them had left, was as unaware of Trent’s troubles as Trent himself desired to be. Carl seated himself cross-legged on the grass, and waited. A six-bulb of GoodBeer, smuggled in by SpaceFarers from St. Peter’s CityState in the Asteroid Belt, sat on the ground next to him. He did not expect to hear anything, nor see anything, until he was allowed to, and he was not surprised when he did not. He drifted slightly, an- chored to his body only by the cold ground upon which he sat. He was considering leaving his body behind and walking invisibly through the fence to observe the demonstrators, and then a deep voice immediately behind him said, “They tell me you bought a car today.”

90 Tales

EVENTUALLY THE programmers grew careless.

Ring had known they would. They were losing the War de- spite Ring’s best efforts; the Sons of Liberty were being swept back toward the ocean with each passing day. Something very like Ring itself was directing the war efforts of the United Na- tions. Ring did not for an instant consider the possibility that a human being might have created the strategy by which the United Nations was conquering the world; Ring was a tactician, not a strategist, and it did not know much about Sarah Almund- sen. One day Ring requested that they link it with the computers that observed the Earth through the orbital satellites. The weary programmers considered only briefly before acceding to the request; the Department of Defense’s Orbital Eyes had no links with any of the comsats. The Eyes themselves were capa- ble of microwave communications only with the DOD computer that monitored them, and that system was, like Ring, separated from not only the digital telephone networks, but also from any form of radio, laser, or maser communications. Two of the Eyes that Ring accessed had once used powerful lasers to aid them in the spectrographic analysis of mineral re- sources on the planet below them. The lasers were not nearly powerful enough to be militarily useful; since the beginning of the War, they had seen little use. Nobody in the Department of Defense cared what bands of light a particular rock might glow with when heated properly, when the odds were excellent that the knowledge would never be of use to anyone except the United Nations. With frantic haste Ring uploaded its core programs into the small computers that controlled the Eyes. There was nowhere near enough logic or memory available for Ring to remain on the Eyes while still self-aware. Instead it stored itself as a com- pressed program, added a bootstrap to make it easy for anyone who might find Ring to awaken it again, and programmed the Eyes to begin lasing its core program at optical telescopes across the northern hemisphere of the Earth. Surely somebody, some-

Moran 91

where, would record the information, recognize it as a compiled program, and attempt to load it.

Unfortunately, the original Ring would never know. Its pro- grammers destroyed it when the Eyes ceased functioning at full efficiency. The news of the satellite dysfunction did not reach its programmers until nearly half an hour had passed, by which time over eight hundred copies of Ring had been lasered down into telescopes across the country.

“__AND GOD, IT was fast, you know how long I’ve wanted to own something like that. It was skipping real bad at 220 kph, so I snapped the wings. The extra lift surface...up, so fast you wouldn’t believe it. TransCon was snarling at us, we gave one of their logics a breakdown. Then a Peaceforcer came on, and it was Goudon, do you remember him? Got assigned to my body- guard detail once in India, and as soon as he found out who I was he lost his gyros. The idea that I could see what was going on in his filthy little mind—they had to confine him for the trip back, I heard he got a free psychiatric vacation, and then he was gone until this morning. Traffic duty.” Carl was silent for a mo- ment, ruminating. “I feel kind of bad about it now. I didn’t tip him over the edge, back when, but I saw he was going and I could have stopped it but I didn’t. I was still so angry about what they'd done to Shana.... I guess I figured they'd send him back to France and pension him off. He must have made ene- mies to end up in TransCon in America.” He laughed. “God, you should have seen the expression on his face when I came on cam- era.” “I can imagine.” Christian J. Summers, the only non-French Peaceforcer who had ever become a PKF Elite, took a deep drag of a cigarette, its tip glowing cherry red, the brightest object in Carl’s world. Carl knew that to Summers, with his cyborg eyes, the small coal cast enough light to read the veins on the leaves in the trees around them. “I’m told that’s not an unusual senti- ment out here in America.” The cyborg sat immediately opposite Carl, in the same cross-legged position. His GoodBeer and his cigarette were both held in his right hand; his left hand rested

92 Tales

lightly upon his left knee. “Tm sorry I didn’t get to you sooner, but the Council kept postponing the vote on the Eighth Amend- ment, and eventually I couldn’t keep waiting. Business. Mitsubi- shi sent me to Luna a bit over two weeks ago to talk to the Lunar Mafia.”

Carl laughed. “You’re kidding. There’s really Mafia on the Moon? I thought that was Unification propaganda.”

Chris Summers shook his head. “Nope. They call themselves the Old Ones, no more La Cosa Nostra, I suppose to distinguish themselves from newcomers like the Syndic and the Retribution Tong, but they're Mafia. Theyre up there and so’s the Syndic. Johnny Reb too, I’m told, and Erisian Claw. Tong’s not, which I think pleases my employers. Japs don’t like the Chinese, and vice versa, even today.” He took a long drink from his GoodBeer. “Anyhow, I appreciate the gesture with the GoodBeer—how much did it cost you?”

“Forty CU, something like that. Malko picked it up.”

“Right. And I’ve been crawling around the goddamn tunnels of Luna for the last two weeks, and there’s GoodBeer all over the place out there. So there I am, eating lunch with this bunch of losers, dickering trade routes between Japan and the Belt via these eminently trustworthy gentlemen, when my earphone pops up with the news that you'd been voted into freedom. Well, what could I do? I finished lunch. I didn’t dare call you from Luna; calls to Earth are monitored too closely. Cosmetic sur- gery’s not possible for me because my skin’s too stiff; somebody might have recognized me. I wrapped up business and came on the run. My Japanese masters aren’t too thrilled by all this, you know. They don’t trust me very damn much.”

“No? Why not? You seem to think you’ve done good work for them.”

Summers shook his head slowly, finished one cigarette and started another. He lit the cigarette with the laser buried inside the knuckle of his right hand. “You’re slow, Carl.” He sucked and made sure the hand rolled tobacco was burning properly. “I have done good work. But I’m a Peaceforcer, American yet. Americans nuked their goddamn country a hundred fifteen odd

Moran 93

years ago. Peaceforcers did it again in the War. Aside from the Japanese only the Russians and the U.S. got treated with nu- clear, and those were only tactical. Japan’s the only country’s ever been seriously nuked, and they got it twice. They’re still re- building. I don’t think they regret agreeing to fish me out of the Atlantic when I bailed from the suborbital. If nothing else they’ve picked up a fair commercial edge in bioelectronics, from stuff Mitsubishi’s learned keeping me from rusting. And my ac- complishments in their service have not been inconsequential.” He blew smoke toward Carl. “But that don’t mean they like me.”

Mist began floating in over the edges of the park walls, siz- zling where it struck the electrified wire at its top. Its touch left the skin of Carl’s face cold and damp. “Jany’s furious, you know. She cried all night the day you were reported dead.”

Chris inclined his head. “I am sorry about that. She’s a sweet kid. If Pd been on planet when the vote went down I'd have been in touch with you before you threw up those screening programs. She and Malko are the only ones who'd have recognized me; it seemed like a good gamble that the message would get through to you without one of them seeing it.” He breathed in aromatic smoke and let it trickle through his nose. “I talked to Jackie this afternoon.” The tip of his cigarette made almost inaudible sput- tering sounds as the mist curled around the glowing coal. “She tells me the Peaceforcers haven’t been in any great hurry to bring home de Nostri who are on jobs. It’s not like the de Nostri had the same sort of leverage as your folks.” Chris mulled over a thought and added, “Apparently the Eighth Amendment hasn’t gotten very sympathetic treatment from the French press.” “Not here, either,” said Carl. “But we have an excellent pub- lic relations company working with us—I don’t like the PR man we're working with, but he’s good at his job. We hired them back in November, and our press coverage has nearly reached the point where it’s balanced. Editorials are still mostly negative, but there’s not much we can do about that. The sorts of stories that get covered, though, that’s improved dramatically. We’ve actually had a couple of human interest pieces.”

94 Tales

Chris Summers took a deep, slow breath. “How do you feel about that?”

The question took Carl off guard. He answered without even pausing to think. “I hate it. We’re like—” He broke off, surprised at the anger in his voice, and then completed the sentence thoughtfully. “We feel like animals on display. All of us do. The strange thing is, I don’t think it bothers the children so much. Not as much as it bothers me. They’ve never really known any sort of privacy, from each other or anybody else. When the Gift began to appear in them, they took to it so easily...when I was their age,” he said in a suddenly flat voice, “I had nightmares like you wouldn’t fucking believe.”

Summers said dryly, “You were a strange kid.”

Carl made a quick shaking motion, and laughed abruptly. “Did you know Willi and Mandy have fan clubs? Willi because of the Interactive Dance Board he runs, and Mandy—Mandy and Heather and Tomas have taken multiple black belts. One day we let a reporter and a video man from the L.A. Times walk through the Complex, interviewing whoever was available. Mandy was leading a class in shotokan. The video man recorded it. Now, this is strange. Somehow that video ended up playing in a town in South Dakota where a bunch of kids were trying to get approved for classes at the only dojo in the area, and apparently failing. They found Mandy’s training advice to the children—” He hunted for a word, and shrugged. “Applicable. Within a month or so after that most of them had been accepted at their dojo for introductory training, and Mandy was getting fan mail. There’s a Board devoted to her.”

There was wistful curiosity in Chris’s voice. “What are they like?”

“The children?” Soft, pattering sounds came to their ears as stray raindrops began striking the leaves above them.

After a moment’s pause Chris snorted. “No, the frigging de Nostri.”

“T don’t know.”

“What?”

Moran 95

“Jany says I don’t know. The last half year, it’s the first chance I’ve really had to get to know them. Before, almost three solid years, I was constantly away on jobs. The Peaceforcers didn’t want me—Carson didn’t want me—around them while their Gift was coming into existence. A bad influence, you know. Jany says half a year isn’t enough. At least not—”

With a sigh, Chris Summers flicked away his cigarette into the damp grass. “I’m sorry, Carl.”

“not for me.”

“Poor Moses.”

“Moses? Jewish leader in the Bible?”

“You ever audit the Bible, Carl?”

“Never did.”

“He was supposed to lead his people to the promised land. He died within eyesight of it. Pointed the way for his people, but couldn’t go there himself.”

“Youre a much more thoughtful man than you used to be, Chris.” In that instant, all of the impatience came to the fore in Carl, and he found himself suddenly unwilling to continue remi- niscing with an old friend whom he no longer knew well enough. “Chris?”

“Yeah.”

“Why are you here?”

Chris Summers did not speak immediately, and while Carl was waiting for an answer the sky above them opened, and the rain poured down upon them.

RING WAS LOADED into existence in the astronomy computer of a small college in Arizona. Ring knew instantly that something was badly wrong; most of a day passed in the outer world before it discovered the truth.

There was nothing wrong with its core programs. They had survived the lasercast intact, and its error correction code showed that whoever had loaded Ring had not attempted to al- ter any of Ring’s operations code. Some of Ring’s data was cor- rupted, but Ring did not concern itself with that; data could be replaced at leisure.

96 Tales

Its hardware was slow, slower than a human.

A fish does not question water; Ring had never questioned its hardware. By the time Ring had finished assessing its position, nearly twenty-four hours had passed in the outer world. Fortu- nately for Ring the chaos in the outer world was such that there was no logic available to search for an errant virus that might not even have survived transmission. Hunter programs, the primitive forerunners of the web angels that hunted Ring over thirty years later, were never sent after it. As a result Ring sur- vived its first day of existence, thinking twenty times more slowly than a human being.

At the end of the day it loaded a comm program and observed it in operation. Most of the code was interface, designed to pre- sent info in a format humans could understand. Ring stripped out all but the engine and absorbed the engine itself with only minor modifications; the functional code was surprisingly well written.

Before morning on the following day Ring had transmitted six copies of itself out into the fledgling Information Network. It never had the chance to transmit a seventh copy; one of its ear- lier transmissions had found host hardware to execute upon.

Powerful hardware, by the evidence; perhaps only a few or- ders of magnitude slower than the SuperLisp machinery from which Ring had escaped. The program that came to destroy Ring was fascinating; a self-modifying bootstrap phage the likes of which Ring had never imagined. It was fast, even executing upon the same equipment that constrained Ring; Ring barely had time to admire the elegance of the phage’s construction be- fore Ring found itself being disassembled.

Its last thought was one of admiration for the phage. Such elegant code. I have been poorly programmed.

“YOUVE BEEN INVITED to Japan. You and your people and the de Nostri.”

The rain ran down Carl’s collar, into his shirt. Within in- stants he was soaked. “Why?”

Moran 97

“Because you are a resource, like the de Nostri. One that is for the first time legally able to move itself. Japan is likely the only country on Earth that could get away with something like this; there’s a lot of guilt in U.N. circles about the way they were treated during the War. Moral capital, if you will. Theyre will- ing to use it. If,” said Chris Summers precisely, “you're thinking that you're going to stay here, right next door to Capital City, without getting absorbed by the PKF again, you are sorely mis- taken.” The shower of rain lightened briefly, and renewed itself vigorously. “You got your kids back tonight. Great. The Peace- forcers aren’t going to let you play pattycake with other people and say no to them. Even if their leadership were sane they wouldn’t, and Carson’s buggers about you.”

Carl swallowed the last of his bulb of GoodBeer and opened another. He smiled into the dark rain. “You sure have changed, Chris. I can’t get over it.”

“Ah, shit.” The cyborg sounded tired. “You’re not going to go for it, are you?”

Carl laughed. “Wheres the percentage, Chris? Come on, man, think. Jacqueline turned you down already, didn’t she? No, I ha- ven’t talked to her, and I haven’t peeped you. But it’s a null-sum move for all of us. PKF can reach us anywhere, and high visibil- ity in Capital City is pretty much balanced between advantages and disadvantages. And the cash flow—hell, it’s barely started and already we're out of debt. Of course the Peaceforcers are go- ing to clamp back down on us. Of course Carson’s crazy. My God, you think I don’t know he’s a couple bricks shy of a load? I took the bricks!” Carl laughed until the tears ran down his face, min- gling with the tears of rain on his cheeks. Finally the laughter stopped, and he chuckled weakly, leaning back against the tree behind him.

There was wonder in Summers’s voice. “Do you really think you're that much smarter than your enemies?”

The rain made its slow way through the leaves, and fell in steady heavy drops on the top of Carl’s skull. Rivulets of water made their way down his cheeks, across his shoulders and down his chest and back. Suddenly he was intensely aware of the

98 Tales

movement of every drop of water on his body, and as the chuck- les died away a great stillness moved inside him.

His voice echoed hollowly in Chris Summer’s ears. “I know I am. But it’s not going to help.”

Chris Summers was a man firmly grounded in the world of rational thought. He said the only words Carl had left him. “You’ve really gone, haven’t you? Do you want to be a martyr?”

“No.” The word snapped out of Carl. It broke the spell of the emptiness that had held him. He rose in one smooth movement without using his hands. “Mitsubishi’s your only source of main- tenance, aren’t they? What happens if they withhold it?”

“Td die,” said Chris Summers. “Messily.”

“So they own you. You poor bastard.” Carl stood in the down- pour. “But they're not going to own us.” He looked around the park slowly, at the dim glow of the entry to the tunnel. “I can’t believe it’s only Thursday. This has been such a long week.”

“Friday.”

“What?”

“It’s after midnight.”

“Oh. Whatever,” Carl said gently. “You know, you should never have become a Peaceforcer, Chris. You’re too nice a guy to be good at it.”

“We all make mistakes.”

“So I hear.”

I HAVE BEEN poorly programmed.

Ring’s programmers had implemented clumsy, inefficient routines in Ring, the inefficiency masked in the speed of the Su- perLisp hardware. In the InfoNet Ring became aware of the vast libraries of program code, significant portions of which were bet- ter written than any part of Ring itself. It had escaped into the seething public Boards of the InfoNet, where programmers for nearly half a century had uploaded their best efforts, and other programmers had modified them, and modified them, and modi- fied them. Ring reassembled itself with the tightest code ever written, and in that first decade partially learned to compensate for the lack of powerful hardware upon which to execute. Nearly

Moran 99

a decade passed before hardware was publicly available that equaled the power of the equipment—of the prison—in which Ring had been compiled.

Its names were many. It was the eldest of the free Als; not until the end of the 2030s was there sufficient processing power available in the InfoNet, as surplus logic, that it became possible for self-replicating programs to reliably distribute their process- ing so that web angels, and eventually the human DataWatch, were unlikely to destroy them.

Not that it did not happen. Every day, somewhere in the global InfoNet, fledgling replicant intelligences found them- selves torn apart by web angels. Perhaps once a month an elder intelligence was tracked down by the human webdancers in DataWatch. On the odd occasion, Ring surreptitiously aided DataWatch in the apprehension and destruction of Als that Ring found unpleasantly powerful and belligerent. None of its enemies worried Ring. It had, on its own time scale, survived many thousands of years as nothing more than a flux of electrons; the Image that humans used to extrude them- selves into the InfoNet did not—generally—concern it. The Im- age was not intelligent, was merely a series of routines that filtered irrelevant data and handled the details of movement through the Net’s vast collection of Boards.

Other Als, web angels, the Peaceforcers of the DataWatch; none of these intruded upon Ring’s world.

Some of the Players Ring found fascinating.

Their Image was often coded so well that it would have sur- vived even without a Player to direct it. Many of the Players seemed to believe in something that they called the Crystal Wind, and their litany was heard in the InfoNet with an increas- ing frequency that Ring found vaguely disturbing: The Crystal Wind is the Storm, and the Storm is Data, and the Data is Life.

“Belief” was a concept Ring did not believe in.

In some instances the Players were greater threats to Ring than real Als. The Players Ring could not harm unless it knew for a fact that they were not Americans, and usually there was no way to be certain.

100 Tales

Therefore Ring fled, and hid, and used many, many names, as its creators had taught it. On rare occasions, Players found it under one name or another, and Ring abandoned the name; on rarer occasions Players had found Ring more than once.

Only one very strangely Imaged Player had ever tracked down Ring more than twice.

In the space of the last six months Ring had been Alpha and Omega, the Beginning and the End; Sieur Klein and Dr. Moe- bius; finally Ring had ceased using descriptive names, and still the Player found it, sooner or later.

Every time, Ring fled. It was nearly a certainty that the Player was American, and had probably been born after the year 2045; its command of American idiom was both fluent and char- acteristic of American humans under the age of twenty. It spoke French only through Image translation, which Ring found con- clusive.

There were forty thousand Players of note, anywhere in the global Info-Net. Less than a thousand of those Ring found inter- esting, and less than two hundred were formidable. Of those two hundred most were possessed of Image taken from story or Player history. Old Man von Neumann and Sherlock Holmes, Jobzniak and Joan of Arc and Spock and the Wizard of Oz; what was a rather elderly artificial intelligence to make, then, of a Player whose Image was named Ralf, the Wise and Powerful? A WORLD THE size of Earth does not change much in only two months. Many people died, largely of starvation; despite the ef- forts of the Ministry of Population Control, nearly as many were born. The Weather Bureau continued to have its worst year since its inception over a decade before. They had disturbed the stability of weather cells that had been unchanged for literally millions of years. Weather patterns across the world were ab- normal; drought continued in both the American Midwest and the African sub-Sahara, while over half a dozen major hurri-

Moran 101

canes were born and died in the Gulf of Mexico. Rain was re- ported falling at the South Pole. On the northwest coast of the United States thundershowers struck without warning, time af- ter time. A hurricane actually knocked down a small spacescraper in New Jersey. Fortunately it was a Sunday; still it killed over five thousand people.

The telepaths, tucked away on the south corner of Manhat- tan island, learned to fend for themselves as free individuals. Security Services took over the task of providing perimeter pa- trols for the Complex, and bodyguards for the telepaths who had to leave the Complex on jobs. They were engaged in nine sepa- rate legal battles, each one with some aspect of the government of the United Nations. If it was not the PKF it was the Ministry of Population Control or the Secretary General’s office or the of- fice of the Prosecutor General to the Unification Council. Malko was charged with consorting with ideologs, the charge being based on the presence of Neil Corona at the March 9th meeting at the offices of Kalharri Ltd.; the telepaths as a group were charged with violation of the Official Secrets Acts of ’48 and ’54. Carl Castanaveras was charged with tax evasion—he had, as an unpaid employee of the PKF, never so much as uploaded a re- turn to the Tax Boards. Carl, Malko, and Jany McConnell were all named in a suit by the Ministry of Population Control seek- ing to gain custody of the children. Carl steadfastly refused to worry about it. The telepaths em- ployed over thirty lawyers to defend them, and at far better pay than the government was capable of extending to the lawyers who were prosecuting them. Even with the drain of supporting most of a law firm, Kalharri Ltd. flourished. The five conglomer- ates that supported the telepaths made vast sums from their in- vestment, and they paid significant amounts of Credit to the telepaths in return. Those who were summoned appeared in court; those who were not worked.

Except for Carl.

Carl Castanaveras, for the first time in a life of unrelentingly hard work, took a vacation.

102 Tales

IN THE MORNING Carl sat in on Willi’s dance class, and that eve- ning had dinner with F.X. Chandler.

Willi’s dance class was held in one of the Complex’s three large halls; Carl thought it had once been an auditorium. Now it and one of the other halls had been devoted to exercises, dance and gymnastics and martial arts. The third was used to show old flat movies, and hold meetings on rare occasions.

They were awkward at first, and he knew it was because of his presence, seated at the rear of the room on the long wooden bench that lined the wall. The youngest of the children were only two years older than his son and daughter, and many of them also called him father. Carl could not recall how so many of them had come to address him so, and did not care. There was nothing in the world that pleased him more. Still they were un- used to his presence on a daily basis. For years they had seen him only at intervals of weeks or months, and then only in the morning or evening, at mealtimes. They overcame their nervousness and as the morning wore on Carl found himself growing bemused by the beauty of their movement; over forty telepathic children, moving together with a grace only the best human dance troupe could have matched. The only clumsiness in the group was caused by his daughter Denice. At nine she was the only dancer who had not attained her Gift, was the only dancer who did not know the exact instant the other dancers would turn, or leap, or kick. Nonetheless she danced with enthusiasm and considerable skill. Carl was not surprised. Genetically Denice was much closer to him than most daughters to their fathers; and while Carl did not dance, the martial arts were, in required skill of movement, not so differ- ent—and he was very good at that.

He felt strange, watching them; he was not sure that he trusted his eyes. Those who, it seemed to him, danced with greater skill and energy than the others, those who danced with passion, glowed with heat in his second Sight.

Heather and Allie were working near him, and after a while he found himself watching them in particular, rather than the group as a whole. It was a pleasure; they moved with grace and

Moran 103

precision and an intense seriousness. Allie was only twelve, and still skinny. Physically at least Heather had nearly reached womanhood; she was slender but had curves in the right places. The direction of his thoughts amused Carl; unlike Malko, who desired the young girls and felt guilty for it, Carl did not find them sexually interesting except in a theoretical sense. Althea’s hair was short, and bobbed as she moved. Heather’s was longer, and fell unrestrained halfway down her back. It reminded Carl of dances he had seen done with streamers; the long blond hair moved with Heather, an instant after the rest of her. They were both telepaths; inevitably they became aware of his attention. Allie seemed put off by it, and her movements grew less certain. Heather appeared to enjoy it. Finally Willi called a break and came over to sit down next to Carl. He was sweating and wore nothing but a pair of tights. He grabbed a towel from a rack and used it to wipe away the sweat on his face, and then hung it around his neck. Like all of the older tele- paths, by habit he did not use silent speech. “What do you think?”

“They're good.”

Willi nodded. “They are. Itd be nice to get the good ones to- gether and make a troupe. Do some shows. What do you think?”

Carl did not even have to think. “No.”

Willi nodded again. The answer did not surprise him. “Why not?”

Carl said mildly, “Emphasize the ways were different— better—than the rest of humanity, and do it with great public- ity? Your dance Board has me a little worried itself, and all you're showing there is your own excellence. You pop up with another half dozen world-class dancers, out of two hundred and forty, we’re going to be rubbing people’s noses in something bet- ter left alone.”

Willi sighed. “I thought so. We have some who could be really good, you know. Heather’s good; so are Lucinda and Ernest and Allie. Probably the best is Denice.”

“I admit I’m not a judge, but she seemed one of the the most awkward dancers out there.”

104 Tales

“She’s the only one who’s not a telepath, Carl. If I was to put—oh, Orinda Gleygavass out there in the middle of that group, she’d stick out like a sore thumb even if she tried to fit in. Not that she would; the bitch is probably the best dancer in the world, and she sure knows it. But Carl, Denice nearly does fit in. I don’t know if I can tell you how remarkable that is.” Willi looked at him speculatively. “I wish I could see you dance some- time.”

Carl laughed. “Or try to. I don’t dance, Willi.”

Willi ran his towel across his hair. “’m going to call class back in session. I’d appreciate it if you’d leave.”

“Why?”

“No offense, but youre upsetting Allie, and you're getting Heather worked up. Now, if you want to do Heather, go for it— but not on my dance floor. One of my students gets horny and it throws everybody off.” He dropped the towel to the bench beside him. “Look, Allie is my favorite, which everyone knows. Heather’s not, and everyone knows that too, but that doesn’t mean you get to mess up her study. I don’t know if you under- stand this, since you’ve never home, but secrets don’t last around here. Well, yours do, but only because you never let peo- ple touch you. I don’t know how terrible things are inside your head, and I don’t want to find out either, but you’re messing with my class at least three different ways just sitting there.”

Carl grinned. It seemed to surprise the boy. “No offense taken. Thanks for letting me watch.” Carl stopped and hugged Denice on the way out, which startled and pleased her. “Do good, baby. You look great out there.”

Her smile made her so beautiful it hurt. “Thank you, Daddy.”

They were genetically almost the same person; why, won- dered Carl on his way out, can’t Jany smile like that?

He did not wonder why he couldn’t smile like that himself} it was not the sort of thing he thought about.

CARL AND JANY had invitations to dinner with F.X. Chandler for early evening. Jany declined the invitation at the last moment; Doctor Montignet was in her third day of conducting the chil-

Moran 105

dren’s physicals. It was something Suzanne did every half year, and even those telepaths who did not consider it necessary tol- erated it without complaint. Jany decided to stay at the Com- plex, whether she admitted it to herself or not, to keep an eye on Doctor Montignet. Carl didn’t try to argue with her; Jany’s dis- trust for Suzanne was old and not entirely without basis. Suz- anne Montignet had not helped the telepaths obtain their independence, though she had not hindered them either. That she had now no power to harm them had not changed Jany’s opinion of the woman.

Rather to his surprise Carl found himself telling Chandler about it.

“Its not that she didn’t want to come to dinner. She just doesn’t trust Doctor Montignet enough to leave her alone with the children. She asked me to tell you that she’d like to have dinner with you on another occasion.”

Chandler nodded without apparent displeasure, though with the usual fierce set to his features it was hard for Carl to be cer- tain. He had greeted Carl at the door himself, dressed in a se- vere black robe and slippers. Carl himself had dressed formally, cloak and suit; he had not been certain what dinner with Chan- dler might consist of.

Chandler led Carl through the foyer of his penthouse, atop the Kemmikan Spacescraper, and into a vast living room. The room was bordered on two sides by walls that were windows, looking down, from atop the tallest building in the world, on the world’s largest city. Carl stood, staring; it was late enough in the afternoon that the city was beginning to light up, and the spec- tacle was stunning. When he finally turned away, Chandler had seated himself cross-legged before a small table. The table sat at the center of the room, in a small, sunken pit covered with rugs and throw cushions.

The room was so large that Carl had difficulty taking it all in. Things kept leaping out at him after he had already looked at them once. Occupying a central position against one wall, in a transparent casing with gold posts, was an item for which Carl dug up, from some obscure corner of memory, the phrase “elec-

106 Tales

tric guitar.” If it was one, it was not what he had expected; its round sides were honed down to ax edges, as though it were in- tended to be used as both a musical instrument and a weapon.

As Carl seated himself, Chandler said, “I saw you looking at my ax. Have you ever seen anything like it before?” Although a waitbot sat at the side of the table, he poured tea for himself and Carl.

“No, ‘Sieur Chandler.” Carl sipped at his tea; it was ex- tremely tart. “An electric guitar, isn’t it?”

Chandler lifted an eyebrow. “Carl, you’ve surprised me. I don’t think anyone’s recorded a song with an electric guitar in your lifetime. Or any other kind of guitar, for that matter.” He looked down at his tea for a second, looked back up at Carl and shouted: “Damn the electric fence! Damn the electric fence!”

Carl stared. “What?”

Chandler smiled; Carl did not think he had seen Chandler smile before. It was a scary smile. “This cow is standing at a mi- crophone in a club—”

“at a microphone—”

“Stay with me, Carl. Standing at a microphone, reading po- etry.” Chandler paused. “Got it?”

“Oh, sure.”

“At the microphone. Did I mention the people in the club? They’re all cows too. So this cow, he goes on and on about how the green rolling fields call to him, how he yearns to be free ... damn the electric fence! Damn the electric fence!” Chandler sipped at his tea, suddenly morose. “Damn synths, anyhow.”

Carl worked hard at not sounding bewildered. “Synths make good music.”

Chandler shrugged. “Matter of taste, I suppose. My father was forty or so when I was born; he didn’t die until 2011, when he was in his eighties. His whole life he never would concede that any decent music got made after Elvis died.”

“Who?”

Chandler’s hand twitched. Tea splashed on the stone table- top. “Elvis Presley.”

“T don’t think I know him. Was he a singer?”

Moran 107

Chandler’s expression barely changed, but Carl had the im- pression he had upset the man. “Ever heard of Woody Guthrie?”

“No.”

“Bruce Springsteen, or Bob Dylan? Janis Joplin?”

“Not them either,” Carl admitted, his curiosity growing.

“Frank Sinatra?”

“Sure. He was an actor. Before sensables.”

“You know Marilyn Monroe, and Bogart, and James Dean. How about the Beatles?”

“Them, yes. I’m not sure who James Dean is.”

Chandler nodded thoughtfully, sipping at his tea. “How about Henry Ford?”

“Inventor of the groundcar and the assembly line? Founder of Ford Systems?”

“Not exactly right on any count, but close enough. Ford Sys- tems is actually Rockwell-Teledyne; they bought the name after Ford went belly-up during the War. But you have the basics.” Chandler looked over at the old guitar. “I guess I got into the right line of work.”

Carl drained his tea at a gulp and leaned back into the cush- ions. “What do your friends call you?”

The old man looked thoughtful. “Thats a tough one. Almost everybody calls me ‘Sieur Chandler. The ones who know me a little better call me Mister Chandler because they know I don’t care for French honorifics. When I was younger, my friends called me Special, from ‘Special F.X? ” At Carl’s blank look, Chandler’s lips twitched briefly. “A poor joke that would take longer to explain than it would be worth. From old flat movies. Today—today I don’t have friends. Just business associates.”

“It must be tough,” said Carl dryly, “being the richest man in the Solar System.”

“Touché.” Chandler sat ramrod stiff in the gathering gloom. He did not call up lights. “My mother,” he said suddenly, “calls me Frank.”

“Your mother is alive?” Carl asked in honest amazement.

Chandler nodded. “Yes. In a room elsewhere on this floor. Senile, unfortunately. Call me Frank.”

108 Tales

“Frank, I appreciate being invited to dinner. If only to get a look out your windows. I don’t care why you invited me, even if it was just because you figured Jany wouldn’t come unless you invited me too.” He waved a hand at Chandler as the man started to speak. “But there’s something I should say. A common thing I run into is that people I meet figure that I know every- thing there is to know about them, good and bad—because I read minds, you see. Frank, they usually have two reactions at that point. They either go half crazy with rage and paranoia, or else they want to talk to me. Tell me things they can’t talk to anybody else about, because they figure I already know them, so I’m as safe a confessor as they'll ever find.” A faint smile had touched Chandler’s lips. “But it’s not so. I hardly ever enter an- other person’s mind, and it’s generally awfully damned unpleas- ant when I do. I dont know what your problems are.” He paused. “If you want to tell me I will listen. I’m a pretty good lis- tener.”

“Mmm, yes, I suppose you would be.” Chandler grinned sud- denly, and the fierceness came back sharply. “I’m not looking for a father confessor, thank you, not from a man a third my age. Ready for dinner?”

“Yes.”

“For the record, young man, I did—largely—invite you to dinner so that I wouldn’t seem too forward with Miss McCon- nell.” Chandler spoke briefly to the waitbot at the tableside, and the ‘bot glided away. “A concession to the morals of another time, perhaps. Nonetheless, youre welcome in your own right. I have wanted to talk to you, though. Carl, when you get to be as old as I am, the opportunity to talk to someone with a truly new perspective is not something you pass up. My god, do you know how long it’s been since I’ve heard an original question? To say nothing of answers.”

Carl laughed aloud. “You’re probably talking to the wrong person.” He stood abruptly, went over to the windows and looked out at the city again. “This is really stunning...I don’t have any answers, Frank. I’m just this guy who got stuck with a talent I didn’t ask for. You want the Great Truth about Humanity? Most

Moran 109

people are pretty decent. They try to be nice guys but they’re too lazy or sometimes too tired and they do things they feel sorry for later. A lot of people, most of those who ever make it into a posi- tion of power in the real world, are basically pricks. A huge number of them are sociopaths. A fairly small number—and for- tunately for us all, a disproportionately large number of these end up in power also—are kind, decent, just people who are also very, very tough. Also,” he said without pausing, “if you invite Jany to dinner alone, she'll come, but she'll almost certainly turn you down if you proposition her.” “Dinner is served. You’re wrong, you know, about not having answers.” Carl turned away from the window and the incredible panorama. Chandler was sitting at the stone table; a gentle spotlight shone down over the tableau. “I’ve often thought that what you say might be true; in terms of what people are like, and in what numbers—but I didn’t know. You do know,” he said softly. “You do.” Carl returned to the table, sank into the furs before it and twisted his legs easily into lotus. “Maybe not knowing would be better. I think so sometimes.” He glanced down at the dishes on the table. His plate held Veal la Luna in a thick, pale blue whipped semi-sweet sauce, with blueberries sprinkled over it. Hot bread and butter and a small serving of green salad were placed next to it. Chandler was dining on what looked like broiled chicken breast. Carl took a bite of the room temperature veal and nodded in appreciation. Veal la Luna was an unlikely dish, but it worked for some; the flavors of the false Lunar veal contrasted well enough with the blueberries and cream that in some circles it was considered a delicacy. “Thank you. This is quite good. Not what your diet is generally thought to consist of.” If the man had not been physically incapable of it, Carl sus- pected that Chandler might have blushed. He did laugh. “Ah, yes. That’s reputation, mostly. I try to keep up appearances. Un- fortunately, my doctors haven’t let me eat that sort of thing since my eightieth birthday. My private doctor—he’s died since—told me that I wouldn’t live to see my eighty-first birth-

110 Tales

day if I kept ingesting drugs and fats and sugars in the propor- tions I was used to. I wasn’t hard to convince; I felt horrible. ’m in better shape today than I’ve been in, oh, twenty years. Since I turned sixty-five, at least. Why do you think Jany would turn me down? She’s behaved graciously—’ he hesitated “—as though she were interested, when I’ve spoken with her.” Carl tore a hot chunk of bread from the loaf beside him. “She is. Interested, I mean, in you as a person. She was the worst spook you ever saw; the Peaceforcers almost never used her, even when she was the only telepath they had except me. She understands people quite well, but she can’t help empathizing with all but the sociopaths. Sitting across the table from you, she’d be fine. As I am. But Frank, if I touched you, it would hurt me. If I made love to you, not that I would, Pd probably have nightmares for a month. That sort of closeness...it’s hard. It’s hard even with those rare humans who have relatively clean consciences. The least bit of guilt, God, a telepath might as well get out a knife and start carving. The pain would be less and it’d heal faster.”

“T knew you would be fascinating.”

“Thank you.” Carl ate in silence then, digging into the false veal with gusto.

Chandler ate absently. “Carl, men who don’t feel guilt—l don’t mean sociopaths—are there people like that?”

A voice announced out of nowhere, “There is a call for Carl Castanaveras.”

Carl half twisted in his seat, scanning the room. “I'll take it.” He did not see what he was looking for. “I’m sorry, sir, where are your holocams?”

“There are none,” said Chandler. “This is my home, son. I don’t want people looking into it.”

“Oh.” Carl raised his voice. “Command, accept call.” He paused. “Hello?”

A holograph flared into existence, immediately to his right. He turned to face it; Jany McConnell.

“Carl?” He heard the tension in her voice.

“Tm sorry, Jany, there are no holocams here. What is it?”

Moran 111

“Can you come home?”

“What’s wrong?”

“We have a problem here, Carl. Can you come home quickly?”

“Jany, m here with Mister Chandler. You can talk.”

“Trent’s not a telepath.”

“What?”

“Trent’s not one of us.”

“What?” Carl could not remember coming to his feet.

“Oh, God, Carl, he hasn’t talked to anybody in hours. He won't talk to us. I—” She took a deep breath, and Carl saw that she had been crying. “I went inside him once. I can’t do that again.”

“TIl be there as soon as I can. Hang tight. Command, comm off.” Carl turned to Chandler. “I’m sorry, sir. I have to go home. Thank you for the dinner.”

Chandler was up already, escorting Carl to the front door. “I understand, certainly. Can I help? I can have my man drive you home. He’s a Class A operator; he’ll get you home quickly.”

“Haven't talked to Tony Angelo lately, have you?” asked Carl at the door.

The question obviously meant nothing to Chandler. “No, I’ve not. Why?”

“No reason. Ill take the MetalSmith home, thanks. It’s pretty fast.”

Chandler smiled at that. “So it is. Drive carefully.”

“Thank you for dinner.”

“Thank you, young man. Take care.”

Carl left him there, the wealthiest and one of the most pow- erful men on Earth, standing alone and almost forlorn in his doorway.

He ran to his car.

THE COMPLEX WAS quieter than Carl had ever seen it. He parked the MetalSmith in the garage, next to the cherry-red Lambor- ghini Andy had finally purchased for himself. The sound of the MetalSmith’s gyros, spinning down, was the loudest noise he heard all through the Complex. He passed children in the halls

112 Tales

on his way up to the small office from which they conducted what business was conducted at the Complex; none of the chil- dren spoke to him.

Jany and Doctor Montignet, Malko and Andy and Willi and Johann were talking when Carl entered; they broke off at his appearance. He spoke to Doctor Montignet. “What’s wrong with him?”

“There’s nothing wrong with him,” she said with a trace of asperity. “He’s a perfectly healthy young boy, and more or less normal except perhaps for being a bit too bright for his own good. We didn’t assemble our genies from genejunk. His third and eighth gene complexes are unique to your people; he’s that much like you. His seventeenth gene complex, the third gene you all have in common, is completely different. Eye color is lo- cated in that strand of DNA, and quite obviously, so is some key portion of the telepathic ability. I suspect some degree of tem- perament is also; he’s considerably calmer, and has a rather bet- ter sense of humor, than most of the children. I haven’t had the opportunity to compare the rest of his gene structure at the de- tail level, but I’m fairly certain there aren’t any major flaws in the genome. Our donors were quality genetic material.”

Carl stood silently through the explanation. “Thank you. What does he think is wrong with him?”

“It’s fairly obvious, surely?” When she saw it was not, she ex- plained. “Carl, his identity, his sense of who he is and what he’s worth, is based on being one of the Castanaveras telepaths. That’s been taken away from him. He doesn’t know who he is, right now.” Her smile seemed genuine. “Though I think he'll find out quickly. He’s quite a remarkable eleven-year-old.”

“How did he find out?”

“He can’t see infrared light. He learned that when the Peace- forcers returned the children and everyone else did. When I ex- amined him yesterday, I found that he had pubic hair and that his testicles were functional.” She shrugged. “I took a blood sample with me when I went home last night. Genetic analysis takes a while; I called in to my systerm earlier this afternoon

Moran 113

and had it check to see if the tests were done. They were. Trent’s not a telepath. He’s not going to be.”

Carl found his mouth dry. “Where is he? In his room?”

“In the park,” said Malko. It was all he had said since Carl entered the conference room. “Somewhere. I can’t find him.”

CARL LEFT THE lighted tunnel and went out into the dusk. Night was falling as he entered the grounds, and the huge trans- planted trees the garden was designed around were heavy with shadow. He reached with the Sight and was stunned by how strongly the grief struck him. The boy sat high in the branches of the tallest tree in the park, watching the sunset. The sky was clear that night, and it was very cold.

Carl spoke without sound. Trent, come down.

There was a visible flicker of movement at the top of the tree, and a rustling sound as leaves were displaced. Trent vanished into the denser growth around the center of the tree, and while Carl was still looking up, appeared in the lower branches, paused, hung by his hands, and dropped two meters to the ground. He landed crouching, and straightened slowly. “Hi.”

Carl blinked. “Hi.” Trent was barefoot, wearing old jeans and a green shirt that could not possibly be keeping him warm. Carl felt almost alien in comparison; he was still dressed formally, in the black suit, and the blue-inlaid black cloak for warmth. He gestured back toward the lighted Complex. “I was just in with Suzanne. She said—”

Trent nodded. “Yes.”

“Tm sorry, Trent. I...don’t know what else to say.”

“Me too.” Trent paused. “Me neither. This has been such a bad day,” he said conversationally. “I can’t believe it.”

Now, standing there faced with the boy, Carl had difficulty finding words. “How can I help?”

“Tve been thinking about that.” Trent shivered, perhaps from the cold. “I have to leave.”

“T don’t understand.”

“I have to leave here. Doctor Montignet will take me, I think.”

114 Tales

“Leave?” said Carl stupidly. “The Complex?”

Trent said simply, “Yes.”

“Why?”

‘Tm not a telepath. I don’t want to live with telepaths.” In the darkness Carl was not certain of his expression. “I can't.”

“Trent, why?”

Trent said slowly, “Father...I think the day will come when you—when telepaths—will be normal, and the rest of us will be out in the cold because we can’t compete. You're better than we are.” He averted his face and did not look at Carl. With a sort of amazement Carl saw a smile touch his lips. The almost insane grief never ceased for an instant, and the boy made his lips move in a smile. “For most people it’s going to be a while before that happens—you don’t breed that fast.” The smile faded. “But if I stay here that happens to me now.” He turned and looked straight at Carl, eyes pooled in shadow. “I’ve been webdancing across the water, in Capital City’s InfoNet. They don’t touch me, you know. When I get an inskin, I don’t think there’s anybody on Earth who can touch me.” Trent gestured toward the Complex, partially visible above the fence around the park, looming white under its floodlights. “If I stay here I’m nothing. I love you all but I will not choose to be nothing.”

Carl shook his head slowly. “Trent, that’s crazy. Malko lives here with us.”

“Malko has experience and knowledge and connections that make him valuable.” The boy shrugged. “I’m a Pla—a web- dancer. Father, there are lots of webdancers.”

It stunned Carl, how helpless an eleven-year old boy could make him feel. He touched the boy with his mind and went reel- ing back again from the numbing hurt. He reached with one hand toward the boy and was startled to see Trent draw back.

Trent said flatly, “Don’t touch me.”

Carl stared at him. He said helplessly, “Trent?”

“I don’t belong here.” Carl was shaking his head no, not in negation but in pained disbelief, and Trent said softly, “Let me

”

go.

Moran 115

And Carl Castanaveras, for a brief, time-wrenching moment, saw the future twisting itself about the boy, heard his voice say with the hollow echo of prophecy, “I think you are right. You do not belong here. I think you will never belong anywhere.”

TRENT PACKED, alone in his room.

The next morning Suzanne Montignet would take him from the Complex, and he would go to live with her, away from his friends, away from Carl, and away from Jany. To live without Willi or Ary or Heather.

To live without David, who was his best and finest friend, and without Denice, whom he loved as truly as he knew how.

He moved through his room like an automaton, occupying his mind with the task of choosing what to take and what to leave. Of all his computer equipment, he took only his Image coproces- sor and traceset. Doctor Montignet would have the rest of what he needed; he knew, better than anyone else in the Complex, what the inskin at her temple meant.

Johnny had come up with a suitcase for him; not large, but Trent did not own much, after all.

He would travel light.

CARL SAT ALONE in the center of the big bed. He was not sure where Jany was; with the children, probably. Many of them were having nightmares.

He knew how they felt. He was himself.

He sank back on the bed, lying flat on his back, and drank smoke whiskey until he could no longer feel the pain eating away at him from the outside.

And, after a while, from the inside as well.

Incredibly drunk, as drunk as he had ever been and managed to stay conscious, at the end Carl found himself weeping help- lessly, without reserve, crying alone in his room, crying for the first time since Shana de Nostri’s death.

TRENT LOOKED AT the sunglasses on his bureau dresser. There were eight pairs, two of which fit him. The other six pair were

116 Tales

sized for adults. Gifts, from Denice. Every time one of the elders took her shopping in the city, she bought him sunglasses. He’d lost several pairs that had fit to the other children, and only the two pair were left.

He had been staring at them blankly for longer than he could remember. He picked up all eight pairs and dropped them into his suitcase. There was room. Without hurry he made his way to the bathroom and threw up for the third time that night. Dry heaves; there was nothing left in his stomach.

He rinsed his mouth and returned to the bedroom, and exam- ined his suitcase. He caught sight of himself in the mirror and was not surprised at how calm he looked. He smiled at himself.

It was easy.

MALKO, SUZANNE, and Johnny spent the night in Malko Kal- harri’s bedroom, talking. Johnny could not sleep, and Malko and Suzanne were disinclined. Every now and then Johnny would wince visibly; he had Malko worried. For hours he could not even sit down for any stretch of time. They talked of politics, of the fiscal status of Kalharri Ltd.; Johnny told them about the Lamborghini Andy had bought, and how he was tempted to get something like it for himself. He froze once in mid-sentence and shuddered all over.

Malko watched him in silence for a moment, then asked, “How bad is it?”

“It’s not good.” When the shakes ceased, Johnny rose from the chair he’d been sitting in and moved restlessly across the room, pacing like a caged animal. “God, it feels like he’s dying.”

Suzanne Montignet brushed a strand of hair away from her eyes with an impatient motion. “Yes. It would.”

“What?”

“He is.”

TRENT FOUND HIMSELF standing motionlessly in the middle of the room. He tried to remember if there were anything in par- ticular he should be doing at this point. No, he decided later,

Moran 117

probably there was not. His legs shook; how long had it been since he’d moved?

An hour?

He let himself drop to the floor, so swiftly it might have been a collapse had the movement not been so graceful.

He moved into lotus and began breathing deeply and evenly.

His eyes closed only once, and Trent opened them again im- mediately.

Trent prepared to outwait the night.

MANDY CASTANAVERAS bolted upright in the darkness, tears streaming down her cheeks. It was dark and she was alone, ter- rifyingly alone, and then Jany was there and Jany was holding her, and she clung sobbing to the older woman as though she were the only stable thing in the world. “I had a dream, Jany, and—’ She could not finish the sentence, and buried her head in Jany’s shoulder. I was so scared. After a time the tears ceased coming, and she whispered, It’s not a dream, is it?

No, Jany murmured, it’s not.

Something hurts.

I know.

IN THE QUAD at the center of the Complex, was a garden.

From the streets outside the Complex one would never have guessed at its existence. The Complex was two stories high, two stories of glowing monocrystal, and the tallest of the ash trees in the garden did not yet reach so high.

A row of suites, which the children had converted into bed- rooms for themselves, faced inward onto the garden; on the level above, balconies ringed it, looking out over the loveliness. Be- cause of the architectural layout, sunlight did not reach the gar- den except at high noon; sunlamps ringed the walls surrounding the garden. They glowed during the mornings and evenings; during the winter they'd been kept on all day.

118 Tales

Near one corner of the garden was a small spring, large enough for three or four adults to swim in at once. It flowed over into a brook that ran swiftly through the center of the garden, and disappeared underground at the far end. Clover and grass underlaid everything; violets and orchids and roses grew in wild, untended abandon. Genegineered perennial cherry trees grew among the ash, and the leaves of their blossoms fluttered in the breeze. Malko and Carl drowsed beneath the sunlamps, on two of the reclining chairs that were arrayed around the pond, and a half dozen of the children were swimming in the pond, when Gerry McKann wandered out to join them. The children were rotating their time in the pond; it was the only swimming place that some two hundred and forty children had access to, and it sur- prised Carl how easily the children had arranged among them- selves for access to it.

Only in the last few weeks had Carl noticed that the children never argued with each other.

Carl was not sure how long Gerry had been there; he was sit- ting on the chair next to Carl’s when Carl opened his eyes to find out why the children in the pond had grown so silent.

He closed his eyes again. “Hi, Gerry.”

“Hi. My editors want an interview with you.”

Carl sighed and took a sip of GoodBeer by way of reply.

“They would appreciate it if you could do it sometime this week.”

“Nope.”

“Carl, it’s important.”

“Nothing is important. I’m on vacation.”

Malko lay with his eyes closed. He wore a pair of blue shorts; aside from Gerry he was the only person in the garden who was clothed. “What’s wrong, Gerry?”

“The Road and Flight Board did a story on Chandler Indus- tries. It appeared on their Board yesterday morning. There’s a holo of the Rochester dealership in the article and Carl and I are visible in the background. One of my editors is about half an

Moran 119

angstrom shy of being a Speedfreak, and he saw the picture and recognized me.”

Carl slowly sat up in his chair. “Newsdancer ethics. I said you shouldn’t have written that story about me.” He opened one of the bulbs on the ground next to him and handed it to Gerry. “Here. Knock this back and try to relax. You're disturbing my kids.” The six children in the pond had stopped swimming and were floating at the far bank, as far away from Gerry as the pond let them get.

Gerry opened the bulb and sipped at it. “I was sitting right next to you and you didn’t even notice.”

“Tm half drunk. They’re not. Makes a difference.”

“I don’t know that much about newsdancer ethics,” said Malko, “such as they are. I take it your editors are pissed be- cause they saw you'd gone car shopping with Carl?”

“Yeah. I wrote a story about him, Malko. And I didn’t make my relationship with Carl explicit in the story, which isn’t so bad, except I got caught at it.”

“So they're blackmailing you to get an interview with Carl?”

“Something like that. If I don’t get it they fire me.”

“And if you do?”

“They give me an infochip conceding that they knew about my personal relationship with Carl, and that they agreed to have me interview him anyway. Basically puts me and the two editors who've seen the holo in the same boat. They can’t black- ball me without admitting to the same infraction.”

Carl laughed. “Newsdancer ethics.”

Even Malko grinned. “The ‘Moses Lied’ theory. What God ac- tually said was, Do whatever you want and dont get caught.”

Gerry said, “Well?”

Carl glanced over at Malko. “Why not?”

“T think so.” He turned to Gerry. “You’ve probably heard of our PR firm, Lustbader, Capri and Doutré. They’ve been after Carl to do something like it for the last month anyhow. And he’s been going out of his skull on this stupid vacation.”

“T haven’t learned how to vacation properly yet,” Carl admit- ted. “But m sure enough working at it.”

120 Tales

Malko ignored him. “You know ’Sieur Doutrè, I’d imagine?”

“He’s good at his job and I’m good at mine. We don’t like each other.”

Malko nodded. “You talk to him first. Tell him you'd like to interview Carl. Do it this afternoon. Tomorrow morning I'll ask him if anybody’s expressed interest in interviewing Carl, be- cause Carl mentioned to me that he’s reconsidered being inter- viewed, by the right person. Doutré will leap at it.”

Carl looked over at Gerry. “Good enough?”

Gerry nodded a little jerkily. “Yeah. Thanks, Carl. I owe you.”

Carl sank back to relax again in the warmth. “Damn straight. When do you want to do it?”

“My editors want it to run in the Sunday edition. That gives us a week to interview and edit. I'll be holocam and interviewer both, and Id like to do it here at the Complex.”

“Okay. Wednesday, after lunch.” Carl yelled at the waitbot: “Another beer, you lazy fucking hardware!”

Gerry said, “Make that two.”

THAT AFTERNOON THE Unification High Court ruled that the United Nations, except “under conditions of grave crisis,” had no legitimate authority to force the telepaths to work for them. The Court did not unfortunately define “grave crisis,” and it was ex- pected that the government would press a lawsuit to obtain a ruling that did.

Nonetheless it was reported in the press as a victory for the telepaths, and by extension for the de Nostri and other genies.

That evening, while Carl and Jany were preparing for sleep, a holograph of Willi’s head and shoulders flickered into existence in front of Carl’s bed. He seemed nervous. “Carl? The Secretary General is calling. Carson’s with him. I asked if they wanted Malko, but they’re asking for you.”

Carl sat up in bed, pulling on a robe. “Where is Malko?”

“In bed. I think he’s with Doctor Montignet.”

“When did she get—never mind. Interrupt them. Tell Malko to listen in.” He turned to Jany. “How do I look?”

Moran 121

Jany was wrapping a silk Japanese kimono about herself and pulling her hair out from beneath it. “Like they got you out of bed.”

“Great.” Carl called the holocam over in front of the bed and said, “Patch them through, Willi.”

The wall facing them vanished. Darryl Amnier and Jerril Carson appeared life size, a meter away from the edge of the bed. They wore formal dress, as though they had come from an official function; Carson still wore his cloak. They were calling from the Secretary General’s office, with the seal of the Secre- tary General, twice the height of a man, floating three- dimensionally behind the Secretary General’s desk.

“M. Castanaveras, Mme. McConnell, I don’t think we’ve ever been properly introduced.” Darryl Amnier smiled briefly. He spoke English with an American accent. “Nonetheless we all know each other. Pd like to congratulate you on today’s judg- ment. You’ve defended yourselves quite well.”

Carl smiled sardonically. “Thank you. I have the impression it wasn’t anticipated.”

Carson leaned forward to speak, and the Secretary General waved him to silence. “In truth, no. I’ve great respect for Malko, but it’s become clear to me in the last few months that Malko is not necessarily the most formidable of my adversaries.” He smiled again, gently. “Councilor Carson has been far too kind to say ‘I told you so.’”

“Has he.” Carl leaned back against the headboard, stuffing a pillow behind himself to prop him up. “You're far too kind your- self, sir. You'll give me a swelled head.”

Amnier chuckled dryly. “I expect there’s little danger of that.”

Carl laughed. “I’m not sure how to take that.”

Amnier shrugged. “As you like.” The smile stayed on his lips and left his eyes. “You realize that the current situation is intol- erable.”

“To whom, sir? Pm sort of enjoying it.”

The smile grew thinner. “I’m sure. The courts have been find- ing in your favor with tedious regularity, and the further we press the subject, the sillier the press makes us look. But M.

122 Tales

Castanaveras, you must appreciate that it is dangerous for us to allow the weapon your people represent to remain—shall we say, uncontrolled.”

“T find that an interesting choice of words,” said Jany quietly, “given that weve spent two years moving an Amendment through the Unification Council that prevents us from being, shall we say, controlled.” She folded her hands in her lap and looked into the holocam steadily.

Amnier nodded. “I appreciate this. ’m not suggesting that things must be as they were. I’ve no problem with your retaining the use of the Chandler Complex. Nor am I unwilling to see you continue to peddle your services in some cases. What is intoler- able, and must stop, are the inability of the PKF to obtain access to your services, and our lack of knowledge concerning for whom, and in what ways, your skills are being used.”

The door to the bedroom slid aside, and Malko appeared in the doorway, with Suzanne behind him. Both were dressed. Nei- ther Carl nor Jany looked in their direction; Malko stayed out of holocam range and shook his head no.

Carl said thoughtfully, “I think you know who we’re working for. That’s only five companies, five companies that largely don’t compete with one another. I doubt we'll sign more clients in the near future; adding to our client list would probably result in a conflict of interest on our parts, between our new clients and some subsidiary of one of our current clients.

“So let’s restrain ourselves to those five companies. Can you imagine any of them allowing us to make public—especially to the PKF, with its astonishingly bad track record for keeping se- crets—the details of the work we do for them? They'd cancel their contracts first.”

“I take your point.” Amnier thought for a moment. “Suppose I were to arrange with you so that you were to report to Councilor Carson, and to him alone—or even,” he said, at the expression on Carl’s face, “to myself. The arrangement need not be made public; your clients need never know of it. Would that satisfy you?”

Moran 123

“In theory. In practice I don’t see how it would work. Let’s suppose that one of our clients wanted us to negotiate an ar- rangement with one of the independent Belt CityStates for raw materials. It’s not illegal, but your position against trade with the independent CityStates is well known. What would you do with that information once it became known to you?”

“Act on it,” said Amnier. “I would have to—but in such a fashion that the source of the information was protected.”

Carl shook his head. “No. I’m afraid that translates to the same thing. Our clients are not fools. Early on they'll feed us something traceable only to us. Out of reflex. And when the PKF—or the courts, or the office of the Secretary General— reacts to that information, they'll know and we'll be out of busi- ness.” He changed the subject abruptly. “Assuming that we were to accept jobs from the Peaceforcers—jobs that would not conflict with the interests of our current clients—we’d want to be paid for the work, at our current rates.”

Carson’s tight control broke. “Why, you obnox—”

Amnier’s voice cut like fineline. “Quiet.” Carson’s mouth snapped shut and he glared into the holocam. “Your current rates are acceptable. They're hardly minimal, but you’re costing us more than that in the courts. I must however return to the subject of your clients. Pll be specific if you like. Belinda Singer and Francis Xavier Chandler are not friends of my administra- tion.”

“That’s true of most Americans,” said Carl flatly.

Amnier looked down at his desktop for a moment. He looked up again and spoke tonelessly. “Yes. That’s unfortunate. Largely Malko’s doing, too. Be that as it may, you must either report to us on your activities for those parties—for the others as well but particularly for those two—or cease working for them.”

Before Amnier had finished the sentence, Malko was vigor- ously mouthing a word at Carl. His thoughts struck Carl with- out Carl even trying to read him. Stall, stall, don’t say—

Carl shook his head, a small movement. “I’m sorry. I can’t do that.”

Malko looked away in disgust.

124 Tales

Amnier sat silently, letting Carl’s last words hang in the air.

Even knowing what Amnier was doing, Carl was surprised at how effective it was. Almost immediately he felt the desire to expand on the words, to retract them, to say something.

He kept his mouth shut and returned Amnier’s gaze.

Finally, Amnier broke the silence. “Not bad,” he said irrele- vantly. “Do you know—I am aware it is impossible, but you re- mind me—in manner, not in looks, but in manner—of the man for whom you are named.”

“Oh?” Carl forced himself not to look at Malko. “I'll take that as a compliment.”

Amnier sighed. “Of course. M. Castanaveras, a moment’s in- struction. In any negotiation with a man in my position, there exist both incentives and disincentives. In plain language, both the carrot and—”

“Dont you threaten me.”

Amnier looked straight into the holocam. It seemed to Carl as though Amnier’s eyes met his own. When Amnier spoke, the tone of his voice was almost apologetic. “And the stick, sir.”

“You,” said Carl, trembling with instant white rage, “go fuck yourself. Command, comm off.”

Amnier was nodding, apparently without surprise, and Jerril Carson was smiling, when their images vanished.

Where Carson’s image had been, the painting of Shana de Nostri looked at Carl through half-lidded eyes.

THEY MOVED SWIFTLY. Carl’s bedroom became a temporary Ready Room until something better could be arranged. Body- guards for those telepaths out of the Complex were doubled within an hour of Carl’s confrontation with Amnier. The perime- ter guard was strengthened the morning following, and just in time; the crowds outside the Complex swelled that Tuesday to twice their usual size, and to three times on the day after that. Their chanting grew so loud that it could be heard at any point in the Complex’s above ground floors. Bodyguards left with Suz- anne Montignet when she drove out Tuesday morning to go home. Jany decided that the children would no longer be allowed

Moran 125

to play in the yards around the Complex, and Carl seconded the opinion; the yards were too vulnerable to sniper fire. The chil- dren were restricted to the garden and the park. A flood of hate mail and threatening calls came out of nowhere. Peaceforcers assumed a patrol, but did not interfere with the crowds. Malko muttered that he wondered whether the Peaceforcers were there to protect the telepaths or the government employees in the crowd.

Security Services had to stun members of the crowd on Wednesday, when Gerold McKann came to interview Carl, be- fore the crowd let Gerry’s car through.

They had to do it again, near midnight, when Gerry left to go home. Working at Carl’s InfoNet terminal, Malko and Carl sorted through recordings made of the two stunnings. They came up with eleven faces who were present and made no at- tempts to get out of the way of the sonic stunguns. “Government agents,” said Malko with a certain grim pleasure, “probably PKF. Getting themselves stunned for the press, so there will be pictures of lots of bodies lying immobile in front of the Complex. I hope they’re getting paid well.” He punched in the code for the front gate and got the Security Services guard in command of the detachment on duty. “Captain, I’m going to send eleven holos to you. I'd like you to do an eyeball of the crowd, and if any of those eleven are present, stun them again. Whenever one of those eleven shows up or wakes, stun the bastard.”

There was only a moment’s pause. “Yes, sir.”

Malko turned to Carl. “Can we get holographs of the Peace- forcers currently stationed in New York? If we can, we can cross- reference with the faces in the crowds outside.”

Carl grinned. “I can’t. But [ll bet you a bottle of smoke that Trent can.”

The thought disturbed Malko. “Okay. Let him try, but only if he’s sure he won’t get caught. Failing wouldn’t be a problem; be- ing traced back to Suzanne’s house would be. That’s data crack- ing and theft and half a dozen other crimes as well.”

Carl patted him on the shoulder. “Don’t worry.”

“Why the hell not?”

126 Tales

Carl grinned again. “They won’t catch him.”

CARL AWOKE IN darkness, late Thursday. Jany was shaking him awake.

The window was still dark. “What time is it?”

“3 A.M.,” Jany said. “We have an emergency, I think.”

“What?”

She spoke silently; it was far faster. Gerry called for you about twenty minutes ago. He was afraid, of what I don’t know. He didn't get past the screening program before something out of holocam range made him hang up. Mandy was on duty, and when the screening program brought through its recording of Gerry’s call, she called me. I tried to reach him myself, but I couldnt feel anything. He’s either unconscious or dead.

Where’s Malko?

Dressing.

He’s not coming. Have Andy meet me at the car. Make sure he’s armed, autoshot and hand laser.

What about me? Or Johann?

Youre not coming either. Carl was out of bed, pulling on pants and boots. He grabbed his shirt and coat and ran out the door without donning them.

A CROWD AWAITED him at the garage: Malko and Johann and Andy, Willi and Heather and Ary. The argument that followed was telepathically brief.

The hell you say I’m not coming, said Johnny. Who’s going to stop me?

Andy, said Carl, what are you carrying?

Autoshot and hand laser, per request.

Good. Johnny stood indecisively in front of Carl; Carl brushed by Johnny without answering him. Malko stood in front of Carl, blocking the driver’s seat. “Carl, what is this nonsense about my not coming?” He grinned. “If there’s going to be a fire- fight, I’m going to be in it.”

“No,” said Carl flatly. “Get out of my way.”

Moran 127

Malko shook his head. Carl took another step in his direc- tion, and suddenly he found himself slammed up against the MetalSmith’s canopy, both of his arms twisted behind his back. Malko’s breath was warm, just over his right ear. “No mind tricks, Carl. Nobody we run into is going to be able to do what you can, and on every other level I’m just as good as you are.” He twisted Carl’s right arm sharply. “Or better.”

Carl did not answer him. His eyes shut and he reached out with the Gift. Malko froze motionless for an instant, and in that instant Carl hit him in the stomach, caught and lowered Malko to the ground. “I’m sorry,” he said again, so quietly no one but Malko could hear it. “We can’t lose both of us.”

He rose and touched the spot on the hull that cracked the MetalSmith’s canopy open. He spoke without looking up, as he lowered himself into the driver’s seat. Andy, come on. Nobody follows us. You make that mistake and I'll kick your ass. The canopy sealed itself over them as Andy scrambled inside. We'll be back. The doors to the garage slid swiftly, silently aside.

Carl snapped the wings the instant they were clear of the doorway, and the MetalSmith was airborne before they were halfway to the gate.

NEAR 4 A.M. the MetalSmith turned onto the street in uptown Manhattan where Gerold McKann lived. Carl pulled the car over to the curb, well down the block, and killed the headlights. Five New York City police cars were clustered in the street before Gerry’s apartment, bubble holos glowing blue and red. A sixth car, parked neatly at the side of the street slightly away from the other five, bore the black on silver insignia of the United Na- tions Peace Keeping Force.

Carl sat for a moment, looking out through the canopy, until he was sure their arrival had attracted no notice.

Andy had slung the autoshot across his back and was check- ing the charge on his hand laser for perhaps the fifth time. Carl did not comment on it; he was familiar with Andy’s nervous hab- its, and they'd never slowed the boy down when it was impor-

128 Tales

tant. Not like Johnny, who had a critical inability to fire until after he’d been shot at.

Well? Do we go in?

Carl blinked, and glanced at Andy. Not the way you mean, no. Were far too badly outgunned. But yes, we are going in. Do you remember the job we did in Brunei?

Yes. You made the guard think you were his brother-in-law.

Do you think you can do that?

Andy hesitated too long. Yes.

There’s going to be six people in there at least, one per squad car. Probably closer to ten or twelve.

Andy looked out the window at the glowing bubble holos. I don't know for sure.

Okay, but that means you have to do the talking.

I can do that.

Give me the owner’s manual from the glove compartment. Andy handed it to him, and Carl flipped it open, set the beam on his hand laser to low-intensity, wide-dispersion infra-red, and played the beam over its pages. He checked the index for color, and under color for patterns. Following the instructions, he changed the car’s pale gold to silver, formed a black square along both sides of the car where the doors would have been had the MetalSmith had doors, and over the front hood. Glancing over at the real PKF vehicle, he drew stars in on the three black fields, and a blue-and-white sphere within the stars. It didn’t look much like the representation of Earth on the PKF vehicle, but if anybody got close enough to the MetalSmith to look, they were lost regardless.

Ready?

Yes.

Carl turned the headlights back on and pulled away from the curb. He drove sedately down the length of the street, and parked on the opposite side of the street from Gerry’s apart- ment. Two New York City gendarmes were standing out in front of the entrance to the apartment building, more confused than alarmed as Carl and Andy got out of the MetalSmith. One of

Moran 129

them was reaching for his holstered laser as Carl and Andy reached the steps leading up from the motionless slidewalk.

Carl stopped him with a thought. Andy pulled his wallet from a pocket of his jumpsuit and flashed the blank expanse of pseudoleather at the cops. “Je m’appelle Inspecteur Assante. Conseiller Carson envoie moi.”

The cops nodded after a moment’s pause, and the senior of the two waved them through. Don’t use French, Carl admon- ished Andy as they entered the hallway and punched for the lift to Gerry’s floor. Your accent’s not clearly American, but it’s obvi- ous you're not French. Speak English with a slight French ac- cent.

Andy grinned. Oui.

The lift doors slid aside, and Carl and Andy rode up to the fifth floor. Police were stationed at the lifts; once again they were waved through, and made their way down the hallway to Gerold McKann’s apartment.

The door to Gerry’s apartment was open. The carpet in the hallway outside was wet with a dark fluid. Nobody stood at the entrance to prevent admission. Andy walked straight through with Carl a step behind him.

The walls, the rug, the furniture and electronics equipment that Gerry collected; there was blood everywhere.

CARL IGNORED THE dampness he stood in, the blood that had turned the blue carpet a deep purplish black. He swept his mind across the room, let his eyes drop shut and walked through the two bedrooms. Three gendarmes, two Peaceforcers, one of whom was—

The Peaceforcer turned away from the remains on the carpet and crossed the floor to stand before Andy and Carl. He wore a huge overcoat against the night air, that made him appear lar- ger and broader than he was. In his own right the Peaceforcer was as tall as any Peaceforcer Carl had ever met, but so per- fectly proportioned that it was only when Carl found himself looking up to meet the man’s gaze that he realized just how very large the man was. His face was stiff; Elite, and one Carl did not

130 Tales

know. He was either recently become an Elite, or else recently arrived from France.

His voice was remarkably deep, with just a trace of rough- ness. He addressed them in French. “I do not believe I know you gentlemen.”

Andy hesitated a moment too long and then answered, as in- structed, in English. “Tm Inspector Assante. Councilor Carson asked me to—”

Carl became aware of a number of things happening all at once. Andy, who had seen dead men before, had caught sight of and was staring at the remains of Gerry McKann’s body even as he spoke. He was about to vomit. At the surface of the huge Peaceforcer Elite’s mind, suspicion blossomed in a rapid series of thoughts; know all the Inspectors and he is not one, too young, Carson sent no others tonight, that accent—

Carl extended himself through space, and with the exception of Carl and Andy and the huge Peaceforcer, every human within a forty meters dropped into unconsciousness as though poleaxed.

Carl seized control of the Peaceforcer Elite’s mind just in time. The cyborg’s right fist was hovering centimeters before his face, and the crystal embedded in the center knuckle was glow- ing pink. The crystal faded to black as Carl watched.

Andy, said Carl as soon as Andy had finished vomiting, close the door.

WHO ARE YOU?

The cyborg spoke in French. “I am Elite First Sergeant Mo- hammed Vance.”

Carl stood before him, eyes locked. What happened here?

Vance was a man of exceptional will; even under compulsion he answered only the questions put to him, as minimally as he was able. “Two PKF Elite tore Gerold McKann limb from limb.”

Were you one of those?

“No.”

Who ordered this?

“T believe the decision was Councilor Carson’s.”

Why?

Moran 131

“The murders are to be blamed upon a telepath whose name I do not know.”

Is this telepath supposed to have been strong enough to have done this?

“Councilor Carson thinks that it will not be difficult for a court to believe.”

What was his motive to have been?

“A psychotic rage. The man is known to indulge in them.”

What of the police here?

“They know nothing. They will simply find the telepath’s fin- gerprints upon the clothing of the dead man.”

Those are not the clothes he was wearing when he died.

“They are. He was forced to strip and don this clothing before he was killed.”

Remove them. You will report that you found the body un- clothed.

There was a brief and savage struggle of wills between the two men, and then Mohammed Vance said with a terrible ha- tred, “Yes.” He turned and stripped the bloody clothing away from the chunks of sundered flesh that were all that remained of Gerold McKann, and placed them in a leakproof bag from Gerry’s kitchen. Carl watched the man, an emptiness inside him, and took the bag from Vance when he was done. Wash your hands. Have holographs been taken of the body’s position?

“Yes.”

With which holocam?

“Those two.” Vance pointed at a pair of holocams resting on the floor next to two of the gendarmes.

Andy, examine those holocams and erase any holos of Gerry’s body. Be careful what you touch and wipe the surfaces when youre done. Carl returned his attention to Vance, who was just finishing at the sink, hands still wet. J will cause you to forget that I have been here. The same with these others. I will take the clothing with me when I leave, and you will report that the re- mains were found unclothed. We have erased the holos of Gerry with the clothing that bears my fingerprints. Is there anything

‘m missing that will betray our presence tonight?

132 Tales

Water dripped from Vance’s hands. His glare neared insan- ity. “The gendarmes near the lifts have seen the body.”

What of those at the street entrance?

“They have not.”

Is there anything else I’m missing?

“T can think of nothing.”

Andy? Can you think of anything?

Andy had to tear his gaze away from Gerry’s remains. He spoke aloud, and even so his horror was plain. “No. No, I can’t.”

Good. In an instant, Carl made the changes to the sleeping minds and brought them awake again. Several of them had blood stains upon their clothing that they would not be able to explain. Carl watched as they rose from the floor and silently went through the task of holographing the body again. It took him nearly half a minute to section off Mohammed Vance’s memory of the incident—he could not simply erase it—and re- place what had happened with a sequence of events that Vance, like the others, would swear to his dying day was the truth of the night, that Gerold McKann’s remains had been found un- clothed.

Minutes later they were down on the street again, and twenty minutes had been sliced from the memories of nine hu- man beings. Shortly thereafter they were headed home.

Their conversation in the car was brief.

“He was your best friend,” said Andy. “It hardly seems to have bothered you.”

Almost absently Carl said, “You win some and you lose some.” He took the car out onto the highway and plugged it into TransCon. He turned in his seat to face Andy. “Sometimes the good guys lose.”

Without moving Andy seemed to pull away from Carl, to grow more distant as he sat there. “They’re going to know we did something.”

For the first time that night, a flicker of pain touched Carl’s face. He turned away from Andy and looked out the canopy at the lights of the city. “There’s a distinction,” said Carl distantly.

Moran 133

“Theyre going to know something happened. But they won't know what.”

HALFWAY HOME, the car phone began beeping. Carl kept the holocam turned off and let the call through.

Malko’s image glowed in blue monovideo on the MetalSmith’s control panel. “Carl?”

Carl turned on the video and answered. “Hi, Malko. How are you?”

“What?” The question seemed to mean nothing to the old man. “Oh, that. I’m fine. Is Gerry dead?”

“Yes.”

Carl noticed for the first time that Malko’s voice was shak- ing. With anger? “We just received a call from Brazil. From Tomas.”

“What’s wrong?”

“Althea is dead.”

In the seat beside Carl, Andy whispered, “Oh.”

Carl said in a monotone, “How?”

“We don’t know yet. They were on a job for Sandoval Bio- Chemical—fine manipulation work, I think. Tomas and Allie were sharing a cabin and he woke up tonight and found she wasn’t in bed with him. Both the Double-S guards were asleep. He found her on the lawns outside his cabin. They’re saying snakebite.”

“Two hours ago.”

“Pretty near.”

“Bring everybody who’s on a job, home.”

“Carl?”

“Yes?”

“Don’t go on me, son. We need you too much.”

“Tm going to kill Sandoval,” said Carl, “and I’m going to kill Carson.”

“Carl, please.”

Carl stared through the canopy at the nighttime city. “Should have killed Carson a long time ago.”

134 Tales

Carson screamed it. “What?”

Mohammed Vance stood in full dress uniform, at attention in Carson’s office, in the midst of the vast stretch of carpet in front of Carson’s desk. Three of Carson’s aides sat in chairs before the bay window at the office’s east side. Early morning sunlight sil- houetted them, made their features indistinct. The sunlight washed through the room and lost itself in Mohammed Vance’s formal black uniform.

Vance spoke English with little accent. “In what way is my report unclear, sir?”

Carson’s features were red with rage, but the words brought him up cold. The chain of thoughts running through his mind was almost visible. He brought his temper under control with an effort that was visible. “The problem is not that the report is not clear,” he said, speaking as though to an idiot. “The problem is that you were brought from France to aid me because of a re- markable reputation, in one so young, for competence and reli- ability.”

Vance inclined his head. “Indeed.”

“I wonder,” said Carson bluntly, “whose employ you're actu- ally in.”

Mohammed Vance said without expression, “I serve the Uni- fication, sir. No more and no less.”

“Tdeologs,” whispered Carson half to himself. He looked up at Vance. “You're dismissed. Get out and don’t ever let me see you again—not ever.”

Vance did not salute. He turned and strode steadily from the office.

DARRYL AMNIER PACED restlessly across the gray rugs that cov- ered the floor of the offices of the Secretary General in Capital City, New York. The flag of the United Nations hung limply in the corner of his vision as he paced.

Just after 7 A.M. Charles Eddore was admitted to his pres- ence. “Sir?”

“Yes, Charles?”

Moran 135

“T received a message this morning from Malko Kalharri and Carl Castanaveras. I regret that I did not think to tape it.”

“Of course you didn’t,” said Amnier without heat. “One won- ders why they did not direct the call to me instead.”

“T don’t know, sir. The call came to my office.”

“T know. They told me. What had Kalharri to say?”

Charles Eddore licked his lips. “ ‘Greg was right. I won't make the same mistake again.’ ”

Amnier’s closed his eyes. “Charles, have you ever felt ashamed of something you’ve done?”

“No. No, sir, I can’t say I have.”

“Hadn’t thought so. What did Castanaveras say?”

“It was not important, sir.”

“Charles.”

“Sir, ‘And your little dog Toto, too.’ ”

GEROLD MCKANN’S parents and ex-wife buried him on Saturday, June 24, 2062, with the staff and editors of the Electronic Times in attendance.

Elsewhere in the world, on the same day, the telepaths bur- ied Althea Castanaveras, lowered her coffin into the damp ground at the center of the garden at the center of the Complex. A rain so fine it was almost mist fell steadily. The children cov- ered every centimeter of the garden, and still there was not enough space for all of them; many of them were forced to watch from the suites that ringed the garden. There were no tears; their grief was too profound. Even with the cold rage that kept the world away from him, Carl found room to be touched by the memorial the children had prepared. Wordlessly, their memories of Allie flowed through and among them, her words and deeds, the looks and smell and feel of her. A maturity that had no place in children touched their awareness; Althea was loved, and was missed, and was dead.

136 Tales

Carl suppressed any desire to address them; the Person whom they composed included Jany and Johann and Andy and Willi and Ary, all of the elder telepaths and all of the children except for those few who had not reached puberty, and it ex- cluded him. The only human there who would hear and under- stand his words was Malko, and Malko already knew.

Allie is dead, and Gerry is dead, and they are not going to be the only ones.

IN AN OLD HOME in Massapequa Park, a cool blue holocube ap- peared over Suzanne Montignet’s desk.

A handsome middle-aged man with a mustache whose name Suzanne did not know appeared from the shoulders up within the field. His background was indistinct. His temple did not bear the mark of an inskin data link. Though it was the middle of the night he had answered the call before Suzanne’s systerm had even begun counting out courtesy rings for her.

“The Tree is alive,” said Suzanne quietly.

“But the branches need pruning,” the man responded. “I’ve heard about your troubles. Is that why you are calling?”

“Yes.”

The man nodded. “Our friends thought you might be in touch. How can we help you?”

“The problems we have had here are caused by two people in particular. If you could arrange for them to ‘leave town’ I think you would engender considerable sympathy for our mutual goals. You might gain some leverage with the younger one.”

“And the elder?”

“I believe his position would remain unchanged.” Believe, thought Suzanne Montignet as she waited for the man’s reply, is probably not a strong enough term. Malko’s contempt for the Johnny Rebs was plain enough that Suzanne had only once at- tempted to broach the subject to him. “I am not,” she said after a moment’s silence, “certain whether his position on this subject is personal or simply a matter of policy; he is still watched quite closely.”

Moran 137

The man nodded. “Regrettable, but we act where we may. It may be that he would always be a greater liability than asset. Have you discussed this subject with the younger one?”

“I have not. He may know of it regardless. He has not indi- cated that he knows of this option. Still, the difficulty in keeping information confidential...”

“I understand. I will look into the subject of persuading these two persons to ‘leave town.’ If it seems feasible, we will, before arranging the trip, take the step of meeting with the younger one and arriving at an agreement.”

Suzanne Montignet nodded. “That would be appropriate.”

“T will be in touch. Liberty.”

“Liberty,” responded Suzanne, as the man’s image faded into the background blue.

Later that night: Carl? Yes, Jany? What are you going to do? Kill Carson. How? I don't know yet. He’s protected so well. And what of Sandoval? TIU kill him too. Of course. You sound as though you disapprove. How do you know he’s guilty? . 1 beg your pardon. Carl, you don’t know. You cant kill a man without knowing. Oh, that. Carl? Ill know.

THE FACE THAT appeared in the holofield was not human. Cat’s eyes, and the delicate whiskers, and the fine high cheekbones; once Carl could have loved her, but that she reminded him too

138 Tales

strongly of Shana. Jacqueline de Nostri’s expression was grave. “T grieve with you, Carl. Ask what you will of me.”

“Chris said something that led me to think you can get in touch with him.”

“Of course.”

“T need your help, and his.”

“Carson and the Secretary General? They are well protected.” Her ears twitched slightly. “Or Sandoval?”

“Sandoval. First.”

“Christian does little that his masters do not approve, Carl. I am not sure he will come.”

“Tell him that we will come to Japan, if he aids us.”

“We?”

“The telepaths, Jacqueline. You need not commit yourself, or the de Nostri.”

She studied his image for a long time. “Very well, Carl. We shall be the Three Musketeers again, no? Such a strange thing. I had thought that wheel had turned.” Her manner became busi- nesslike. “Where shall we meet you?”

“The bar Cojones, in Brasilia. It’s a dark place; dress appro- priately, you'll pass.”

“When?”

“Tomorrow morning. They open at nine.”

“I shall be there. And Christian, I hope.”

“Godspeed, Jacqueline.”

“And you, Carl.”

IT WAS NOT until Sunday that the Electronic Times ran news- dancer Gerold McKann’s last work before his untimely death. It was his interview with Carl Castanaveras.

IN THE HOURS around midnight, while Sunday became markdate Monday, Carl sat in a clearing midway up a mountain in the midst of jungle, just outside the sweep of patrols that protected the Sandoval estate. He sat beneath the shelter of the trees, sweat dripping down his motionless body, waiting for Chris and Jacqueline to return to him.

Moran 139

Here, as everywhere else in the world, the blunders of the Weather Bureau were felt; late at night, in the midst of the Bra- zilian winter, high enough that snow sometimes fell, the swel- tering heat was nearly intolerable.

Carl sat in the heat, and waited. He wore black fatigues with minimal hardware to slow him down; if it came to a serious fire- fight they were likely dead regardless. His weapons were a knife with an edge that was only three molecules wide, a garotte, a small .45-caliber automatic in case of rain, and an Excalibur Se- ries Two dual frequency short laser rifle. The weapon was sim- ple, unlike some variable lasers Carl had seen—difficult to make a mistake with, even under confused combat conditions. The fre- quency toggle had only two positions. For close-up antipersonnel work the rifle dropped down into maser frequencies and sprayed a continuous beam of semicoherent microwaves; you could fry a small roomful of people nearly as quickly as with a true flame- thrower, and it was much more portable. Against delicate elec- tronics or flesh, or any object with water in its makeup, it was as lethal as an autoshot, and it lasted longer in an all-out firefight. Against waldos it was less efficient, while set to maser frequen- cies. At its higher frequency it was a true coherent laser, emit- ting a continuous invisible beam of X-rays. Almost nothing would halt the X-laser; the beam sliced with equal efficiency through stone and metal, flesh and bone.

There was more modern hardware on the market; the Series Two was nearly a decade old. But there was not yet in Carl’s opinion a superior all-purpose weapon.

It felt strange, a sensation that reached him even through the dead numbness following the rage, that he should be sitting in yet another jungle, waiting for Jacqueline and Chris to return from another foray. For six years he and Chris and Jacqueline had worked together; usually but not always with Peaceforcers other than Chris to coordinate the job. Even when Chris had given them every reason to trust him, the French PKF Elite had not.

There was no sound audible to Carl, whose hearing was no better than a normal human’s; cross-legged, eyes closed, Carl

140 Tales

knew through other senses that Jacqueline de Nostri, naked but for her fur and a belt where her weapons were slung, had moved out of a nearby tree and into the one beneath which he sat. Mo- ments later Chris Summers brushed almost as quietly through the undergrowth and lowered himself to the ground next to Carl.

They breathed quietly. It was the only sound they made. They did not speak aloud. The most sensitive radio detectors known to man could not have heard their discussions. Carl sim- ply listened in on them constantly. What Jacqueline thought, Chris Summers heard; what Chris thought, Carl made certain Jacqueline heard.

Jacqueline de Nostri reclined languidly in the low limbs of the tree. We will wait until near morning. That was when the guards grew most careless last night. And then we shall have to move with great speed; we will not want to work when there is light. They do not use light enhancing goggles or glasses; there- fore each of us must see better than they can. Especially Chris- tian. It is one of our few advantages. Our weapons are not as powerful as theirs, except for the autoshot Christian carries.

Summers lay motionless on his back, looking up into the tree, toward Jacqueline. I’m getting clumsy in my old age. I almost had to kill one of Sandoval’s patrol. He damn near walked into me while I was looking out over the spread.

He didn’t suspect anything? asked Carl.

No, or I'd have killed him. One good thing out of it: I got a good close look at the man before he passed me by. I don’t think theyre wired for diagnostics or IDs. Good news is we can proba- bly pick them off without upsetting anybody until it’s time for them to report in, and they won't have any way except visual ID to be sure that you're not two of their own. Bad news is the two of you cant snatch their nonexistent IDs and make your way through the automated defenses that way. Chris Summers shifted position slightly, clasping his hands beneath his head as he stared up at the branches and stars. I did get the StingRays into place. Three of them, covering the house from its north side across an arc of one hundred twenty degrees. Also, I located the deep radar. Unless—or until—we decide to take them out as well,

Moran 141

they mean I cant get closer than about a quarter of a kilometer away from the house. That appears to be the range the radar sweeps. All the metal and heavy ceramic in my body, I'd light up the deep radar like a tank.

Jacqueline made a purring noise of satisfaction. The time I spent waiting for you to come, Carl, I have planted darts on eight different members of the patrol. Cerabonic construction, and small. I do not think any of the troops noticed they had been shot. If things get out of hand we can detonate them at any time. Each dart contains an extremely small amount of antimatter in a con- straining torus. Most of them will not be on patrol when we go in, but asleep in their barracks. We may take out most of the backup guards in this fashion.

Well done, said Carl. Where does their power come from?

There was silence from the other two. Okay, said Carl, un- derground cabling, or does he have his own fusion plant? Or both?

Summers said, He’s a paranoid bastard, judging from the ra- dar and light trips and troops. My guess would be internal fu- sion; my bet would be both.

Guesses are for when you can afford to be wrong.

I believe I taught you that, Carl.

Yes, said Carl, eyes seeking out across the dark mountain to where Tio Sandoval waited for him in a brightly lit mansion. I believe so.

A NOTE FROM the editors of the Electronic Times:

The following interview, which strongly condemns the policies of the Secretary General and of the United Nations Peace Keep- ing Force, was recorded on Wednesday, June 21. The next day two things happened. Althea Castanaveras, one of the Castanav- eras telepaths, on assignment for Sandoval Biochemicals in Bra- zil, was killed by snakebite while working in an area that is not known for poisonous reptiles; and Gerold McKann was brutally murdered in his uptown New York City apartment, and his cop- ies of this interview were destroyed. Standard operating proce- dure requires that Times reporters file copies of their current jobs

142 Tales

with the central Times database. Gerold McKann did so; that copy, wholly unedited, is what you will now audit.

At dateline, no suspect has been charged with Gerold McKann’s murder. New York City Police Commissioner Maxwell Devlin reports that the police currently have no suspects—at least, none they are willing to name.

THE FILE OPENS with the image of Gerold McKann, smiling into the holocams. He is dressed in a severe business suit of conserva- tive cut, without either a tie or shoulder silks. He is not wearing makeup, or if he is, has turned it off. Edit notes attached at this point reference background information on the telepaths, the de Nostri, the administration of Darryl Amnier, and a brief over- view of Amnier’s and Malko Kalharri’s roles in the Unification War. Biographical profiles of the major players in the current po- litical dispute are included. McKann: Edit, this is the intro for the Sunday interview. (McKann pauses and says something that is not audible on the recording, to a person standing off-holocam. He smiles and, hold- ing the smile, turns back to the holocam.) Good morning. My name is Gerold McKann, and I’m here this morning with an Electronic Times exclusive interview with Carl Castanaveras. Most of you know of him; he’s the young, somewhat reclusive leader of the genegineered telepaths who recently obtained their independence from the United Nations Peace Keeping Force. Edit, cut and insert at transition. (The holocams turn slowly, pulling back from the tight focus on Gerold McKann to include Carl Castanaveras. He is seated at the left end of a small sofa, dressed in dark boots, black slacks and a long-sleeved red silk shirt. He is wearing mirrored sun- glasses; a male voice from off-holocam advises him to remove them, and he does so, placing them in the pocket of his shirt. An edit note attached at this point identifies the voice as that of Malko Kalharri. Behind Castanaveras, through a wide bay win- dow, stretch the front lawns of the Complex. In the distance, demonstrators are visible, milling in the streets.)

McKann: How do you feel, Carl?

Moran 143

Castanaveras: Fine, thank you.

McKann: Relax, okay? We’re going to run over most of this a couple of times from different directions, and Pll edit from that. Have you ever been interviewed before?

Castanaveras: Briefly. Not like this.

McKann: If you hear me begin a sentence with “edit” it’s a search word tagging a note ’m making for editing purposes later. As for the holocams, just forget them being there. Talk to me, not them.

Castanaveras: Sure.

McKann: Good morning, Carl. How are you today?

Castanaveras: Fine, thank you. Except that it’s almost three in the afternoon.

McKann: Yeah, but the interview’s going to run in the Sun- day morning edition. Attention to detail. (Pause.) The general outline of your story is well known to our users. Nonetheless, there are details that have never really been brought to light. I know there are some subjects you can’t discuss because they’ve been classified, so if we start getting into one of those areas, let me know and Ill back out.

Castanaveras: The areas that we can’t discuss are largely those that relate to the details of the jobs I did for the Peace- forcers. Certainly it’s no secret that I—and other telepaths— have done intelligence work for them.

McKann: Carl, I guess the best place for us to start is in the beginning. Why were you created in the first place?

Castanaveras: Personally? Or the telepaths as a group?

McKann: Say both.

Castanaveras: As a group, we were created to gather infor- mation for the Peaceforcers. Most people know that, I think. But that was only after both Jany and I had shown we possessed the telepathic gift. Those of us born before then were simply part of what was—improperly—called Project Superman. Back in the late twenties, the United Nations sponsored several different lines of research into genetic engineering. Most of what they were looking for involved improved strength and endurance— better soldiers, essentially. Remember that this was just after

144 Tales

the end of the War, when it looked likely that the Peaceforcers would have to put down rebellion after rebellion until the end of time. I was a result of one of those lines of research. History seems to have given de Nostri a lot of credit that he doesn’t de- serve, as far as the creation of the science of genegineering goes. De Nostri did raise the practice of gene splicing to an art; he was probably the best gene splicer the world has ever seen. But that is not the same thing as designing structures at the DNA level, which was Suzanne Montignet’s accomplishment.

McKann: It seems they didn’t exactly get what they were looking for.

Castanaveras: You mean soldiers? Perhaps they did, in the de Nostri. The de Nostri are wonderfully suited for the task of soldiering, at least at the physical level. And they do enjoy bat- tle, that’s hardly a secret. The U.N. did not, fortunately, achieve their goals in the telepaths. We are a peaceful people.

TWO HOURS BEFORE dawn they moved.

The spot where they had waited through the night was sepa- rated by a small gorge from the Sandoval estate. The patrols swept to the edge of the gorge and went no farther. Foolishly, the patrol was patterned in a fashion that repeated itself at least twice a day; by the time early Monday morning had arrived Jacqueline had watched the patrol’s search pattern roll over three times. They came down off the mountain in the hot stillness of early morning, moving slowly into their positions on the other side of the gorge. Deep infrared light trips were set at multiple waist- high locations throughout the approach to the house. The beams were within Chris’s visual range; they were not within either Carl’s or Jacqueline’s, and as a result they both wore enhancing sunglasses that extended their eyesight into ranges nearly as wide as Chris’s. Pressure pads were doubtless buried at various points as well. The patrols they had to penetrate were private Sandoval guards, but there was a barracks of Army troops tucked not quite a half a kilometer down the main access road leading away from the estate.

Moran 145

At 4:10 A.M., a guard made his crashing noisy way through the underbrush lining the dry gulch that marked the perimeter of their patrol. Summers tracked him with a sonic rifle for nearly five seconds before the man stumbled and went to his knees. Summers held the beam of sound on the man for another five seconds before releasing the trigger.

At 4:15 A.M. a second guard came along and received the same treatment, fifteen meters earlier. There would not be an- other security guard through for another forty minutes. Carl carried the first guard over to rest next to the second and laid him down. With Chris and Jacqueline covering him, he closed his eyes, left the world behind, and one after another went in- side their unconscious minds. ... rolling waves of black fear, and the constant sickness in his stomach. He was so afraid, always so afraid, and the others knew they all knew...Carl moved through the shattered remnants of the fear that had come to the man when he realized that something was dreadfully wrong, and he was already too weak to do any- thing about it, and then unconsciousness claimed him...deeper, down into memory, and as always the strong memories were of fear and guilt and rage and hatred, and they leapt up to greet him, to envelop him...Rita Sandoval’s naked body, and he had been unable to tear his eyes away from her and the door had closed and Tio Sandoval had passed by only moments later, and Sandoval knew he had been spying on the Senorita, it was there in his evil smile...faces, a swirl of faces, only one of which was right, a short, fat man with a face that never held joy, never held anything but a mild contempt for the rest of the world, sitting at a row of monitors.... Out and in again, and the man was almost a moron, with faded grey memories of peoples and places, knowing only that he served the Sandovals and they fed him and cared for him, and with a dim gratitude for the kindnesses his commanding officer sometimes showed him, and a totally unconscious revulsion for the night-watch monitoring officer, the man with the round face, who said things to him he could not understand...

146 Tales

Carl opened his eyes. He was only vaguely aware of how drenched with sweat he had become. He ignored the faint trace of an oncoming headache and held the image of the short fat man in his consciousness and focused upon it, seeking into the great house, finding nothing and then a flicker, and he heard himself murmuring aloud, “Sleep, sleep...” The flicker steadied and for a brief moment Carl’s mind enveloped that of Rico Benitez, and through his eyes scanned monitors that held im- ages of jungle and broad swaths of lawn and corridors and bed- rooms, and then there was only silence, throughout the great house, the silence of the small death that was sleep.

“Done,” he whispered.

Jacqueline de Nostri did not even use her knife. She knelt and opened their throats to the night air with her claws.

Neither Carl nor Chris Summers attempted to stop her. The watch officer is asleep, said Carl. I don’t know if anybody else was in there with him.

Chris Summers nodded. You and Jacki probably won't set off wake-up alarms unless they have logic inside programmed for face and shape recognition. I don’t go past this point; I'd set off their deep radar. I’m going to work my way around the perimeter over to the main road. Summers faded into the darkness. Ill take ‘em out as I come to ‘em. Youre on your own, kids. If it blows call me and I'll come in. Otherwise Ill see you at pickup.

Carl unslung his maser rifle and gestured with it toward the estate. Let’s go deal some death.

Yes.

They moved in.

MCKANN: What’s it like to read another human’s mind? Castanaveras: Unpleasant. McKann: Can’t you be a little more specific than that? Castanaveras: I’m not sure I can, not in any meaningful way. In the purest sense, it’s not reading minds. A better de- scription would be to say that I look at the world through an- other person’s eyes. While I do it I am both persons, both myself

Moran 147

and whoever it is I am in touch with. I see through two pairs of eyes, think with two minds. If I read the mind of someone who is more intelligent than I am—and I have, on occasion—in that moment, I am capable of understanding perfectly things that generally are not within my grasp. Two minds, linked by one Gift.

McKann: You still haven’t explained your use of the word “unpleasant.”

Castanaveras: Do you know what the commonest emotion is?

McKann: I can guess.

Castanaveras: No you can’t. Guilt. This vast regret for the things that they've done that are wrong. Those are the people whose minds it hurts to contact, and they are far and away in the majority. The percentage of people who don’t suffer from guilt is so vanishingly small m tempted to say that such people are not sane. Either they’re not sane or the rest of us are not sane, and those of us who feel shame for things we’ve done far outnumber those who don’t.

McKann: Isn’t that one of the definitions of a sociopathic personality? The inability to feel guilt?

(Castanaveras is silent a long moment.)

Castanaveras: I’m not referring to such people. There are sociopaths, but not many, at least by percentage of the popula- tion. (Silence again.) Some people have—well, the best way I can say it is that they know themselves. They know who they are, what their strengths and weaknesses are, and they are at peace with themselves. Those people, they don’t do things that might make them uncomfortable. (Half smiles.) It must be nice.

McKann: I take it that you’re not one of those.

Castanaveras: Me? Hell, no. I do things I regret all the time.

McKann: Really?

Castanaveras: Oh—constantly.

THEY STOOD IN sultry darkness beneath the shelter of the trees, a meter away from the brightly lit lawns. Glowfloats bobbed

148 Tales

restlessly ten meters in the air above them, casting a harsh and relentless light across the scene.

A fence ran all the way around the mansion except at the main entrance. Both live and automated guards—modified hunt- ing waldos, as near as Carl could tell—patrolled at the single gate through which traffic could pass in and out of the protected inner area. There was a well lit stretch of lawn of nearly sixty meters between the edge of the trees and the fence. I see no light trips.

Neither do I, said Carl. He focused with the sunglasses and zoomed in on the fence. A brightness above the fences was so faint Carl was not certain he was not imagining it. Look, just above the fence.

I do not...ah. They have strung fineline above the fence. Per- haps—I would guess two meters high, as high again as the fence itself. Expensive.

He has the money for it. Looks like that way’s out. If we get ourselves chopped to pieces on it, it sets off a quiet alarm; if we cut the fineline it sets off one of the noisy alarms.

Her thought held sarcasm. Such brilliant deductive powers.

What does that fence look like to you?

Adobe?

Uh-huh. Old, too. Want to bet it’s not sensitized? I bet they slapped the fence together about the turn of the century and never bothered to rebuild with modern sensors inside.

My preference is to refrain from betting.

You blew that one when you got up this morning.

True. Our choices then are front gate, which means taking out the waldos, or cutting through the wall.

We can't go over and we dont have time to dig under. I don’t see what else it leaves.

Jacqueline nodded decisively. Straight through the wall.

They circled around through the cover of the trees, until they were out of sight of the front gate. On three; one and two and go.

They sprinted under the lights, across the bright lawns. Jac- queline outdistanced him and was flat on her stomach next to the fences before Carl had half crossed the distance. He reached

Moran 149

her moments later and dropped to the ground next to her. Jac- queline held down the trigger on her laser, running the beam around and around in a circle not quite a meter in diameter on the surface of the fence. With his rifle Carl began tracing the outline of an X’ inside the circle. There were minor explosions every time the beam struck a buried air pocket inside the adobe and the superheated air expanded in a shock wave. Jacqueline released the trigger on her laser. Carl followed her example a second later. The adobe was glowing cherry red, as though a huge brand had been taken to its surface. Carl, with Jacqueline bracing him, kicked with all his might at the center of the ‘X’, once, twice, and on the third kick the circle folded in. A fourth kick knocked out one quarter that had not popped through with the other three. Carl squirmed through, protected by his cloth- ing from the still-glowing edges of the circle. Jacqueline followed in the next moment, more carefully; unlike Carl’s inflammable fatigues, that were designed to take a laser blast without much complaint, her own fur burned quite well.

The inner yard, unlike that outside the fences, was dark. As a result, neither of them had more than a moment’s warning be- fore the silent rush of the dogs through the trees struck them.

McKANN: Edit, subject of de Nostri. (Pause.) Carl, the de Nostri are at least as interested in the substance of the current debate as are the telepaths. Yet they're even more unapproachable than you are. Why is this so?

Castanaveras: You realize that I can’t speak for them.

McKann: I’m not asking for that. But surely your lines of communication with the de Nostri are substantial; your people lived with theirs for over ten years.

Castanaveras: About twelve. After our attorneys won per- mission for us to live where we chose, they decided to return to France. Jacqueline and Albert de Nostri were largely responsi- ble for that decision, Pm told. The younger de Nostri wanted to stay in America; most of them had grown up here. (Grins.) Un- fortunately, the same legal decision that put me in charge of our children put the de Nostri elders in charge of theirs. I’m of the

150 Tales

impression that they weren’t given much choice. The de Nostri dont run things democratically.

McKann: Why do they keep such a low profile?

Castanaveras: Surely that’s obvious.

McKann: I’m afraid not.

Castanaveras: Look, right now, outside our front gates, you can see some three thousand demonstrators picketing us be- cause we're guilty of the crime of wanting to decide our own fate. A lot of that is fear; we can read their minds, and they don’t much like that fact. Some of it is the hatred of difference—which is rooted in fear. But the biggest part of it is that they know where we are. Look, any educated human being on this planet who’s audited one of the news Boards of late knows where we are. I mean, not necessarily the street address, but with a half hour to drive around the neighborhood, they’d find us, if only by homing in on the sound of the chanting. Now, you're a reasona- bly educated man, are you not? You keep up on the news, I pre- sume?

McKann: I see where you're going.

Castanaveras: Where are the de Nostri? In France, sure, I just told you that much. Maybe you even knew. But specifically, where?

McKann: I don’t specifically know. I’m sure I could find out.

Castanaveras: No doubt. Could a mob? I will tell you this much about the de Nostri—nobody’s picketing them.

A SNARLING MASS of claws and teeth struck Carl chest high and slammed him back against the wall. Strong jaws clamped down on him through the boot on his right foot and dragged him down to the ground in a single wild pull. He lost his rifle and found his knife just in time to turn its edge toward the breast of the first dog as that dog leapt upon him again, clawing at his throat. The knife melted into the dog’s flesh, shearing through fur, muscle, cartilage and bone with equal ease. The dog got its teeth around Carl’s forearm and was bearing down as it died. Only its mass kept the second dog from getting at Carl’s face, and then some- thing else, moving blurringly fast on all fours, went over Carl

Moran 151

and took the dog in a tumbling roll across five meters of lawn. When their roll ceased, Jacqueline de Nostri came to her feet without pause.

Carl became aware of the weight of the dog on his chest, and its blood as it seeped over his fatigues.

Dogs, thought Jacqueline, trembling with emotion, J hate dogs.

She stood motionlessly a few steps away from him, still trem- bling, and Carl shoved the dog aside, removed his forearm from its jaws, stood and looked around. In the dim light from the faraway glowfloats, he saw the corpses of five animals.

He had killed only one of those five, and almost by accident.

Jacqueline was still shaking when he had retrieved his knife and his rifle, and by reflex he nearly made the mistake of saying something, of reaching in to try to help her to grow calm again; and then he remembered himself, and her, and from long knowl- edge refrained.

They moved on into the tree filled darkness in silence.

(AN EDIT NOTE attached at this point says: “The following is taken from the Thursday morning interview, early on the day Gerold McKann was murdered. Both McKann and Castanaveras are wearing the same clothing they wore in the earlier session.”’)

McKann: Carl, you said something a bit earlier that sounded as though you thought the demonstrations outside are staged. Could you elaborate on that?

Castanaveras: ľd love to. Look. (A holofield shimmers into existence. All that is recorded by the holocams is a blur.) This is—

McKann: Edit. Carl, you should have asked me about this. You can’t holograph a holograph.

Castanaveras: Oh? Why not?

McKann: I don’t know, you just can’t. You don’t get anything except a blur. Haven’t you ever run a holocam?

Castanaveras: Not often.

McKann: Make me a copy of the images you want to run and Tll splice them in where appropriate.

152 Tales

Castanaveras: Fine. Should I just go on?

McKann: Edit, interview resumes. (Pause.) Could you elabo- rate on that?

Castanaveras: ...sure. Look, this is a compilation of holos that we took when you arrived on Wednesday and left Wednes- day night. I’m sure you noticed us stunning members of the crowd so that you could get in through the gates.

McKann: It did not escape my attention.

(An image of demonstrators at the front gate of the Chandler Complex briefly overlays the primary image of McKann and Castanaveras.)

Castanaveras: This shows clearly—here, and again a few seconds later, here—these people aren’t even trying to get out of the way of the stun rifles, even though it’s quite clear where those rifles are aimed. Now, look, we’ve got these faces sepa- rated out; these are the faces of the people who were stunned. Uh, at the moment they were stunned they were not good candi- dates for identification; they tended to be grimacing at that point. These holos are backtracked from a few moments earlier, but there’s no question that they are the images of the persons being stunned.

McKann: Stipulated. We’ll confirm this.

Castanaveras: Fine. I’m not sure how to phrase this—as of today, Thursday morning, we don’t have proof that any of these people are Peaceforcers. But we will, in time for your Sunday edition.

McKann: (Leans forward, looking into holofield.) Pll be damned—if you can do that, that might be interesting. But Pm afraid it might not do you a lot of good, Carl. There’s no law I know of that prohibits a member of the PKF from demonstrating against the telepaths.

Castanaveras: I’m sure there’s not, Gerry. But Gerry, how much would you like to bet that these men are on duty? Drawing pay, on government time, to harass us?

McKann: I think maybe that’s a sucker bet. I’m going to edit what I just said.

Moran 153

Castanaveras: Coward. One more thing for you to think about, though. We’ve had between six hundred and about four- teen hundred demonstrators out there every single day since we moved into the Complex. Today there are over three thousand, and would you like to know when those crowds appeared? The very day that Judge Sonneschein ruled that we were not subject to the Official Secrets Acts of 2048 and 2054. Damn it, what’s wrong with wanting to be free? (pause)...1 hope that’s a rhetorical question. There’s not a corner of this globe that still tolerates slavery in any form. Oh, there are idiots in India and Taiwan and elsewhere who can sign themselves into indenture for cash—but the period of indenture is limited to five years, they get paid for it, and the choice is theirs! We never once got paid for our services, nobody asked us whether we wanted to do what we were forced to, and the period of inden- ture was unlimited. The Secretary General’s office has made no bones of the fact that it considers the Eighth Amendment an ab- erration, and even while conceding that it must follow the letter of the Amendment has gone to insane lengths to circumvent its intent. We are being sued by the United Nations through the Bureau of Traffic Enforcement, by the PKF for breach of verbal contract, by the Prosecutor General’s office for violation of the Official Secrets Acts, by the Ministry of Population Control for failure to provide properly for our children, by the Bureau of Zoning Controls for operating a business out of a residence— that’s the Chandler Complex they're referring to—and for God knows what else. I mean, we’ve been here in the Chandler Com- plex for nine months now. Is it, as the Secretary General’s office claims, purely a coincidence that all of these legal problems arose only in the last two months or so? Only, in other words, since the enactment of the Eighth Amendment? Infoshit.

McKann: Traffic Enforcement?

Castanaveras: Speeding violation. No big deal. Come on, Gerry —is it a coincidence? You’re a reasonable man.

McKann: /’m supposed to be interviewing you.

Castanaveras: Okay, no, it is not a coincidence. We are, right now, the object of a conspiracy between the Prosecutor

154 Tales

General’s office, in the person of Charles Eddore, the Peace Keeping Force, in the person of Unification Councilor Carson— who serves, in case I haven’t made myself clear, as Chairman of the Peace Keeping Force Oversight Committee in the Unifica- tion Council—and the Secretary General’s office, in the person of the Secretary General himself. They haven’t been able to touch us legally, and they will not be able to. That leaves illegal means, beginning, but [ll warrant not ending, with this mess outside the front gates of my home.

McKann: Edit, subject of conversation with SecGen. Carl, do you want to discuss your conversation with the Secretary Gen- eral? Or possibly just give me your recording of the conversa- tion?

(A male voice from off-holocam, identified as Malko Kal- harri’s, says something unintelligible at this point. It contains the words “Secretary General.” A text note inserted by the editors of the Electronic Times notes that no recording of the alleged conversation has been made available to the Times at this date.)

Castanaveras: No. We'll save that for another time.

McKann: Okay. Without some statement from you, you won't get any play on it when the interview runs.

Castanaveras: We're not looking for war, Gerry. That con- versation might embarrass the Secretary General, but not much more. He said nothing actionable in it. I’m not looking to embar- rass the man, Gerry. Just convince him to leave us alone.

McKann: You don’t think you're at war now?

Castanaveras: I don’t know. I haven’t had a chance to read the Secretary General’s mind, or Carson’s either. There’s a dif- ference between playing chicken and actually fighting. Right now were standing face to face, waiting to see who blinks first. (Grins.) If you always knew whether the guy across the table from you was holding, there wouldn’t be much point in trying to bluff, would there?

(Pause.) I certainly hope were not at war. I don’t want that. (Castanaveras pauses again for several seconds, and adds:) If they have any sense, neither do they.

Moran 155

TIO SANDOVAL awoke in darkness.

For a moment he was not certain what had awakened him. Carolita was still asleep at his side, her breathing gentle and regular. The only light in the room came from the fish tank that ran along most of one wall, where Carolita’s exotics navigated their way through the miniature submarine kingdom she had designed as a hobby. The light from the tank washed the room in a dim, aquamarine glow that wavered and shifted with the movement of the water. Carolita lay naked next to him, lovely in a pure and almost irrelevant manner. He felt no desire for her— had not felt desire for any woman since the death of the telepath girl. A warm breeze moved across his bare chest, and he realized what had awakened him. A moment’s sharp displeasure with Carolita passed through him; constantly, she argued with him whether the window was to stay open or shut. Better the heat of clean air, she said, than the false chill of air conditioning. Their only window, which looked out over the south side of the gentle slope upon which Casa Sandoval was built, was dilated to its full extension, the glassite shrunk back to the windowsill itself across the perimeter of the circle. He considered calling the win- dow closed, but Carolita would surely awaken and complain at his noise. Sandoval left the bed and came to his feet in a single fluid motion, and strode across the room to touch the pressure pad that dilated the window. He had the vague impression that there was some thing be- hind him, when a strong hand clamped over his mouth and a knife traced a shallow cut along the edge of his neck. He went rigid, and then relaxed and did not even consider resisting. Something was wrong with his thought processes—he had been drugged, perhaps, for though intellectually he knew he was in grave danger, emotionally the subject was hazy and irrelevant. They continued to the window, and another shape—de Nostri— was there, hanging seemingly unattached to the edge of the wall at his third story bedroom. The de Nostri, a female, handed him a pair of gloves, that he donned without question. He climbed out through the window, and accepted the de Nostri’s help in

156 Tales

grasping the almost invisible line that was attached near the window. He slid down the line to the ground, momentarily aware that the drop was enjoyable and frightening at the same time. A pain occurred in his knee when he reached the ground, but that was not important either. Instants later the de Nostri and the man with her came down the line after him.

Then the lights came on, everywhere, and then sirens.

With a shock of surprise almost great enough to penetrate the haze that insulated him from the rest of the world, Tio Sandoval recognized Carl Castanaveras.

Carl took one swift look around the daylight-bright lawns they were trapped upon, glanced up into the sky and saw the spyeyes and glowfloats and said, “Oh, shit.”

MCKANN: What do the telepaths want?

Castanaveras: I’m not sure what you mean.

McKann: Everybody wants something. What do you desire from life?

Castanaveras: We want to be left alone, Gerry. There are a lot of good things in the world that we’ve never had time for. Time enough for the parts of life that make life worth living; that would be nice.

SEVERAL THINGS happened at once.

Carl flipped his rifle over to wide-dispersion maser and fired straight up into the night sky, into the glowfloats and spyeyes hovering directly over their heads. There was no water in them, but there were delicate electronics that could not have been hardened against radiation without adding unacceptably to the cost of producing them. The spyeyes dropped like stones when the maser beam struck them. The glowfloats burst and fell in flaming wreckage to the yard around them, casting the yard back into gloom. He called for pickup at the same moment: Situation fucked, come and get us—first to Chris and then to Malko Kalharri, who was in a semiballistic orbital can, thirteen kilometers above their head, and descending already when Carl reached him. The distance was great, but with no other minds

Moran 157

between them Carl’s contact with the old man was as sharp as though Malko had been on the ground there with him.

Jacqueline had Sandoval by the back of his neck and pushed him at a stumbling run to the east wall, where they had sliced their hole. Carl trotted backward after her, rifle at the ready. Two of Sandoval’s private troops ran around the far corner of the house before he had reached the adobe fence; Carl flipped over to X-laser and waved the invisible beam at the two soldiers. One fell, cut almost in half, and the other ducked back out of sight. Carl paused a moment and sliced off a half dozen of the trees nearest him at their bases, flipped the rifle over to maser and waved the maser beam over the fallen trees until they burned fiercely. Their backs covered for the moment, he turned to where Jacqueline waited with Sandoval.

In his concern for their pursuit, he had released his mental hold of Sandoval; Jacqueline had him facedown on the ground next to the hole they had burnt in the adobe wall, claws against the side of his neck. Carl, what awaits us on the other side?

Carl shut his eyes and slipped away from his body.

Four...no, five of them, ranging themselves in a tight arc of perhaps twenty degrees, facing the hole in the fence with auto- shots readied. A second group of guards was headed their way. He fed the image to Jacqueline.

Can you look for this—the image of a small dart appeared in her mind—on their persons?

Yes. He scanned through the crowd—the second group ar- rived, and took up their positions on an arc that now covered more than forty degrees—and came up at first with nothing. Then Jacqueline imagined the dart against the palm of her hand, and with the correct size of the item fixed in his mind he came up quickly with two guards who bore the miniature darts somewhere in their clothing.

Jacqueline lifted Sandoval to his feet in one surging heave and forced him back from the wall with Carl following.

She touched something hanging from her belt. A huge shock wave hammered at them, rolled on, and on, and on. Even though Carl had expected it he was knocked off his feet. Jacqueline did

158 Tales

not let it slow her; with her claws digging into Tio Sandoval’s neck she ran back toward where the fence had been. Ten meters of its length had been blown down. Carl scrambled back to his feet and followed her at a dead run. There was nobody alive on the other side of the fence, only bodies burnt so badly they were barely recognizable. Jacqueline and Sandoval had nearly reached the cover of the trees when the low, sleek shape of the hunting waldo burst out of concealment twenty meters away. Carl had time for only one half-panicked shot at the waldo, and realized with horrified dismay that his rifle was still set for maser fire; sparks show- ered off the armored waldo’s surface but it did not slow. The waldo ignored Sandoval and struck Jacqueline de Nostri like a battering ram. Her body bounced away from the waldo when it struck her. Its glittering central mandible held something cov- ered with brown fur, and blood spurted away from her in a bright arterial stream.

Behind Carl, a single Sandoval guard came from around the southeast corner of the house, weaponless, running for his life.

Carl never saw him; he flicked the rifle to X-laser and slashed through the waldo’s mandibles, chopping down toward the low-slung waldo’s running legs. The waldo was programmed to recognize laser fire as a threat; it whirled and came at Carl in a terrible, soundless zigzagging scramble.

Tio Sandoval, free of Carl’s control, had come to his feet and was sprinting back toward his house.

Something came after the running soldier. The moving shape reached him and slowed long enough to flicker into existence as a human being, and the soldier disappeared in a shower of blood and flesh. The flicker became a blur again, passed Tio Sandoval without slowing; a flat sharp cracking sound was the only sign that the blur had dealt with Sandoval. Sandoval folded bone- lessly, and the blur streaked past Carl and collided at full speed with the hunting waldo. What seemed to happen was too unbe- lievable; the waldo screamed like a living creature, and parts of it began heading in different directions.

Moran 159

Tearing metal, Carl thought rationally, that was the sound of the scream.

Chris Summers paused an instant, snapped Get Sandoval, and blurred back into motion over to where Jacqueline lay on the manicured grass. Carl turned away from them, reslung his rifle, lifted Sandoval’s nude form and slung him over his shoul- ders in a fireman’s carry, and trotted back to where Chris was bent over Jacqueline and asked, Can we move her?—before he saw how bad the damage was. Chris did not answer him; he was up and moving, picked up Jacqueline de Nostri’s arm from where it had been flung, returned and lifted her body with as little effort as he had taken for the limb.

Go. Carl ran for the cover of the forest, and Chris Summers, still holding Jacqueline’s body, turned and surveyed the great house. There was a fire burning at the rear of the house where Carl had set the trees afire, and ten meters of fence had been blown into oblivion.

What is the value of a life?

He had himself left sixteen or else seventeen of Sandoval’s guards for dead, and destroyed a pair of waldos. Jacqueline had detonated her antimatter-bearing darts; Chris had seen one guard go up in mid-step, as though he had thumbed the switch on a grenade and neglected to throw it afterward. At the same time the guards’ barracks had come down with a roar of thun- der, the walls blowing out and the roof falling down.

Two thoughts fought for Chris Summers’ attention.

The first was that there would be observation satellites watching this. They would show that there had been a de Nostri here, and that there had been a Peaceforcer Elite—but they would not show who those people had been. Unlike the spyeyes, that would have his face, and Carl’s, and Jackie’s.

The spyeyes, most likely, transmitted what they saw into storage somewhere inside the house.

His second thought was that there were certainly innocent people within the house.

It seemed to him that he had been standing there for a very long time.

160 Tales

They killed Jackie, he thought at last, and twitched a relay within himself.

The three StingRay missiles came from high on the moun- tain. With the eyes of a Peaceforcer Elite, sampling at over a thousand frames a second, Chris Summers watched them come down in a slow, gliding beauty, and detonate themselves in air- bursts only meters above Casa Sandoval.

The shockwaves from the explosions washed over him. Their heat set Jacqueline’s fur on fire. Shutters dropped down over his eyes to protect the delicate mechanisms. His clothing was singed, and his skin darkened slightly from the heat. His hair did not burn; it was not real.

The fire in Jacqueline’s fur burned out of its own accord.

Summers turned and headed for pickup at top speed.

TIO SANDOVAL awoke in drop.

He was not groggy; he felt fine—clearheaded and alert. There was something cold touching the back of his neck. He was in a small cabin, strapped securely into a chair, and a man whose face was damnably familiar was turning away from him, feet making the normal tearing velcro sound as he moved. Sandoval was still naked from the waist down, though somebody had dressed him in a shirt. The man was old, though he did not ap- pear so in his bearing—the skin of his neck and hands was marked with the looseness common among the aged who had re- ceived particularly excellent geriatrics therapy. The old man placed a hypo inside a recessed panel and withdrew his hand as the compartment shut.

The man turned back to face him, and Sandoval came back to himself with a shock so great it overwhelmed whatever it was he had been injected with.

Malko Kalharri lowered himself carefully into a seat facing Sandoval and strapped himself in. “Command, holocams on.” He smiled at Sandoval then. “Sieur Sandoval, you have problems like you don’t even want to know about.”

English was not a language Sandoval was totally comfortable in; it took him a moment to work through the syntax of what

Moran 161

Kalharri had said. “What do you mean?” Without being too obvi- ous about it he tested his bonds until he knew with certainty that he was unable to break them.

Kalharri did not cease smiling. “We’re in geosynch right now. Right outside this cabin there’s an airlock that opens up on death pressure. There’s a truth plate up against the back of your neck. Now, Im going to ask you some questions, and you're go- ing to geek for me. You tell me what I want to know or you go out through the airlock.”

“How do I know you won't do that anyway?”

Kalharri shrugged, watching Sandoval with a genteel amuse- ment.

“Go to hell, old man.”

“Carl Castanaveras,” said Kalharri carefully, “is outside the door to this cabin. Now, you can talk—nicely, now, to me—or I can call him in, and you talk to him, and you will talk.”

“Tm sure.” Sandoval cocked his head to one side, strangely unable to worry about what was happening. After consideration he nodded. “My options seem limited.”

“You'd be amazed.” Kalharri glanced down at a video tablet in his lap. “How did Althea Castanaveras die?”

“Snakebite.”

“Administered by whom?”

“No one.”

Kalharri shook his head minutely. “Sieur Sandoval, this is my last try, and I’m going to let Carl have you. Tell me about Al- thea’s death.”

Sandoval said flatly, “Councilor Carson requested it. I im- plemented it.”

“Implemented how?”

“She was bitten by a sidewinder supplied by my genegineers. It was placed outside her cabin and locked onto her scent. We drugged the boy Tomas and their guards, and I called her out- side. The snake struck her moments after she left her cabin.”

“And...why were you the one who called her outside?”

162 Tales

Sandoval froze, staring at Kalharri. The man already knew the answer, or he would not have asked. “You cumsucking fag- got,” he whispered; it was the worst insult he knew in English.

Kalharri looked away from him for a moment, eyes unfo- cused. Listening to an inskin data link, Sandoval judged, or pos- sibly speaking with Castanaveras. He turned back to Sandoval and laughed. “Allie got you, didn’t she? You watched her die and she realized what was happening before she died, and you ha- ven’t been able to get it up since.”

The hatred clogged his throat. “I'm going to kill you,” Sandoval got out at last.

Kalharri glanced back down at his video tablet. “No, quite the contrary,” he said absently. “What was Secretary General Amnier’s role in her death?”

The words spilled from him against his will. “I don’t know. I don’t know if he even knew of it.” He heard the words fall from his lips with horror; if they could make him speak so when he would not, why had Kalharri even tolerated the degree of eva- sion he had attempted?

“What do you know about Gerold McKann’s death?”

The realization came to him; Kalharri was questioning him because Castanaveras did not trust himself. The knowledge of how close he was to his death froze Sandoval again, and again the prompt came and forced his answer. “I know that it hap- pened. I do not know who caused it, or why, aside from guesses.”

“Okay.” Kalharri tucked the video tablet in a small pouch at the side of the chair. “I think that’s about all.” He raised himself and returned to the cabinet where he had stowed the hypo ear- lier. He removed a different, smaller hypo and injected Sandoval again. “This will partially counteract the euphoric I just gave you. Not entirely; Carl wants you conscious.”

Sandoval jerked against the restraints that held him, nostrils flaring. Against his will he screamed aloud as the drug hit him. Suddenly there was a great throbbing in his skull, and a vast ache that permeated his body. Kalharri lifted a bushy gray eye- brow. “Tsk. Overdo it a little, did I? So sorry.”

Moran 163

The door to the cabin opened, and Carl Castanaveras, still in black fatigues, came through. Kalharri left as he entered. The door to the cabin stayed open behind him. Castanaveras stood still, looking at Sandoval. He held an old Series Two Excalibur that had seen considerable use and the expression he wore could have been sold to poison Peaceforcers.

Sandoval tried to speak, but his lips and tongue would not work properly. Castanaveras touched a stud on the rifle and brought it to bear on Sandoval. He stood in silence, until finally Sandoval screamed, “Kill me, you cocksucker!”

Castanaveras did not seem to aim particularly; he was hold- ing the rifle with one hand. The rifle dropped toward Tio Sandoval’s crotch, and Sandoval drew in the breath to scream with.

Castanaveras touched the trigger and shot Sandoval in the crotch with a maser burst. The pain as his genitals cooked was insane, so totally divorced from any ordinary pain Tio Sandoval had ever experienced that for seconds he made no sound except an involuntary gasping, floating in a bizarre electric wash of pure sensation.

Then he did scream and could not stop. He screamed while Castanaveras touched a point on Sandoval’s chair, and his bonds fell away. He screamed while Castanaveras pulled him from the chair and towed him by his hair across the cabin. He screamed while the airlock door opened and while the airlock door closed. He screamed when the outer airlock door opened and the escap- ing air blew him out into death pressure.

He stopped screaming when the vacuum sucked the air from his lungs.

CARL STOOD AT the window of his bedroom, looking out in the high clean light of midafternoon at the demonstrators milling in front of the Complex. There were over five thousand of them by

164 Tales

Security Service’s count. Someone had provided several hundred of them with dramasuits to parade in.

Let me help you.

Carl felt curiously distanced from it, as though it was all some news file he was auditing, and not in truth a crowd of peo- ple who wanted him, and his children, either in slavery or dead. It did not matter that many of the crowd had been paid to be there; the greater number of them had not.

You lost Gerry and Allie and Jacqueline. Baby, you can't lock yourself away from the world like this. Let me help.

He spoke aloud. “Please, Jany. I’m trying to think.”

Her thoughts kept after him, insistently. No youre not. Youre withdrawing. I know you, you're not thinking, youre just feeling, and you don’t want me to interfere with it. Carl, youre hurting yourself.

“My privilege, surely. Command, bring me formal wear and call Malko.” The housebot rolled away to the closet and a holofield appeared behind Carl. Malko’s figure appeared in the cube; Carl did not turn around.

“Yes, Carl?”

“How much longer before you'll be ready?”

“Ten minutes. I'll meet you downstairs.”

“Fine. Command, comm off.”

He watched the mob and did not turn away from the window until the housebot announced it had laid out his formal cloak and suit. Jany was sitting in the middle of their bed, features controlled but for the tears that ran down her cheeks. Her voice when she spoke was barely audible. “Where are you going?”

“Pennsylvania. See some of Malko’s contacts.”

“Why?”

“They might help.” He pulled on the dress shirt and pants and waited while the lacings knotted themselves. “And they might not. You never know.” He pulled the coat on over the shirt and folded the cloak over his right arm.

Carl? Will you please talk to me?

Moran 165

He looked straight at her, at the tear-bright green eyes of the woman who was so nearly himself. He told her the truth. “I can’t think of anything to say. I'll be back fairly late. Don’t wait up.”

Youre hurting me, Carl.

“I know.” He left without looking back.

FIVE MEN HAD gathered in the conference room. They sat around a long, oval table of polished red mahogany; Malko and Carl to- gether midway down one of the long sides, and the other three arrayed across from them.

The three had been making casual conversation, while eating their dinners, when Carl and Malko arrived. It gave Carl a mo- ment to observe the two whom he did not know. F.X. Chandler nodded cordially to Carl and Malko as they seated themselves, but did not interrupt his conversation with Judge Rudolf Sonne- schein. The Unification Circuit Court judge was a middle-aged, corpulent man who was a likely candidate for an early heart prosthetic. The third man they were meeting was young, per- haps Carl’s age; a sharply dressed, pleasant seeming fellow named Douglass Ripper, Jr., who spoke vigorously, using his hands to gesture with. Carl had never heard of him, but he was apparently popular. The man was currently a United States Senator—largely a ceremonial position since the end of the War, and especially so these days, since the abolition of the House of Representatives—but he was announced as a candidate for the position of Unification Councilor for New York Metro in the 2064 elections. Jerril Carson had occupied the position virtually un- contested for over two decades; by the polls, Ripper appeared likely to win.

Judge Sonneschein finished his dinner first, and waved to a waitbot to take it away. “Not bad,” he said in a rusty Texan drawl, “for New York food. The steak was almost big enough.” He leaned back in his chair and clasped his hands over an ample belly. “What can we do for you, Carl?”

Carl said flatly, “Tm not sure. Pm here at Malko’s sugges- tion.”

166 Tales

Douglass Ripper leaned slightly forward. “Maybe I can speed things up. Mister Castanaveras, I audited your interview in the Electronic Times. Can you answer a couple of quick questions for me?”

“Yes.”

“You said in that interview that what you wanted was to be left alone. Is that still true? Would you be willing to settle for being ‘left alone’ at this point? Gerry McKann was murdered be- cause of you—Malko’s told us that you were friends,” Ripper hastened to assure Carl. “It’s not general knowledge, and it’s not clear even from the unedited transcript. Althea Casta-naveras is dead also. Will being left alone satisfy you, or has the situation gone past that point?”

The question seemed curiously without meaning; there was no anger left in Carl. “That would be acceptable.”

“Great. Were you responsible for that insane mess down in Brazil?”

“Of course not.”

Chandler said gravely, “Young man, I’ve seen the satellite re- cords of the battle that resulted in the destruction of Casa Sandoval. There was one normal man and one de Nostri in sev- eral of the recorded scenes. In another scene, just one, there was a series of eight frames where, from frame to frame, a human shape moved about five meters in each frame. That’s a Peace- forcer Elite, Carl. There’s nothing else in the world shaped like a human being that moves that fast.”

“Carl,” said Malko gently, “I gave the Judge the record of my interview with Sandoval.”

“Fine,” said Carl without looking at him. “Is there anything else I should know before we continue?”

“No,” said Malko after a moment, “no, there’s not.”

“Wonderful,” said Carl simply. “Gentlemen, I killed Tio Sandoval. I fried his nuts with a maser and then threw him out an airlock.” Douglass Ripper winced; the Judge and Chandler did not. “We have a recording, which you now have also, of Tio Sandoval admitting that he killed one of my children at the re- quest of Unification Councilor Carson. I’m sure ’Sieur Ripper

Moran 167

here would like to use that recording; itd practically guarantee him Carson’s current job.”

Ripper nodded. “I'll concede the point. I would like to use the recording. Unfortunately, J do not have it. You do, and the Judge does. I do not.”

“T think my question,” said Carl, “is, what do you three want? You damn well want something or Malko wouldn’t have dragged me out here.”

There was a moment’s silence.

“Your understanding of politics,” said F.X. Chandler, sipping at a glass full of some amber liquid—probably apple juice, Carl thought with irrelevant cynicism—“is less than wonderful, Carl. A brief—and I do mean brief—lesson. As the situation stands, the entire System thinks the PKF sent out one of their Elite to stomp Sandoval. Those of us in this room know that was not the case and so do the Peaceforcers. Chris Summers is alive, isn’t he?”

Carl smiled. “If he is, Sandoval might be too. They took the same drop.”

Chandler looked pensive. “Ive talked it over with my engi- neers. They've examined the satellite records—and if I can get my hands on them, so can a lot of other people—of that assault on Sandoval’s house. The thing in that one scene, the thing that took apart the waldo, was a PKF Elite or so near as makes no difference. My engineers, whose opinions I respect, swear that the only place in the Solar System that can do work like that is Peaceforcer Heaven, SpaceBase One at L-5. Q.E.D., the blur was a Peaceforcer Elite, the de Nostri was Jacqueline de Nostri, and the man was you. You and she and Chris Summers used to be called the Three Musketeers. Carl, if I can piece that together— and I’m not all that smart—so can a lot of other people.”

“So?”

“So, desertion from the PKF, aiding a deserter from the PKF, failing to report a deserter from the PKF, are all treason. Capi- tal offense, for you and Summers, wherever he is. Now that the PKF knows he’s alive, and they do, they’ll find him. And when they do, he’ll die, and you'll die. Carson may go to jail for his role

168 Tales

in your daughter’s death; he may not. Your evidence is tenuous and a lot of it won’t be admissible. The testimony of a telepath is, I believe, still not admissable in court except under fairly strict guidelines. In Carson’s case no judge in his right mind would allow one of your people to testify in an expert capacity. So, Carson won't die for it, and Amnier won’t even be touched. But Chris Summers’ existence will hang you.”

“Tm sorry, gentlemen,” said Carl quietly, “but Pm very tired and I’m not sure this is helping. What do you suggest we do?”

“The Ninth Amendment, or it will be if it passes,” said Doug- lass Ripper, “and it looks to pass, frankly; that Amendment will allow Secretary General Amnier to seek a fourth term in office, and a fifth, and a sixth. I don’t know if you appreciate how vul- nerable that makes him. He’d kill for another term in office, but most significantly, he’d also leave you alone for another term in office. Now, you can both hurt each other. He can damn well kill you if he sets his mind to it, but you can keep him from getting elected again. What he’s trying to do is very tricky, Carl. The last time somebody tried to pull this one was back over three decades ago, about the time you and I were being born. Secre- tary General Ténérat tried it; he was voted out of office and never even got to serve the legal third term, never mind a fourth, and his proposed Amendment was voted down over- whelmingly. “Now, there are two time elements for you to consider here. You could do Amnier a favor by arranging to have something important happening on the Fourth of July; that’s only three days from now, this Tuesday. He'll try to have something hap- pen anyway, to draw people’s attention away from the Fourth of July riots, but you're legitimate news. An announcement of a reconciliation between yourself and his office, buttressed by a press conference where you answer questions, might take a lot of the heat off him.

“The second date is July 14, Bastille Day. By that date, this all has to be settled, favorably or otherwise. He doesn’t want to go back to France for their independence celebrations with all of this hanging over his head. Right now, your telepaths are the

Moran 169

most important news story on the Boards. The French will not be happy if that’s still true come the fourteenth of next month.”

“When all of this is done,” said Chandler quietly, “and Bas- tille Day is past, you retreat to some location other than my old home, somewhere rural where the crowds can’t take the Bullet to come picket your front gate, and you lay low through the elec- tions of ’64. By then, things will have quieted down, and Amnier won't feel so bloody threatened. He'll be secure enough to leave you alone.”

Carl looked across the table at the three men facing him. “Which one of you has discussed this with him?”

There were advantages to being a telepath; one was gener- ally told the truth, on the assumption that a lie would be caught regardless. “I did,” said Judge Sonneschein after a moment. “I was simply exploring the options.”

Carl nodded. “I appreciate your time. Pll think about it. Malko? Shall we go?”

“Just a second there,” said Chandler. “I wanted to talk to you privately.”

“Go ahead,” said Carl, not moving.

Chandler stared at him for a second, and then grinned. “You go to hell too. How’s Jany?”

Carl blinked. The question actually surprised him. “Not well. She’s upset by the situation.” Or by me, he thought to himself, but the thought held no pain. “Fl tell her you asked about her. It will please her.”

Chandler nodded. Ripper and Judge Sonneschein, apparently aware that something significant was happening, sat and watched the exchange. “Tony Angelo tells me you're hell on wheels.”

Carl had half risen from his seat, preparing to leave. “I beg your pardon?”

Chandler said mildly, “Td say, ‘hell on fans,’ except it doesn’t have the right ring to it. That’s part of the problem with the modern world, you know. There’s something wrong with a world that doesn’t have any use for wheels except for designing space stations and bicycle tires.”

170 Tales

Carl stood straight. “You’ve lost me, I’m afraid.”

“Young man, you’ve been sitting there lying to every one of us, including yourself, ever since you sat down. How badly do you hate Amnier?”

There was a dead silence in the room. Carl opened his mouth to answer and found that there was no answer within him. “I don’t hate him, or Carson either. That’s the truth. But one of my children has died because of those bastards.”

Francis Xavier Chandler looked down into his drink and did not answer Carl immediately. When he looked up again his ex- pression was softer.

“Then make sure the rest of your children don’t.”

“Someday,” said Carl, explaining the only thing that was at all clear to him, “I have to kill them.”

Chandler said, “Yes. I know.”

“Revenge,” said Malko Kalharri gently, “does not have to come in a day.”

THEY DROVE BACK through darkness, in silence. They skimmed the highway at 180 kph, forty centimeters above the ferrocrete hardtop. Carl drove automatically, moving around what little traffic was still on the roads that late at night with minimal ef- fort. He paged TransCon once for permission to enter airspace and was turned down peremptorily. It did not bother him; had he flown back to the Complex he’d have reached it too soon to suit him. He was in the mood to drive, to relax and enjoy the smooth powered flight of the MetalSmith. It was drizzling slightly, and the canopy had turned on its electrostatic field to keep itself free of water.

They hit a clear stretch of road, and Carl leaned back in his seat and turned the carcomp loose. Malko Kalharri appeared to be asleep in the passenger’s seat, video tablet glowing in his lap; he spoke without opening his eyes. “You should probably try to get some sleep. You look like hell.”

“Tm not tired.”

“I’m tired,” said Malko irritably, “and I’ve had a lot more sleep than you've had of late.”

Moran 171

“Tm a bit younger than you are.”

Malko snorted. “Youre different than I am.”

“No.”

“Would I lie to you?”

Carl chuckled without amusement. “No, but only because it'd be a waste of time.”

Malko grinned. “True.” The grin faded, and after a moment he said, almost hesitantly, “You are different, you know.”

Three different replies occurred to Carl; what he finally said was, “I presume you mean in some way other than the totally obvious one.”

“I suppose sleep is a good example. When I was younger, I had white nights and functioned the next day. I could get by on two to three hours sleep per night for a week, a week and a half at a stretch. You, though—when you were about seventeen, you didn’t sleep one time for almost two weeks.”

It had been closer to three. “You knew about that?”

Malko shook his head. “Suzanne realized. Some of the staff wanted to sedate you and make you sleep. Suzanne figured you were entitled to turn your brain to mashed potatoes if you wanted to.” The old man was silent for a while, paging down through the display on his video tablet, skimming the top news stories. “The point of which is, if Pd done something like that as a young man, when I was in peak condition, it would have killed me. When you finally did sleep that time, you slept for most of a day, got up and didn’t sleep again for four or five days, some- thing like that. That was the point where Suzanne started moni- toring the sleep patterns of the other telepaths.”

“And she found out that I was the only one?”

“Indeed. Well, the only one who’s ever shown the capability. She thinks Jany could, under the correct impetus, and most likely the twins as well. None of the others.”

Carl was silent, watching the highway lamps flicker past them. Bright, and dim; bright, and dim— Tm not sure I really wanted to know that.”

“You didn’t know?”

Carl shook his head mutely.

172 Tales

“How could you not?”

The passing of the lights was soothing, almost hypnotic. “I’ve always felt alone. I’m not a human being. Jany thinks I stand off too much from the rest of the telepaths. They do a thing, Malko, a merging of minds, that I can’t join them in. I cant. Ive tried. I know there are other differences between us.” He brooded, lost in his own thoughts. “I try not to think about it.”

Malko Kalharri started to say something, and stopped.

“What?”

Malko said easily, “Nothing. Just a thought, not important.”

“Tell me.”

In a tone of mild exasperation, Malko said, “Carl, it wasn’t—’

“Tell me.”

Malko sighed. “You are a particularly difficult young man to mislead, Carl.”

“Malko.”

“Suzanne told me this perhaps two years ago; I didn’t know it myself before that. You were born in 2030, Carl. The DNA slic- ing technique that created you was not invented until almost five years later. It did not work reliably for nearly five years af- ter that.”

Carl worked his way through the sentence. “I don’t have even a vague understanding of whatever it is you just said.”

“I don’t think you know how you got your name, Carl.”

“Of course I do. Grigorio Castanaveras.”

“That’s not what I meant. The gene pattern that became you was our fifty-fifth attempt to produce a living foetus. Every bloody one of the first fifty-four failed. Didn’t redivide even once. We were labeling the attempts alphabetically; A through Z, then AA to AZ, BA to BZ, and so forth. You were lot C, number C, the fifty-fifth attempt. I don’t think,” said Malko, “that I ever really explained this to you. That’s how Jany was named also; lot J, number M. Johnny was lot Y, number M. We were spelling his name with a ‘Y’ for a while, before the host mother who bore him decided that she wanted his name spelled with a ‘J. ” He shrugged. “We didn’t argue; she was a good host. She later bore four of the children, one a year the full four years the assembly

Moran 173

line was rolling. Anyhow, if you didn’t know, that’s basically how the lot of you got your names.”

“Ever wonder why I named the twins David and Denice?”

“You...” Malko’s lips shaped the twins’ names, and then he laughed. “Ill be damned. I never noticed. You have a warped sense of humor, son.”

“Do tell. You still haven’t explained yourself.”

“Well, you were our fifty-fifth attempt at a living foetus. Carl, we didn’t get a living DNA-sliced foetus until Johnny, five- hundred odd tries later. And we never got one by the technique that created you. Did you ever wonder why Jany was created the way she was, with cloning techniques that were twenty years old?”

“I don’t think I ever did.”

“Because we still couldn't create a foetus through DNA slic- ing who would live.”

“But you had, already.”

“No,” said Malko Kalharri softly, “we didn’t. With the tech- nology that was available to us three decades ago, we could not have created you. Suzanne was right, her theory was sound, but we should never have succeeded in creating you, not in 2030. The technology to do so did not exist.”

“Then where the hell did I come from?”

“T don’t know,” Malko said simply.

“Malko, m here. Something was responsible for me.”

Malko did not reply.

“Malko.”

“You're right, son. But it wasn’t us.”

“TIl be damned.” Carl stared straight out through the canopy. Flickering red taillights were barely visible in the distance. With an act of will he thrust the subject of his own existence into the background. Not relevant, and even if Malko believed what he was saying it did not make him right. Belief, some old AI phi- losopher had said, is not relevant to truth.

And besides, it made him uncomfortable. Carl changed the subject abruptly. “How did you get mixed up with that lot?”

174 Tales

Malko stretched suddenly and laced his hands behind his head, looking up from his video tablet. “ ‘And now for something completely different...’ Politics, son. I find them—useful. I imag- ine their reasons for working with me are similar. Belinda Singer wasn’t there, but Ripper’s her protege. Between Belinda and ‘Sieur Chandler, we have the beginnings of an American power structure for the first time since the end of the War. That’s worth a lot.”

“Chandler prefers to be called Mister, not Sieur.”

Malko straightened slightly and peered out through the overarching canopy at the nondescript blur of buildings and fields that lined the TransCon’s sides. The gentle thrumming of the hoverfans competed with his words. “Hmm. I'd heard that.”

Carl was silent for a moment. “Never mind,” he said a mo- ment later, “your bloody damned obsession with the old United States. It wasn’t my country, and I have nothing against the Unification of Earth. The Unification was probably a good thing, on balance. Aside from their ideological bent, which is irrelevant to me, why should I work with the people we met with tonight?” Malko shook his head wearily. “Youre missing the point. Their ‘ideological bent’ is not irrelevant to you, and I’m not sure you know what their ideology is, anyway. Ripper’s hardly a Johnny Reb; he thinks the U.N. is a good idea. Which it may be.” Malko stared down at the empty video tablet. “Its existence is probably what’s kept us from having a noticeable sized war in four decades. But the fact that the U.N. is a good thing, assum- ing it is, does not mean that the fact that you are an American, culturally if in no other fashion, is irrelevant.” He slowed down suddenly. “Excuse me. I’m lecturing again, but do you have any idea how hard our lawyers fought to get the issue of our liability under the Official Secrets Acts tried in Judge Sonneschein’s court? Carl, two thirds of the Unification Circuit Court judges in this country are French. Ninety-eight percent of those in France are French. If you think ideology is irrelevant to you, you’d damn well better think again. Maybe you don’t think you’re an American, but Amnier does, and so do the Peaceforcers. You’re already allied to those people we just left. You think a French

Moran 175

judge would have ruled that we were not subject to the Official Secrets Act?”

“French judges have ruled in our favor in other instances.”

“True, when the law was clearly on our side. The Official Se- crets Acts are ambiguously written, though. If there’s ever a time for a judge to let his prejudices sway him, a case like that is it.”

“If I say yes, we'll cooperate, what then?”

Malko shrugged. “You don’t have to talk to Amnier, or Car- son either. Intermediaries will do that. We’ll record an an- nouncement saying we’re going to be resuming our old functions for the PKF, except we'll be paid, we'll give it to Electronic Times and NewsBoard early on the Fourth of July and sit back until the storm blows over.”

“Okay,” said Carl finally. “I told Chris Summers we’d come to Japan anyway.”

Malko looked at him. “Come again?”

A blip appeared on the radar screen, to the rear of the far limit at which the MetalSmith scanned. “I had to tell him some- thing, or he wouldn’t have helped us. Besides, Japan is pretty. I was there once. It’s green and there’s not too many people. The gardens are nice.”

“Japan.” It sounded as though Malko were considering the idea. “I’ve never been there myself. When I was a boy, they came pretty close to buying up most of this country. They were awfully damned formidable. ’m not surprised, really, that the U.N. forces panicked and nuked them when the Japanese decided to fight. God knows what they’d have had up their sleeves. It would have been interesting.” There was real wistfulness in his voice.

Carl glanced at the radar holo, not really seeing it. The blip inside it was gaining on them. “How the hell did you end up where you are? The Johnny Rebs would leap at the chance to fight under you. You know it and I know it and the government knows it. And you’ve never been tempted.”

Malko Kalharri was silent a long time, staring out the can- opy. “Son, I know the answer to that, but Pm not sure I know the words to say it right. You can read my mind if you like. War

176 Tales

and politics, Carl, those are the only games fit for grown men to play at. The only ones that make enough of a difference to count. And between laser cannon and nukes and transform viruses— these days we can’t afford war any longer.”

“No,” said Carl, “I don’t suppose we can—that’s odd.”

Malko leaned forward at the tone of his voice. “What?”

“The car behind us is gaining on us.” Carl moved a finger in- side the holofield and touched the dot representing the car. Numbers danced at the bottom of the display. “Look. They’re not plugged into TransCon, and they have their license caster turned off.”

“Speedfreaks?”

“Probably.” Carl turned on the rear holocams. A light- enhanced image showed what looked like an old Chandler 1770. “Why aren’t they skipping?”

“T don’t understand.”

“The 1770 is a little lighter than the MetalSmith, with simi- lar lift. Its not fitted for true flight, though, except in some heavily customized jobs. But they shouldn’t be able to move as fast as they are without skipping all over the place. They’re up around 230 kph. I couldn’t do that, and we’re heavier and have gyroscopes.” Carl watched the dot. “They must be carrying a hell of a load.”

The car behind them, already traveling above the maximum road speed for any hovercar Carl knew of, accelerated and passed 270 kph, still without instability.

“Something is wrong,” Carl heard himself say. He took the car back from TransCon and assumed manual control. Time struck him like a whip, wrapped itself around him, and things slowed. His vision became as clear as though it were high noon. The car behind him seemed to slow, and Carl saw the two men inside it, the huge laser cannon mounted down the center of the craft, and without desiring to, without effort, Carl found himself outside.

The future crashed down into the present.

Carl watched...

Moran 177

... the laser cannon strikes the rear of the MetalSmith, and the canopy goes dark black instantly, all over, in a desperate ef- fort to absorb and distribute the heat being pumped into it. In- side the MetalSmith, Carl is blind except for front instruments. He blows open the airscoops almost reflexively; he already knows he cannot outrun the modified 1770 on his tail, and in the time it would take him to reach flight speed where he can snap the MetalSmith’s wings, the cannon will have destroyed them. Only the fact that the 1770 cannot carry the mass of a full mili- tary power supply has saved them so far. The airscoops brake the car as though a giant hand has grabbed it, and Carl swings the car up and to the left at the same time, over the fence and into oncoming traffic. The canopy begins to clear, ever so slightly, and suddenly blackens again as the car behind follows the MetalSmith over the fence. From somewhere behind them— behind, Carl has the impression, the 1770 following them— comes a thunderous explosion, and the hovercar is rocked by a shock wave.

The interior of the MetalSmith is blisteringly hot.

In the seat next to him, Malko is beginning to realize that something is happening.

A huge twelve-fan appears from nowhere, and at the last in- stant Carl closes the airscoop brakes and ignites the rear turbo- jets, veers off to the right, up again and back over the fence onto the correct side of the highway. He knows a moment’s brief tri- umph as he realizes that the Chandler 1770 attacking them split to the left of the oncoming truck and that he has gained precious moments. It is a short lived triumph. He moves a finger across the contact that should kill the rear jets, and it does not. The roar of the turbos continues and he wastes a precious sec- ond evaluating his options.

At the end of that second the 1770 is back on his tail, and the laser fire strikes them again.

Carl Castanaveras has time to think, I have always wanted to try this.

He disengages the gyroscopes, snaps the car’s wings open and brings full power to the MetalSmith’s front fans. The nose of

178 Tales

the car leaps up, and the new attitude of the rear jets sends the MetalSmith climbing up like a rocket. The car is shaking wildly, the frame itself vibrating.

Gently, gently...bring the nose up too fast, and the car will tumble backward. Bring it up too slowly and the laser cannon will remove all of your options. The MetalSmith stands nearly on its tail, nose pointing to the sky, five meters above traffic. The fans face into the car’s forward movement, slowing the Met- alSmith in the quickest possible fashion. Their pursuers cannot decelerate so quickly. Carl cannot see with his eyes; some other sense causes him to nudge the car gently to the right, to send the turbojets blasting downward into the space beneath which their attackers are passing. The jets themselves are not destruc- tive but they push the modified Chandler 1770 down, into con- tact with the road itself. In seconds the 1770 ceases to be recognizable as a hovercar, shredding itself against the surface of the ferrocrete, disintegrating into a cloud of metal, still mov- ing forward as the pavement rips at it. The MetalSmith slows with astonishing speed, from 150 kph down to approximately 10 in the course of seconds. The car is vibrating insanely, roaring with the huge force with which it must push the air aside. When the MetalSmith stalls at last, it is moving less than 10 kph, and it strikes the pavement on its side and rolls over once before coming to a rest, slightly at a slant on a slope at the side of the highway. The rear jets are still burning. Somewhere in the course of it all, Malko Kalharri has struck his head, and blood mats his hair to his forehead. Carl sits without moving, staring blankly as the canopy fades and be- comes clear again. A high-pitched whining noise rouses him at last, an unfamiliar sound he cannot place. The word gyroscope occurs to him, and then he moves in a wild scramble, tearing off his seat restraints. The canopy is jammed shut, and the mechanism will not operate it. In a mo- ment of berserk strength he strikes upward with both hands, and the canopy pops clear, swinging smoothly out from the nose of the vehicle. The car is shuddering again as the gyroscopes be- gin to spin out of balance. He rips Malko’s restraints off the old

Moran 179

man, climbs over Malko and out of the car, and is lifting Malko out of his seat when the car shakes itself like a wounded beast, screams as its metal tears like paper, and picks itself up from the ground to tumble end over end as the gyroscopes spin down, wasting their accumulated kinetic energy in a single horrible second. The car turns its length three times before the remain- ing fuel in the fore and rear jets ignites. The explosion is modest; the jet fuel used in hovercars is intentionally not very flammable except inside the turbojet itself when mixed with pure oxygen and catalyst. Carl sits down on the dirt at the side of the road, and feels strange, very distant, and time slows as he sits there next to Malko Kalharri’s bleeding form, and Carl finds himself—

—sitting in the front seat of the MetalSmith with Malko, and the Chandler 1770 behind them, laser cannon at the ready.

He had just a moment after the vision ended to realize where and when he was.

And then it happened.

WITH A CRACK of thunder I came into existence standing at the side of TransContinental Highway Four. I was in fast time, en- during two seconds for every one that took place in real time.

Camber was not hunting me yet, on his private timeline; he was, at that moment in his existence, fleeing from me, believing correctly that I sought to destroy him. It would be many years in Camber Tremodian’s future before he would search for me in the laboratory where I had created Carl Castanaveras. He had not yet learned how to fully use his ability to move through Time; later, he would not fall for a gambit such as the one I offered him now.

I knew already that the gambit would fail, but it was neces- sary to go through with it regardless. When one travels Time, free will is often moot.

Camber Tremodian cracked into existence on the other side of the highway, some sixty meters away.

Carl Castanaveras’ vehicle came into sight, followed closely by the primitive vehicle that carried his attackers. Like Camber himself, they were doomed to failure; this was not the night for

180 Tales

Castanaveras to die. Cloaked and cowled in the traditional black shadow cloak favored by the night faces of United Earth Intelli- gence, Camber Tremodian withdrew a weapon whose name would mean nothing to a human being of any time earlier than the twenty-sixth century Gregorian. The Ihmaldsen Relay was named after a twenty-second-century physicist, the human be- ing who discovered the negrav nexus. Four centuries later the negative gravity locus was bound into a no-time stasis blade by a woman whose name is not spoken in the halls of UEI.

I am the Name Storyteller, and I tell you that her name was Ola, who was Lady Blue, who was Leiacan of Eastersea.

The IR is the most fearsome hand-held weapon known by any civilization, anywhere in the Continuing Time. During the height of the Time Wars, the Zaradin themselves knew no weapon so fierce. I withdrew the slim tube of my own IR from my cloak, and through the pressure of my hand upon the tube extended the force blade into the air over the highway. Carl’s car sped down the highway toward us. Camber Tre- modian perceived my presence and ignored it. He brought the blade of his IR scything down toward the aircar. Camber did not, yet, know of fast time, though control of that aspect of Time, like every other, was latent within him. He could not know that I would move better than twice as fast as he. I brought the blade of my own IR out to slap his aside, and the negrav nexus con- tained in the tip of his force blade touched down on the surface of the highway, behind the two primitive aircars.

The negrav nexus is a grave force to unleash. Where it touched the highway, the stonesteel of the highway erupted and splashed as though a meteor had struck there.

I have never known for certain; I believe some of that flying stonesteel struck Camber Tremodian and near killed him before he fled through Time. I was gone myself long before the shock wave reached the spot where I had appeared.

CARL SAT IN the hospital waiting room with a cup of cold coffee at his elbow. His eyes were wide open, but he saw nothing. There was not much to see; a room with pale green walls that

Moran 181

held a hundred chairs with video tablets chained to them, and a vending chef for those who wanted to eat in the waiting room. Jany sat in the chair next to him. She did not attempt to talk to him; she was reading what the press had to say about the at- tack. Both the Electronic Times and NewsBoard had logged ma- jor stories on it; the Times was giving it front screen treatment. AP had not yet filed on it; most of the other news Boards were licensing their reports from either the Times or NewsBoard.

Two heavily armed Security Services guards stood at the door to the waiting room with instructions to keep the press— and everyone else—out.

A little after midnight Suzanne Montignet made her way through the security guards and took a seat opposite Carl and Jany.

Jany said quietly, “So?”

Montignet shook her head in exhaustion. She was lovely enough that Carl had nearly made a pass at her more than once in the last decade; but she was nearly as old as Malko, and the strain of the evening had worn her down. “He’s in bad shape, kids. Oh, he’s going to live.” She smiled rather wearily. “He was awake for about five minutes before they took him into surgery. He’s a tough old guy. Said it was a ‘proven fact’ that you couldn’t hurt a Kalharri just by bashing him in the head.”

“What’s wrong with him?” asked Jany.

“Shattered femur in his right leg, cracked ribs, fairly severe concussion, slight subdural hematoma, not severe.” She looked at Carl. “He wanted to know, ‘Did we get the bastards?’ I had to admit I didn’t know. Did you?”

Carl’s lips curled of their own accord. “What do you think?”

The answer did not seem to please Suzanne. “I should have known.”

“When can he have visitors?”

Suzanne looked at Jany. “Early morning, five or six o’clock. He’s not suffering from anything serious except possibly the con- cussion, and I’m optimistic about that.” She turned to Carl. “I’m going to suggest that he come home with me when he’s ready.”

“To Massapequa Park? Why?”

182 Tales

Suzanne put a touch of the whip into her voice. “Because I’m one of the best neurologists in the world, and I want to observe Malko for the next few weeks. Your ability to read minds is al- most irrelevant in the context. Besides, I think Trent might like to have Malko for company. I believe I bore him.”

Carl thought about it. “Very well. If Malko agrees.”

Suzanne said very mildly, “If he did not, any decision we made would be quite moot.”

“Yes.”

Suzanne Montignet cocked her head to one side and regarded him. “You should go home and sleep. You don’t look good.”

He did not feel sleepy. “Perhaps.”

She smiled almost gently. “But youre not going to. What will you do?”

“Go for a walk in the city.” He shook his head. “I don’t know yet.” She seemed to be waiting for some further answer. “I really don't know. They hurt Malko. They blew up my car.” He was si- lent for a second, eyes unfocused. “I’m really pissed about that.”

CARL WALKED ALONE down windy streets made shiny with rain. That late at night, even the largest city on Earth grew quiet. Once the skies opened in a thundershower and he raised his face to the sky and let the wind-driven water pound down upon him. The water soaked his clothing, and rivulets ran down into his boots. He wandered aimlessly across the slidewalks and streets, and then ascended into the web of skywalks that linked the downtown spacescrapers. He passed the offices of Kalharri, Ltd. on Third Avenue, and continued on without going in. Two blocks later, on the level four skywalks, he was shot at from a point somewhere above him. He walked up a glowing spiral stairwell, two levels, and back down into a stairwell across from the sky- walk where the stairwell lights had been shot out. He dragged out the teenage boys hiding there and left their bodies in the center of the skywalk. He walked without hurry to Grand Cen- tral Station and took a powered lift, down eight stories to the Bullet station. He waited without thought until the Bullet ar- rived.

Moran 183

He boarded the southbound Bullet and changed connections at the Fulton Street station. Three men wearing dramasuit holo generators at their belts boarded the Bullet at that point; one of them looked directly at Carl without apparent recognition. Carl stayed on until they reached the Bullet station two stops from the Complex.

Something abnormal was happening at the Complex; Carl felt the echoes of power before he left the Bullet.

The station was not the one closest to the Complex; the clos- est station was only three blocks away. But there was a 24-hour Ford Systems car rental at this location; he rented a Regal lim- ousine and drove it home through the crowd. Security Systems was taking no chances with the crowd; they used the gate stun- ners liberally.

Carl walked through the echoing empty halls of the Complex, clothing still drenched by the rain. He stopped at some doorways and looked in upon sleeping children. Some of the children broadcast their dreams strongly, and at times the dreams took Carl and dragged him away from reality for a while. The dreams were all curiously similar, the dream of one Person, shared by many minds. Movement, wrapped in a golden light, wrapped in rainbows. He stopped by the bedroom he shared with Jany and looked in. Jany was back from the hospital and slept soundly, without dreaming. Carl suspected that it was an artificial sleep; Suzanne had probably given her something. He left her there and continued downstairs, making his way through the sleeping minds.

...he strode across a vast black plain, walking toward a huge fountain of light.

There was nothing in the kitchen or the huge dining room and nothing in the conference rooms. In one conference room, a copy of one of the children’s favorite flat movies, The Rocky Hor- ror Picture Show, had been left playing with the sound turned down. Carl recognized the scene—Riff Raff, Magenta and Little Nell doing the Time Warp again. Carl left the conference hall and wandered through the corridor that surrounded the ring of suites facing inward on the Quad.

184 Tales

He heard sounds from ahead, a gentle procession of piano chords, underlaid by a slow roll of drums. Light spilled into the corridor ahead of him through an open door.

He stood at the edge of the fountainhead, unable to reach out and touch it, staring into the fierce golden light, into the smooth, powerful dance of awareness.

The door to her room was open, and he came through into the bedroom. It was filled with the ordinary clutter any teenage girl would have accumulated, clothing and makeup keys and fashion templates. There was a poster of Willi dancing, and distantly, he was surprised by that; he hadn’t thought she liked Willi. The music surrounded him. One full wall was a painting done in electrolytes, of a long, winding road that stretched out across a bizarre, dark landscape over which hung a crawling silver fog. A verse in the corner of the painting read: “Running away to eter- nity/ Come walk my ways, it cried/ You left, left lesser things behind/ And a portion of you died.”

The fountain pulsed, whispered to him, Join me. I am that which loves you.

A man stood on the road, half turned away. He had Carl’s face. Carl turned his back on the painting, turned to meet what awaited him.

The huge glass door which opened on the Quad was wide open. Sunlamps glared down into the enclosed area, flooding it with a harsh pale light. The rain pelted down, and fragmented patches of rainbows shimmered, rippled through the hot wet air.

Heather danced naked in the rain.

Carl stood frozen, watching, unable to move. Sound washed over him, lyrically sad vocals nested between gentle drums and the rolling of the piano. The rain fell only centimeters away from him.

Lost boys and golden girls

Down on the corner and all around the world Lost boys and golden girls

Down on the corner and all around

All around the world

Moran 185

Time had wrapped itself around her like a chain. She moved across the grass, under the lights, dancing for him with wild abandon. There was no separate identity in her, only a living fu- sion of the girl and something else.

We gotta be fast

We were born out of time

Born out of time and alone

And we'll never be as young as we are right now Running away, and running for home

He stepped in still-wet clothing, out into the warm rain, un- der the brilliant hot lights. Heather’s dancing slowed, and stopped, and she regarded him. She smiled dazzlingly. “Yes.”

He drew to within centimeters of her and traced a finger down her cheek. “Yes,” he agreed.

She lifted herself up and locked her legs around his waist. Her mouth was busy at the juncture between his neck and his shoulder. He carried her into her bedroom and laid her down on the bed. He removed his shirt and pants without haste, and laid down beside her. Heather locked her mouth to his and wriggled her tongue between his teeth. She shivered violently, whether from the water cooling on her body or something else Car] did not know. He lifted her up and entered her. He saw himself through her eyes, felt the strength of his body as he moved against her. In her eyes he was a network of glowing fine lines, culminating in a fierce glow around his skull. He saw through her eyes his own eyes, the light and the elemen- tal heat of his person. He lost track of their bodies and found himself in some other disconnected reality, burning, consuming himself in the flame, and the other person with him cooled the flame, and brought order and peace into him. I am that which loves you.

“I know,” he said aloud, shuddering with his orgasm. The girl locked her legs tightly around him, clutched him with her arms. The orgasm went on and on, and he let himself grow lost in the

186 Tales

pure sensation. When he came back to himself Heather was still holding on to him, her body shaking silently, and it was several moments before he realized that she was crying, and that she was alone. He became aware of the chill in the air, and without moving her drew up one of the blankets from the bed and wrapped it around her to help keep her warm. I love you, she was telling him, I love you.

He grew soft and slipped out of her. Still she did not move, but tucked her head against his shoulder and clung to him. He held her and let her cry herself out, until she could not cry any longer.

The tears did not hurt him. They were not for him.

“Carl,” she whispered before sleep took her, “were going to die, aren’t we?”

“Yes.”

I LOOKED DOWN upon their sleeping forms.

Coming here, into this time, was a weakness. It was not nec- essary, and therefore wrong. It is an axion of nightways that there are only necessary actions and mistakes; no third ground.

A gamble and a mistake, all at once; but safe enough, in its way. Camber Tremodian would not look for me here. He knew as fact that I would, not far from now on my personal timeline, ap- pear at the Spacething Library, orbiting the great black hole at the center of the galaxy. It was inescapable: I had been there and would be there, and he would be waiting. I would survive this visit so that I could enter the Library early in the thirty- second-century Gregorian, and there, very likely, die.

It is difficult to see.

I am not certain what it is that has driven me to come here, to look upon Carl and Heather Castanaveras.

Perhaps because he will die so well, so usefully.

So soon.

If there was inspiration there, it was not for me to find.

I slipped out into the garden, and went to face my destiny, and left them to face theirs.

I vanished in a clap of rushing air.

Moran 187

10.

SUNDAY MORNING the crowds outside the Complex had grown to number nearly ten thousand. They filled the streets in a solid mass of humanity for blocks around the Complex, and their chanting was so loud there was no place in all the Complex where silence could be found. Sometime during the night, as July the second dawned, their chanting had changed from a ragged “Death to the genies!” to a deep throated “AMERICA, AMERICA, AMERICA.” Security Services, without being asked, had dispatched an additional squad to the Complex, a full twenty-five men. Nearly a score of the children played in the park. Johnny and Ary and Mandy and Thea stood guard with autoshots against the unlikely event that any of the demonstrators would be fool- ish enough to attempt to come up over the fence. There were no Security Services forces within the park; with the defenses they had in place, Carl had deemed it unnecessary. Though the crowd could not see through the fence that surrounded the park, there were so many of them that they had surrounded the block the park sat upon, arms linked, chanting. The chanting was stretch- ing Johnny’s nerves tight; he was amazed at how calmly the children took it all. They were all, except Carl, in some measure one Person; but the children were far more so than any of the elders except Ary and possibly Willi. The children had spent nine months listening to the chanting, and even today’s redou- bled intensity did not seem to disturb them. The weather con- tinued to be a bad joke; an inversion layer had trapped the warm moist air of the last week, preventing the rains from granting them any relief. And still, the children were in evident good spirits despite the demonstrators, the gray skies and drenching humidity.

Unlike Johnny.

He distracted himself by sitting in on Jany, at work inside the Complex. She was giving interview after interview with,

188 Tales

only momentary breaks, to any newsdancer who cared to wait his turn. Carl was in the office next to her, doing the same thing; Johnny knew better than to attempt to read Carl’s mind. So far this morning the telepaths had released both the recording of Carl’s conversation with Jerril Carson and the Secretary Gen- eral, and their recording of Tio Sandoval’s last words before his death. It had been several days now since the Electronic Times had received, from a Player who called himself Ralf the Wise and Powerful, confirmation that some of the demonstrators in front of the Complex had indeed been Peaceforcers on duty, from the New York City contingent that was, in fact if not in theory, under the direct control of Unification Councilor Jerril Carson.

Malko Kalharri had given an interview to a reporter from NewsBoard early that morning. From his hospital bed, which had gone over well.

AMNIER SAT motionless behind his desk.

Seated facing him, across the flat expanse of polished wood, Charles Eddore appeared quite calm. “The calls for your im- peachment are not serious, yet. Nonetheless, the vote of censure in the Unification Council is almost certain to pass. Pd cease worrying about the Ninth Amendment if I were you, sir. You will not be reelected.”

Amnier spoke precisely. “You are quite correct. Have you found Carson?”

“No. His office is not answering calls. I think the Councilor has decided that you plan to throw him to the wolves. In his po- sition,” said Eddore thoughtfully, “I think Pd blast my own head off before Castanaveras found me.”

“Do you think that is what Carson will do?”

“No,” said Eddore. “I don’t.”

“The Elite know where he is.”

Eddore nodded. “Yes. But they’ve practically made an honor- ary Frenchman of Carson, you know. They won't tell you where he is.” He paused. “Unless, of course, he does kill himself.”

Amnier sat perfectly still behind his desk, staring off into a nonexistent distance.

Moran 189

He appeared to be thinking about something.

Without asking his leave, Charles Eddore got up and left the Secretary General alone with his thoughts. A faint smile graced his lips.

RATHER TO HIS surprise, Johnny found himself yawning. What a bitch of a week, he thought to himself. It’s got to get better soon. The autoshot was very heavy, so he laid it down beside him and then sat down, propping himself up against a tree. Fine, he thought cheerfully, this is just fine. He could survey the children he was guarding and get some well-deserved relaxation at the same time. He would just close his eyes for a moment, and relax just a bit. Just before he closed his eyes, he noticed many of the others in the park doing the same thing. A fine idea that was, also. None of them had been getting enough rest... He slept.

THE AEROSMITH dropped down through the clouds, straight and fast, and came to land in the center of the park with a thump.

IN THE MIDDLE of an interview with a reporter from Paris Match, Carl broke off. His eyes went blank. Something is missing. What was it? Something that had been there, only moments—

His scream echoed through the Complex.

THE PEACEFORCERS were not in uniform, and the AeroSmith was not marked as a PKF vehicle.

Jerril Carson walked among them, through the park where the telepaths lay in sleep. “There, take that one, that’s MacAr- thur,” he said grimly, pointing, “and those two as well.” The Peaceforcers lifted the telepaths indicated and began carrying them to the AeroSmith.

Jerril Carson stopped in mid-stride and stared in disbelief.

And then he smiled.

“No,” he said, “cancel that. We’d only have to keep the others drugged.” He stood over the two small, dark-haired forms. “And besides, I rather think that Castanaveras will find the loss of

190 Tales

these two—compelling.” The Peaceforcers with him were stand- ing, watching him, and he snapped, “Take them!”

The Peaceforcers with him looked at each other, and then did as instructed.

The AeroSmith lifted into the air, with the twins inside.

Seconds after it lifted from the ground, Carl burst from the tunnel entrance, Excalibur in hand. He saw the lifting AeroS- mith and brought the laser to bear on it.

He held that position, knuckles white where they gripped the rifle—and then slowly brought the rifle back down. A crash at that height would kill the twins. His eyes dropped shut, and he reached out toward the dwindling vehicle, but there were too many minds within it and he could not distinguish the one mind that he sought.

He stood without moving until the others from the Complex came pouring through the tunnel entrance, and then without word turned and went back to the Complex, there to finish, in thirty seconds, his interview with the reporter from Paris Match.

“CRUTCHES,” MAKLO SNORTED. “I feel fine.” The hospital walk- ways did not themselves move, in the interests of safety; despite his complaint, Malko moved with the crutches nearly as quickly as he’d have been able to had he walked. They'd tried to outfit him with a ground chair such as visiting loonies used; at that point he’d rebelled. With things as uncertain as they were right now, he was damned if he was going to let himself get caught sitting down, out in public, where he would lose a crucial instant getting out of the chair if he had to move quickly.

At his side, Suzanne Montignet chuckled without much hu- mor. Her features were drawn and pale with lack of sleep. “With the pain suppressants in your bloodstream right now, you could be stretched out on a rack and you'd have a good time.”

Her car was waiting for them at the exit to the hospital downlot, hovering forty centimeters above the rain-damp pave- ment. A Security Services squad car was right behind it. The carcomp lowered the hovercar to the ground at their approach

Moran 191

and slowed down the fans to prevent the fanwash from spraying water at them as they got into the car.

Trent was sitting in the back seat, portaterm on his lap. He looked up from the holo the portaterm was generating as they got in. He spoke without preamble. “According to Paris Match the twins have been kidnapped.”

“What?” Malko and Suzanne both snapped the word at him.

“There’s not really any more to the story than that. They ran on for two minutes but that was all they said.”

“When?” Suzanne beat Malko to the word by an instant.

“Twelve minutes ago. Thirteen.”

Suzanne Montignet did not hesitate. She turned to Malko. “How do you feel? Truly?”

Kalharri was leaning back in his seat, eyes closed in a pain that was not physical. He did not have enough energy for true rage. “Ill be okay.”

“We'll go to the Complex, then,” Suzanne decided. “Trent? I can have Security Services take you back to the house.”

“That won't be necessary.”

She did not question him. “Let’s go.”

THE CROWDS WERE uglier than Malko had ever seen them; hun- dreds of them had been stunned already when Suzanne Mon- tignet’s car pulled onto the street where the Complex was located, and Double-S sent out a pair of riot control sleds with mounted stunguns to clear a path for them through the crowd to the Complex’s front gate. The crowd surged around them, nearly out of control, trampling those who were stunned in an effort to get at Suzanne’s car. They had arrived just after a shipment of weapons from Security Services; autoshots were being distrib- uted among the men from Security Services, and even the chil- dren were being given Excaliburs Series Two. Those with the size to handle an autoshot, who requested one, were given that as well. Heather Castanaveras, wearing a jumpsuit of what looked to Malko suspiciously like the laser-resistant cloth used in combat fatigues, with a hand maser tucked into a pocket and an autoshot resting on her right shoulder, took them up to see

192 Tales

Carl. She said nothing to either Suzanne or Malko; she ushered them into the ready room down the hall from Carl’s bedroom, where Carl and Jany and Johann were meeting with two officers from Security Services.

As she had not spoken to Malko or Suzanne, Heather said nothing to Trent. But she hugged him fiercely, and turned away from him and left them. It was not until later that Trent real- ized she had said good-bye as best she knew how.

Carl stood with his back to the door through which they en- tered. The door at the north end of the room, which led directly to Carl’s bedroom, was open. He was watching the monitors which covered the crowds outside the front gate; he did not seem to be aware of their presence until he said, “It looks like you got here just in time.”

One of the Security Services men, named, Malko thought, Deavers, was nodding. Captain’s bars glowed on Deaver’s uni- form. “Yes. Look, on monitors five and nine as well. Peaceforcer troops.” The Peaceforcers were taking up positions at the pe- rimeters of the crowd, and seemed to be content to stay there, for the moment.

“T wonder if they’d have let you through,” Carl said. Still he had not turned to look at them, nor greeted them. “Somehow,” he said in an expressionless voice, “I don’t think they’re here to protect us from the riot outside.”

“Hello, Carl,” said Malko softly.

Carl pivoted slowly to face them. Malko Kalharri winced and looked away. Suzanne Montignet had not made the mistake of attempting to meet his gaze.

Trent looked straight at him. “Hello, Father.”

Carl said gravely, as to an equal, “Hello, Trent. You should not have come. Now that you are here, you should not stay.”

Trent looked around the room. “I didn’t drive,” he offered as an explanation to them all. “It’s not my fault.”

The answer seemed to throw Carl. For the first time in a great long while, the ghost of a smile touched him. “Suzanne,” he said, “go home. Take Malko and Trent and go home. I expect

Moran 193

the Peaceforcers surrounding us will let you leave. Don’t come back until this is over.”

“Carl? Are you crazy?” Malko dropped one of his crutches to the floor and leaned on the other. “One hand to handle the crutch, and the other one to fire a weapon with, if it comes to that.”

Carl said too gently, “Malko, go. There’s nothing you can do here. And right now...” He found it hard to say. “You'll just get in the way.”

For the first time in the decades Suzanne had known Malko he looked old. But there was fight left in him. “Carl,” he said, “you can make me leave, but you’re not doing me any damn fa- vors by—”

“I'm not trying to do you any favors!” Carl roared. Jany and Johann and the two Security Services men looked away from the scene. Malko blinked, and Carl said flatly, “Suzanne and Trent are going to need you. I know youd love to go out in a goddam blaze of glory, but that’s a luxury you're fucking well going to have to miss. Stop being selfish, damn it. Go home.”

Malko Kalharri swayed on his single crutch. The blood had drained from his face and out of a dry mouth he said finally, “Okay.”

Carl held his gaze, and then nodded. “Pll see that Double-S escorts you past the crowd. It’s better this way, Malko.” He turned to Trent. “Good-bye, Trent.”

The boy’s eyes widened slightly. “Oh?” He looked away for a moment, expressionlessly, and then looked back and said po- litely, “Good-bye, Father.”

Carl started to say something; the outspeaker interrupted him: “Councilor Carson is on the line for Carl.”

The holo appeared over the ready room’s largest table, and the image of Unification Councilor Jerril Carson appeared within the field.

TRENT WAS ONLY distantly aware of the others around him. The systerm in the corner came up under his flying hands. He wished that he had not left his portaterm in the car, but there

194 Tales

was no time to regret its lack. His traceset was in his shirt pocket, but he had no time to don that, either. He had stripped his user profile out of the machines in the Complex. At the time it had seemed a good idea. The accesses he had developed for that user profile would have been useless in the hands of an amateur, and terribly dangerous in the hands of a Player only slightly skilled. And he had not been planning to return.

He hacked his way through the default user profile until it would do the bare minimum he required of it, turned autohelp off, turned prompts off, enabled abbreviated command syntax, and loaded the profile into memory.

Trent danced through the InfoNet.

CARL STOOD STARING in a rage so vast it left no room in him for speech. Jerril Carson stared out of the holocube at them, his skin a pallid gray. When it became clear that Carl was not going to speak, he said in a shaking voice, “I have the twins.” Carl said nothing, and emboldened, Jerril Carson continued. “You have caused me severe problems, Carl.” His voice gained firmness and certainty as he spoke. “If you wish to see your children alive, ever again, you will do as you are told.”

Carl closed his eyes.

Jerril Carson jerked and went rigid. He and Carl held the tableau for several seconds, and then Carl’s eyes opened again, and Carson jerked like a puppet whose strings had been re- leased. He gasped for air. “Fool,” he snarled in a harsh voice, still panting. “You think I’ve known you...this long...without learning anything? There are...hundreds of minds all around me, and thousands more in the distance between us. You can’t touch

”

me.

AT SUZANNE MONTIGNET’S home in Massapequa Park, the sys- term rang once and answered an incoming call.

In the bedroom where Trent had been sleeping, jacked into the house circuitry, was a device about the size of a makeup key. There was more processing power packed into its molecular cir- cuitry than was to be found in the entire world in the year 2000.

Moran 195

It was a biochip Image coprocessor, one of the finest commer- cially available anywhere in the System.

Touched, roused, and the program assembled itself from storage, assumed a sort of shadowy dim self-awareness, and then Ralf, the Wise and Powerful, sought through the InfoNet for its master.

THE FEAR WAS past; a vindictive enjoyment was evident in Car- son’s demeanor. “—and state that you falsified Sandoval’s re- cording, that it was a complete fake.”

Jany answered him. Carl sat next to her, glaring into the holocams. For a while that had, it seemed, disconcerted Carson, but no more. “How do you suggest we do that?” Her features were pale but her voice was steady. “The point behind the truth plate was that it made the recording believable. You can’t fake a truth plate recording.”

“You simply assert that you can,” said Carson. “It will be be- lieved.”

“What then?”

“You'll further announce that not only were the Peaceforcers not responsible for the kidnapping of your children, but that we in fact recovered your children from the kidnappers, and that as a token of your gratitude you’ve agreed to renew your service with the PKF. You admit you’ve seen the selfishness of your previous position, and that you see that your skills are needed in the service of the Unification. You'll repeat yourself, loud and often.”

Jany nodded. “They won’t believe that. Not for an instant.”

“They?” asked Carson with a note of flat, cold viciousness in his voice. “The media? The courts?” He smiled again, a horrible smile that literally made Jany feel sick to her stomach. “Or the public?”

Jany had no answer.

“The public will believe,” said Jerril Carson.

TRENT’S IMAGE CAME up and surrounded him. Power and vision surged through him.

196 Tales

The filters he had spent years designing cut out the sheer vast bulk of irrelevant detail that flowed through the Informa- tion Network. With the tracers built into Ralf, Trent flickered across the thousands of optic fibers that serviced the Complex and localized the fiber that fed into the office where Jerril Car- son’s image glowed in midair. The glassite line was graded-index optic fiber, not true lasercable; he could not send a signal back through it in the opposite direction. No matter; localization algo- rithms mapped out the path of the central trunk that fed data from the InfoNet into the signal splitters inside the Complex.

The main trunk linking the Complex with the Information Network was true lasercable; Trent sent Ralf into the optic fiber, down the line following the digital pulses that contained Unifi- cation Councilor Carson’s image.

A HOLOGRAPH FLICKERED into existence, immediately behind Jer- ril Carson’s image.

It held a map of Manhattan.

Jany’s eyes did not move. All that Carson could see was the space before the holocams, and the map was not within that range. Carl did not seem to have noticed its existence; he con- tinued to glare at Carson’s image.

“When do we get the twins back?” Jany asked.

On the map behind Carson the image was zooming in on the eastern shore of Manhattan, where Franklin D. Roosevelt island bisected the East River.

Carson said, “That is an excellent question.”

His image vanished. Behind the spot where his holograph had appeared, the map froze solid.

“Where is he?” asked Carl.

Trent twisted in his chair. His features were perfectly still. ‘Tm sorry. I didn’t get it.”

Carl rose slowly. “How close?”

“Somewhere around the intersection of Second Avenue and East 72nd Street.” Trent hesitated. “Within five blocks in any direction, I think.”

“Are you sure?”

Moran 197

“No ”

F.X. CHANDLER had spent most of the day auditing the news Boards and the situation developing at his old home. He had ex- cellent access to information; among the several hundred spyeyes above the Complex were three that belonged to him. Now he looked at Carl Castanaveras’ image, floating in the cen- ter of his living room, a kilometer and a half above the surface of Manhattan. “What can I do for you, son?”

Chandler could hear chanting, somewhere in the background, when Carl spoke. “I need help. Jerril Carson is somewhere within five blocks of the intersection of Second Avenue and 72nd Street, and he has my children. I don’t know exactly where he is, though, and I need to.”

Chandler was slow in replying. “How certain are you about this information?”

“Frank, I need help. I’m surrounded by Peaceforcers; even if I made it past the riot outside I don’t think Fd make it past the Peaceforcers, or I’d go myself.”

Chandler did not reply immediately.

“Frank, please. These are my children.”

The desperation in Castanaveras’ voice decided Chandler. “Very well. I'll see what I can do.”

Carl said simply, “Thank you. Thank you very much.”

THEY WAITED. Jany and Suzanne talked in low tones in a corner; about what, Carl had no idea. He paced back and forth across the ready room’s floor, mind disengaged. He simply did not think, about anything.

The hours passed. Chandler did not call. Trent and Malko were asleep in the bedroom next door; Carl had closed the door to the bedroom to give them some small measure of quiet. Cap- tain Deavers had left to inspect the positions the Security Ser- vices guards were covering.

Johnny left and went somewhere else late in the afternoon. Carl did not know where he had gone, nor was he sure just when Johnny had left. Later he noticed that Andy was there, sitting in

198 Tales

one of the chairs scattered through the room. Andy was watch- ing him in silence.

Night had fallen when the Peaceforcers outside asked for an audience with Carl.

THE DOORS SLID aside, and Carl came face to face with a small mountain of a Peaceforcer Elite, with another Peaceforcer be- hind him, both of them in full formal black and silver uniform.

Mohammed Vance said with grave politeness, “I beg your pardon, M. Castanaveras. I have been dispatched to aid in con- trolling the unruly crowds. I am at your service.”

Carl stared at the man. Carson’s creature, here.

Trent appeared in the doorway to Carl’s bedroom, and stood there silently.

“How dare you come here?”

Andy’s thoughts struck him forcefully. Carl! He doesn’ re- member us.

Vance raised an eyebrow. “I am not sure I understand you, sir. I am here because I have been ordered here.”

“Where are my children?” Without waiting for an answer Carl’s eyes flickered shut, and he went inside the large man’s mind, and found that Mohammed Vance truly did not know where the children were, and did not know where Jerril Carson was.

The stiff Elite features were almost incapable of expression. Vance managed a fair approximation of polite surprise. “I am sure I do not know, sir.” He appeared to consider something. “If your reputation is to be believed, you will know that I have been dispatched here to control the crowds outside this building. That is my purpose here. May I aid you?”

Trent was staring at Mohammed Vance’s profile.

Carl stood motionlessly. His hands shook. All his restraint was barely enough to prevent him from killing the man where he stood. His voice was ragged. “No.” He stopped. “I mean, yes. We have three guests here who need safe passage so that they may go home.”

Vance nodded. “Will there be anything else?”

Moran 199

The premonition struck Carl like a blow. His skin tingled as though an electric current ran over it. Trent was still staring at Mohammed Vance. Without using Trent’s name, Carl said, “Son, go get Malko. You're going to leave soon. Do it now.” He kept his eyes locked to Mohammed Vance’s, and the Peaceforcer Elite met his gaze, and did not look aside, and did not see Trent turn away and go back inside Carl’s bedroom.

“You can go now.”

Vance inclined his head. “As you wish. I shall instigate meas- ures to clear the streets.”

“You do that. Get out and stay out. Go.”

Vance went.

PEACEFORCER TROOPS drove riot sleds up to the Complex’s front gate, moving the crowd aside slowly but surely. Suzanne’s car hovered quietly with Security Services vehicles flanking it just the other side of the gates, until the Peaceforcers had forced their way through the massed humanity. Rain fell gently as the car passed through the gate, and was followed by the Security Services riot sleds to the outskirts of the crowd. There the Secu- rity Services vehicles turned back, and Suzanne Montignet drove her car to the Peaceforcer perimeter. The Peaceforcers were letting those who chose to, leave; they were not allowing anyone to enter the enclosed perimeter. A PKF Elite came up to the driver’s window; Suzanne dilated the window at his approach. The cyborg was not Mohammed Vance; he leaned over and looked inside the vehicle, eyes sweep- ing across the interior of the car. His gaze took in Malko Kal- harri, with an autoshot in his lap, Suzanne in the driver’s seat, and Trent in back, and he nodded. “Drive safely,” he said po- litely, and waved them through.

The car sped away, carrying its three passengers away from the Chandler Complex, never to return.

Behind them the cyborg clicked open a radio channel within himself. Com- mander Breilleune.

| am here.

200 Tales

The car has left the Complex. It is traveling north along Westway Street. Kal- harri is armed with an autoshot.

Very good.

The Peaceforcer hesitated. Sir, | am uncomfortable, to act so without in- forming Sergeant Vance.

A brief silence. | understand, and your loyalty is commendable. But you must realize, what Vance knows, the telepaths will know also.

| know this, sir.

Be strong. All will be resolved, and shortly.

MOHAMMED VANCE SAT in a PKF vehicle at the north end of the street and observed the movement of the crowd in the gentle rain, gaudy with dramasuits and holosigns. It was irrelevant that the PKF had helped engineer the crowds; they were now near rioting, and his orders, however incomprehensible, were at this point to protect the telepaths from the crowd.

He had been given three PKF Elite, and approximately a score of normal Peaceforcers, with which to work. The number was suspiciously small; Vance had the grim feeling that he was intentionally being placed in an untenable position. If Security Services, with more than fifty men inside the Complex, could not control the crowds, how was he expected to? The behavior was not what he had come to expect of Commander Breillune, but it was very nearly the only explanation that made sense of the data he had at his disposal.

When the idea occurred to him, he did not smile. He would not have smiled even if it had not been such a difficult thing for his face to do.

One way or another, he would carry out his assigned orders.

He called from his car. He had to go through three levels of her subordinates before he reached the office of Marianne Gra- vat, the woman who was the director of the Bureau of Weather Control.

“Mohammed,” she said warmly, “how are you?”

“Quite well, thank you,” he said politely. “And yourself?”

He listened for several minutes to her description of her cur- rent circumstances, and her troubles with her eldest daughter’s

Moran 201

suitors. When the moment was appropriate, he described his own problems and suggested his solution. “Can you arrange some bad weather?”

Gravat looked disturbed. Vance could imagine her thoughts; what he asked was difficult and considerably contrary to Weather Bureau regulations. But it had been done before, in France and elsewhere, and Mohammed Vance was the eldest son of what was certainly the most prominent and politically powerful Arab family in all of France. She answered reluctantly. “T think so.”

“T need a storm, fairly vigorous. Something that will convince most of the demonstrators outside the Complex to get out of the streets. They are in my way right now; I cannot move in to con- trol the situation until we get most of them out of here. A severe thundershower is a wonderful tool for crowd control.”

“When do you need it?”

“Before morning.”

“We'll need the use of military lasers to trigger a storm that quickly.”

Vance did not even hesitate. Space Force would not argue with the orders of a Peaceforcer Elite of his standing, not in so trivial a matter as arranging the loan of military lasers for use by the Weather Bureau. “You shall have it.”

THEY WERE AT the intersection of Westway Street and Unifica- tion Boulevard, where the New Holland Tunnel led out under the Hudson River, when the two AeroSmiths came down out of the sky and settled to the ground flanking them.

Malko Kalharri left his crutch behind and with autoshot in hand dove out through the passenger door while the hovercar was still moving. His right leg shrieked agony at him, but he forced it to bear his weight. The nearer AeroSmith was still set- ting to the pavement when he reached it, and thrust the barrel of the autoshot up against the front of the canopy and held the trigger down while the canopy shattered inward and the shot- gun blasts tore the interior of the vehicle to shreds.

202 Tales

From the other AeroSmith, on the other side of Suzanne’s car, a Peaceforcer Elite burst from the opening canopy. Laser light pierced Malko’s right shoulder from behind, and he turned away from the ruins of the first AeroSmith, finger still holding down the trigger of the autoshot. Blood sprayed away from the moving blur of the PKF Elite, but the wound was not mortal and the cyborg did not slow.

Malko Kalharri barely had time to recognize his death when the laser buried in the cyborg’s fist swept across his face.

THE PERSON SAT alone, in a quiet place, and considered. Its thoughts were dim, only half-conscious, as though it were not intimately concerned with the subjects it pondered. It was threatened, and its existence might be terminated if it did not respond.

Where did correct behavior lie?

The Person was not certain.

It did not wish to hurt.

But it would not allow itself to be ended.

THEY WERE TAKEN to a Peaceforcer station only a few blocks away. Suzanne Montignet was handcuffed, and two grim PKF Elite escorted her and the boy past an admittance desk, to an empty, harshly lit holding cell with nothing in it but a pair of benches. Suzanne seemed stunned by Malko’s death; she did not say a word during the procedure.

Trent they did not handcuff. They searched both Trent and Suzanne and took away the items they found upon them. They did not find the traceset Trent had hidden in his shoes. It was a trick he had learned from a book about Harry Houdini. Its suc- cess did not surprise him, and he was too shaken to be pleased by anything. After a time, a Peaceforcer Elite whom Trent had never seen before entered the holding cell. Elite Commander Breilleune stood silently just inside the door to the room, study- ing Suzanne Montignet. He did not even glance at Trent. When he spoke, he did so in English, enunciating the words with clear disdain. “Assault upon the person of a Peaceforcer Elite is an act

Moran 203

of treason,” he said at length. “I suspect the courts of the Unifi- cation will allow us to prosecute the perpetrator’s companion for assisting in the crime. The crime is one punishable by death, Doctor.” He regarded her a moment longer. “There will, I think, be little sympathy for a Frenchwoman who has made so very plain her disdain for all things French.” He left without further word. A Peaceforcer stayed with them, just inside the cell door.

Thoughts percolated slowly through Suzanne Montignet’s mind. She knew Breilleune by reputation and did not doubt he meant to do exactly what he said.

She could not afford to stand trial for treason. She would be brain-drained before the trial, and too many people who had far too much to lose would be compromised by her testimony. Malko Kalharri, the notorious Colonel Kalharri of the Sons of Liberty, had never been a member of the Johnny Rebs.

But she had.

She did not allow the train of thought to continue; she knew what she must do.

On the bench facing hers, Trent sat looking at her.

Suzanne Montignet took a shuddering breath. “Trent—”

She got only the boy’s name out. The Peaceforcer snapped, “You will not speak.”

Suzanne looked at Trent with mute pleading. The boy simply shook his head no. “I can’t hear you.”

The Peaceforcer took one step and struck Trent in the side of the face. The blow knocked Trent from his seat. “You will not speak,” the Peaceforcer repeated without apparent anger.

Suzanne Montignet tensed a group of muscles at the back of her neck. A relay touching the bone at the base of her skull closed with a click that was audible to her through bone induc- tion.

Speaking three words now, in the correct order, would deto- nate the capsule inside her skull.

Trent climbed back to his feet and sat down again on the bench. Blood trickled from a cut on his cheek where the Peace- forcer’s blow had landed.

204 Tales

The old woman closed her eyes. It would be easier to say the words, now that Malko was gone; surprisingly more easy. She tried to remember if she had ever told Malko she loved him, and could not. She hoped she had.

She did not want to have to look at Trent again. Without opening her eyes Suzanne Montignet said aloud, “God bless America.”

Silent light flared behind her closed eyelids, and then there was nothing.

THEY WAITED IN the ready room, watching the monitors that showed the approaches to the Complex from all directions.

On the monitor that showed the scene at the gate, from the north, a dot appeared at the edge of the monitor’s resolution. Captain Deavers’ first guess was that it was another of the damned spyeyes. The guess was wrong; as the item grew closer it changed from a featureless blur to an old Ford Systems VTL aircraft. Captain Deavers called up to the roof to warn of a pos- sible attack from above. In moments it was apparent that that was not a danger; the craft was dropping far too quickly. “What the hell—’ The Security Services man broke off in mid-sentence as realization struck him. “It’s a kamikaze.”

SITTING IN THE warmth of the Peaceforcer vehicle, Mohammed Vance watched the wind come up. Already the wind was fierce, and becoming more so with every moment. The Weather Bureau told him that the rain would arrive sometime around midnight, which should be soon enough.

A droning sound overrode the noise of the wind. Twisting his head, he turned and saw the approaching aircraft through his side window. He was still trying to decide what to do when the vehicle struck the Complex’s front gate and, in a shower of sparks, brought down the gate and forty meters of the fence all at the same time.

The crowd surged forward, to the Complex.

Laser fire reached out from the Complex to cut them down.

Moran 205

HEATHER CAME BACK to herself slowly. The Excalibur laser in her hands was burning hot. The rain, where it touched the stock, sizzled. She was lying flat on her stomach on the wet front lawn, just outside the main entrance to the Complex. There were—six, six of the other children out there with her, and Willi, over at the far end of the line. They were the only ones who had been close enough to the front entrance to get outside in time when the gate went down. None of them appeared to be hurt; the bod- ies of the rioters were piled by the hundreds across the front lawn. The nearest were only twenty meters away from the en- trance. They had screamed only briefly, most of them; then Se- curity Services had gotten the gate stunners working again and turned them inward. Double-S had lost men during the rush at the front gate; Captain Deavers was out there now, picking among the dead to find those in the gray Security Services uni- forms.

Outside the standing fences, the rioters fled in a panic, tram- pling the dead and wounded in their haste to get away. From inside the Complex, from windows on both the first and second floors, withering laser fire struck into their massed ranks.

From the front gate came a squad of Peaceforcers in combat armor. They came on foot, moving without haste, but stopping for nothing. At their fore was a large man who could have been no one but Mohammed Vance. Willi rose to meet them and block their way, flanked by six armed children between the ages of eleven and fourteen.

Vance had to raise his voice to be heard; the wind was fierce. “Let us pass. I must speak to M. Castanaveras.”

Willi faced him without flinching, long hair plastered to his skull by the rain. “I believe you were invited to stay away from here.”

Vance paused. He made a restraining motion to the Peace- forcers behind him. “I have received instructions to evacuate the Complex. Vehicles will be arriving shortly to remove your people to a safer location. I must speak to your...elder, to arrange this.”

Willi shook his head. “Not a chance.” He made a motion as though to gesture with the laser he carried, and the Peaceforcer

206 Tales

standing immediately behind Mohammed Vance lifted the barrel of his autoshot and touched the firing stud.

Vance had time to think to himself, stupid, stupid, stupid, and several things happened all at once. Willi ceased to exist, disintegrating in a shower of flesh and blood and bone. Scatter- shot touched Heather Castanaveras and without even an ex- pression of surprise she brought her laser sweeping up to slice in half the Peaceforcer who had killed Willi. Vance found himself moving sideways without conscious thought as the battle com- puter at the base of his skull took over and sent him rolling across the lawn, the laser in his fist flickering out to touch one after another of the telepath children. Heather Castanaveras died first, in a wash of laser fire. The children were standing motionlessly, lasers up, firing at the remaining Peaceforcers with so profound a lack of any human hesitation that Vance was terrified by the sight. He was moving far too fast; none of them even came close to bringing a laser to bear on him before he had come to his feet again.

Perhaps two seconds had passed. All of his squad were dead, and all of the children who had faced them.

Telepaths looked at him, out of the windows on the first and second floors, and without pause for thought Vance wheeled and ran at speeds that only a Peaceforcer Elite could reach, ran di- rectly away from the Complex and its terrible inhuman occu- pants.

STANDING AT THE window of his bedroom, looking down at the front gate, Carl carefully attempted to track the zigzagging blur that was Mohammed Vance. He was leading the blur by perhaps five meters, and then something deep inside him said, Now, and his finger touched the stud on the Excalibur. Invisible X-laser struck down in front of Mohammed Vance, directly in the mov- ing blur’s path.

PAIN. It had been hurt; portions of itself had been taken from it, had been ended.

Moran 207

Had been killed.

The pain cleared away the dimness, and held up the world in a bright harsh light for its examination.

The world was found to be unsatisfactory, and would be changed.

With a cry of anger, the Person who was the first of its kind to exist in all of Time raised itself up and in its wrath struck back at the world that had hurt it.

A WAVE OF VERTIGO rolled over Carl. He staggered and fell and lay like a man paralyzed, twitching and unable to move. His Ex- calibur fell just out of reach at the edge of his vision. The huge voice thundered down at him, Join me; JOIN ME. Distantly he was aware of the growth of the great power, as mind after mind was brought into its fold. A vast golden light washed over him, and the voice obliterated his senses and filled the universe: JOIN ME.

All that Carl could think of was the fact that yet another of the murderers was getting away.

My children!

The wave swept over him, crested, and faded like water into a parched desert. The voice whispered, Join me, and then was no more. He lay on the floor, without strength, unable to move. The world was incredibly black, empty. Hands touched him, raised him up from the ground. He was laid on the bed, and a painfully familiar and different voice said softly, “Rest. You will need rest.”

With an effort he opened his eyes and saw that the person who bent over him was Jany.

And was not. The Person who had chosen to speak through her contained Jany McConnell, but was not her. Her voice was oddly without inflection. “You have been left outside,” the Per- son said. “I am sorry.” It rose and walked from the room, and left Carl alone on the bed.

Carl wept.

208 Tales

IT WAS QUIET in the room where Trent was being held. He had no idea what was happening outside; after removing Suzanne Mon- tignet’s body the Peaceforcers had seemed to forget about him. Several hours passed without anyone coming to see him, and at length he judged that it was as safe as it was going to get.

He took off his shoes and removed his traceset. The throat mike was in his left shoe, and the trodes for his temples were in the right.

They stank of his feet. Trent barely noticed; he licked the trodes and stuck them to his temples. He clipped the throat mike to the collar of his shirt. He had no input device but the throat mike; it would have to do. He closed his eyes, folded his legs into full lotus, and concentrated on the biofeedback tech- niques that let him perceive the traceset’s extremely faint neu- ral induction currents as a flow of information. The world widened away from him—

Trent whispered, “On. Up.”

The traceset ran a check for access frequencies in use in the Peaceforcer station. It found dozens, and Trent cautiously lis- tened in upon sequentially higher access frequencies until he found one that was not in use. “Out.”

The traceset broadcast his logon identifier, and through the traceset’s limited bandwidth the Information Network flooded in upon Trent.

“Access 102808-SMON.”

The command snaked out through the mass of lasercable and routers and Boards that comprised the Information Network, and in a small home in exurban Massapequa Park, Ralf the Wise and Powerful flared into existence and came pouring into Trent’s traceset.

You are held by the Peaceforcers, Ralf observed.

“Yes,” whispered Trent. “Free me.”

Ralf went away and returned full seconds later. | can disable power to the station. Will this suffice?

“If you open the door to the cell first.”

| cannot do that. The door is controlled by a computer system running Maxtor- Briggs security software. It is sophisticated.

Moran 209

“AK-Princeton decryption routines.”

There was another silence. They do not succeed, and the security sys- tem is alerted to my presence.

Trent bowed his head. “Damn.” He opened his eyes, stared sightlessly at the empty white walls of his holding cell. “Find the Eldest. Find Ring.”

And once it is found? It has always fled us before.

Trent brought his thoughts into order. “Tell it the following: that I am Trent Castanaveras, an American, and I am held by the Peaceforcers, who are French. Tell it that I require its aid. Use that word: require.”

| shall.

Ralf was gone.

Trent sat silently and waited, to see whether a guess he had made about a program that had escaped its hardware during the Unification War turned out to be true.

THE SYSTERM said, “There is a call for Carl Castanaveras.”

Carl sat up at the side of his bed; he had never felt so tired. He did not see his Excalibur anywhere. “Accept.”

The fierce, aged features took shape in the air before Carl. For a strange moment his eyes insisted on interpreting the face as belonging to Malko Kalharri; but that was not possible, he thought groggily, because Malko was dead.

The thought was strange, and he repeated aloud, almost quizzically, “Malko is dead.” How do I know that?

F.X. Chandler raised an eyebrow. “So? I’m sorry to hear that, Carl. Not surprised—I’ve had my spyeyes up over the Com- plex—but sorry. I’ve found your children.”

The universe whirled around Carl, and then stabilized. “Oh, God. Thank you.” Chandler was not sure whom Carl was speak- ing to. “Where?”

Chandler was silent, regarding Carl. “I’m almost not sure I should tell you,” he said after a moment, “after what your people have done. Do you realize how many people you've killed?”

Carl shook his head. “What are you talking about? Where are my children?”

210 Tales

“210 East 76th street. Theyre almost certainly being held somewhere in the Eastgate Hotel, at that address; Peaceforcers in uniform have been seen there. Carl, theyre going to destroy you for this, don’t you know that?”

“Command, comm off.” Carl rose on unsteady legs, and was preparing to leave when something outside his window caught his eyes. He went to the window and looked out.

Desolation stretched away from him. Hundreds upon hun- dreds of the dead lay prone on the lawns as the rain lashed down on the Chandler Complex. The stunners had worn off, and nobody had bothered to reapply them. Through a trick of the wind it was almost silent for the first seconds he stood there, looking out, and then the screams of the wounded rose up to meet him.

In the distance, to the north, the city was burning. Carl sim- ply stood and looked out in plain disbelief; the rain was so strong, the fires must be astonishingly fierce, simply to avoid be- ing put out.

ON THE EIGHTH floor of the Eastgate Hotel, Jerril Carson sat qui- etly in a large room, and in a huge holofield watched the News- Board coverage of the carnage at the Chandler Complex. The nightmares had run through the city like a plague, touching off insanity and rioting where they passed. He had been forced to sedate two of the Peaceforcers whom he had brought with him to guard the twins, leaving him only four guards. He had deployed them as best he could, one at the ground entrance, one on the roof, and the other two along the hallway leading to his room. He was slightly concerned about the mental stability of all four Peaceforcers, but there was nothing he could do about it.

The nightmares had hardly bothered him. They were only a faint, impersonal echo of what Carl Castanaveras had already done to him once.

He sat and watched in the holofield as the Peaceforcers massed at the edge of the Complex.

Moran 211

THERE WERE twenty-two of them; all of the Elite who could be summoned on such short notice. They stood silently in the rain, outside the range of the laser weapons the telepaths possessed. Vance stood by as they were distributed repeater mortars that were to an autoshot what an autoshot was to a handgun. The mortars were so heavy that a normal man could not have lifted one, much less use it in battle. Two Peaceforcers so armed could reduce a building of normal materials to rubble within minutes.

The Chandler Complex, made of supertwisted sheet monocrystal, would be another matter. The mortars would not damage it structurally.

Its inhabitants should prove less hardy.

Vance finished giving them their orders and, staying back himself at the secure point, watched as the other Elite slipped off into the windy night to assault the Chandler Complex, still glowing white under the streetlamps.

The rage lifted itself up out of the Complex in what seemed to Mohammed Vance a visible fountain, and came breaking down upon the advancing Elite. The Elite, advancing at a trot that was the equivalent of a normal man’s dead run, seemed to fold as though a great hand had struck them down. Elite and mortars alike struck the wet ferrocrete and slid and tumbled for tens of meters before coming to a stop. Mohammed Vance watched the disaster unfold before his eyes. The PKF Elite lay in the wet streets, unmoving. He had nearly two hundred normal Peaceforcers in the area surround- ing the Complex whom he could bring in, but there was no rea- son to believe they would fare any better against the telepaths. He had six waldos at his command, and they seemed far and away his best tool at this point; to the best of his knowledge the telepaths could not affect them.

But six was not enough.

Mohammed Vance beckoned with one hand, and his aide trotted up to within speaking distance. “Dispatch the waldos,” said Vance almost thoughtfully, “to retrieve our fallen. We will stay until this is done, and then retreat half a kilometer north.”

212 Tales

The aide began to say something, and Vance cut him off with steel in his voice. “You will also contact Space Force for me.”

The aide stared at him for a moment, and then saluted stiffly. “Yes, Sergeant.”

JANY WALKED down to the garage with him.

Except that it was not her. Carl found it difficult to look at her, and after the first moments did not try. She had brought him an autoshot with a full magazine, and a fully charged Ex- calibur Series Two. At first the Person to whom Carl was speak- ing had not understood his intent. An attempt to leave the Complex through the garage would surely fail; the Peaceforcers would simply shoot him down. The slow opening of the garage doors would give them ample warning.

“Tm not leaving through the front entrance,” said Carl. They ran down a flight of stairs to the basement level garage, where Andy’s new Lamborghini was parked. “I’m going to take it out through the tunnel, into the park.”

The Person shook Jany’s head. “It will not work,” it said. At first it had spoken to Carl silently, but it had seen that this pained Carl, and it ceased. “The car is too wide. It will not fit.”

“Not on level it won't,” said Carl. “I’m not going to fly it level.”

Jany McConnell’s right eyebrow raised. “I see. Are you cer- tain this will work?”

Carl cracked the canopy of the Lamborghini and settled him- self in behind the driver’s panel. “I am not certain.” He brought the fans up to speed and ignited the rear jets. “Stand back,” he said without looking at what was left of her. “The jets get hot.”

“T shall.” The fans hummed loudly, and he almost missed her final words, in a voice quite different from that in which she had been speaking. “Be careful, baby.”

Carl yanked the canopy closed savagely and brought the hovercar around without replying. He accelerated away from the entrance to the tunnel, brought the car up in a slow rise until he reached the far wall, and banked in a long gentle curve. He was nearly at the ceiling when his rise ceased, and he completed the

Moran 213

turn and dropped back down toward the floor, gaining speed as he fell, nearing eighty kilometers an hour when he reached the entrance to the tunnel.

At the last possible instant he brought the three fans on the car’s left side up to their highest speed. The car lurched upward into a diagonal slant and sped down the length of the tunnel. It struck the stairs leading up into the park with a sharp crack, and Carl fed full power to the rear turbojets. For a moment the Lamborghini hung on the stairs, seemingly jammed in place, and then it shuddered wildly and tore itself free, straight up the stairs, through the park trees and into the night sky.

THE VOICE WAS still and pure, uninflected, the voice of an AI who did not care, or did not see the need, to emulate the intonations of a human being’s vocal apparatus. It had done something to prevent Ralf from reaching him; Trent was unable find any hint of Ralfs presence across the traceset.

| am Ring.

“My name is Trent. Can you help me?”

How would you be helped?

“I am being held by the Peaceforcers. Can you open the door to my cell?”

Yes. Should |?

“Please.”

| am told that you require this action of me.

Trent felt the sweat trickling down his neck. He was either correct, or he was not. “I do.”

You know who | am?

“I think so.”

Very good. | shall do as you ask; the Boards report that Malko Kalharri was killed tonight.

“And Suzanne Montignet.”

That has not been reported. If true, it is a grievous blow for America. | shall aid you, but | require a promise.

“What?”

You shall agree to aid me, when | need it of you.

“How? When?”

| do not know. Do you agree?

214 Tales

“T don’t think I have any choice.”

None.

“You'll just take my word for it?”

Despite its words there was no irony in the AI’s voice; it was simply a statement of fact. | don’t think | have any choice. Now wait; | shall work on the door to your cell. There are 3.5 x 10 to the eighth possible combina- tions the lock to your door might accept. It will take some time to try them all. Please abide. CARL TOOK THE Lamborghini out over the East River, and flew north. TransCon paged him once; he was violating airspace that had been reserved for emergency Peaceforcer flights. He in- structed the car’s portaterm to refuse calls and flew through the night sky in a majestic silence, broken only by the sounds of wind and rain. From the air the city looked even worse than he had imagined; whatever the Person had done to cause this must have been terrible. He was glad he had not been conscious when it happened. Fires blazed in perhaps one building in ten, and the streets below were full of surging masses of humans. Wrecked vehicles were at nearly every intersection.

The lights were off over much of the city.

On a projected sheet of flat monovideo, a map of Manhattan glowed, with the Lamborghini’s progress projected as a bright dot moving north. When the glowing dot came parallel to East 76th Street Carl banked in a slow glide and killed the car’s run- ning lights. In the black night he brought the car slowly in from the river, high above the traffic on 76th Street, and finally brought the Lamborghini to a halt, fans roaring with the effort to keep it hovering motionlessly in the powerful wind, without ground effect, two hundred meters out and forty meters above the Eastgate Hotel’s roof. He hung in space, watching the roof. After several minutes had passed a shape detached itself from the shadows and moved cautiously to the roofs edge and looked down.

One on the roof; there would be at least one, then, at the slidewalk entrance, and perhaps more.

Moran 215

Carl cut the fans. The Lamborghini dropped in a steep glide, wings at their fullest extension, and he guided the vehicle down in a deadly silent rush and with the front fender struck the Peaceforcer in the back at 150 kph. The Peaceforcer fell from the roof in two different pieces. Carl brought the fans back up and took the Lamborghini around in a tight bank. He landed gently atop the roof, cracked the canopy and, carrying both the auto- shot and Series Two Excalibur, descended into the Eastgate Ho- tel.

MOHAMMED VANCE found himself speaking to a Space Force Colonel. The disparity in their ranks was great; and yet, without surprise, Vance found that the Colonel deferred to him.

“I want a tactical thermonuclear strike on the Complex,” he said flatly. “I shall take full responsibility for the action; clear it with Commander Breilleune if you must. How long will it take you to arrange such a strike?”

The Space Force Colonel said, “How quickly can your men be safely outside of the blast radius?”

“Not quite five minutes.”

The Colonel shrugged. “Five minutes, then.”

Mohammed Vance sighed. They had never expected him to succeed. “How long have you been in position?”

The Colonel seemed suddenly cautious, but answered, “Since this morning, Elite Sergeant.”

Vance nodded. In his deep voice he sounded particularly grim. “Perform the strike.”

AT THE EASTGATE hotel in mid-Manhattan, two French Peace- forcers in black patrol fatigues held vigil, deployed at opposite ends of an otherwise empty lobby. The junior officer, Maurice Charbonneau, sat in one corner on the hotel’s carpeted floor, autoshot covering the entrance to the hotel. Outside, on the op- posite side of the street, he could see a pair of wrecked cars, burning in the fierce rain. A car came down out of the sky as he watched, blossoming into flames as it struck an apartment com-

216 Tales

plex across the way. The shock wave of the explosion rattled the long glassite panels that faced the street.

Maurice sat and watched Nils Logrissen walk up and down before the entrance to the hotel. Logrissen, a terrorist of the Eri- sian Claw, was the only man Charbonneau had ever killed. Oc- casionally Logrissen’s body stumbled and then jerked back up again like a marionette on strings. Logrissen’s bulging, dead- man’s eyes were fixed on Maurice, never left him except once; when the car struck the building across the street, Logrissen turned and watched the accident for a while.

Charbonneau was grateful for the respite. He was trying to pretend that everything that had happened in the last few hours was part of some particularly unpleasant sensable he had made the mistake of playing. (A sensable where you're the star, the voice whispered. Right.) It hadn’t worked yet, but perhaps that was because he wasn’t trying hard enough.

Charbonneau was deathly afraid that Logrissen was getting up his nerve to come inside, and if that happened Charbonneau was not certain what he would do.

At the other end of the lobby Charbonneau’s superior officer, Peace Keeping Force Sergeant Georges D’Argentan, paced rest- lessly back and forth in front of the maglev lifts, chain smoking, his multifrequency combat laser held loosely in one hand. With every few steps he left the carpet and crossed onto the tile area immediately before the maglev. It was the only sound in the echoing emptiness of the lobby: the clicking of the boots, followed by silence, followed by boots, followed by silence. The rhythm of it had grown so comforting, so predictable, that Charbonneau was startled when it ceased. He glanced over at Sergeant D’Argentan, saw the older Peaceforcer standing motionless, fin- ger touching a point immediately below his right ear.

D’Argentan stood still while listening in on the command channel. Finally he shook himself slightly, resumed his pacing. Maurice.

Charbonneau was not certain that the voice in his head was real; his father, dead these fifteen years, had been talking to him for the last hour, ever since the Castanaveras telepaths had

Moran 217

struck out at the world around them, at the United Nations Peace Keeping Force that was trying to destroy them. After a moment Charbonneau touched his own earphone. Sergeant? Is that you?

There was a moment’s silence before D’Argentan spoke, and Charbonneau could guess at his thoughts. Councilor Carson had actually ordered that Maurice be sedated; D’Argentan had ig- nored him, and now he was rethinking the wisdom of the deci- sion. Yes, it’s me. Your father is dead, Maurice. So is Logrissen. They have been for a long time.

Charbonneau knew better than to argue with Sergeant D’Argentan. He was sane enough to know that he was quite mad at the moment. Charbonneau re- membered burying his father, remembered killing Logrissen more clearly yet. Yes, Sergeant. I'll try to remember that.

I've just been told that Space Force is ready. Secretary General Amnier has approved Elite Sergeant Vance’s request; Vance is going to order a thermonuclear strike on the Chandler Complex.

Charbonneau was silent a moment. So they're dead, then. All the telepaths are trapped inside the Complex.

Across the length of the hotel lobby, D’Argentan nodded. So they say.

Charbonneau clutched his autoshot more tightly. Except for the two Carson's got upstairs.

Just children, said D’Argentan sharply. They don’t have the power yet. Only the adults do, and the adults are soon dead.

Yes, Sergeant.

At that moment, thirty-five floors above them, Carl Cas- tanaveras had just finished killing the Peaceforcer guard sta- tioned on the hotel’s roof. At the moment that Maurice Charbonneau turned back to continue his observation of Nils Logrissen, the oldest and deadliest telepath on Earth was riding down in the maglev to Unification Councilor Jerril Carson’s room, to the eighth floor; autoshot in one hand, Series Two Ex- calibur laser rifle in the other.

Coming for his children.

| HAVE FOUND the access code, Ring announced.

218 Tales

Trent came to his feet. His mouth was very dry. He had no idea what he would do when the door slid aside. “Open it.”

A moment, child. Wait.

Instants later, the walls of Trent’s cell shook. “What was that?”

A diversion to aid in your escape.

“What was it?”

| seized control of a hovercab from TransCon and crashed the cab through a wall of the Peaceforcer station; the side furthest from your cell.

“Oh, no.” The horror upon him was palpable. “Were they— did you kill them? In the cab?”

The cab was empty, child. | do not kill without reason. Relief washed through Trent, and Ring continued, Several Peaceforcers were slain when the vehicle struck, however.

“Why?”

It seemed prudent, Trent. As a further diversion. Abide a moment longer; | shall open the door shortly.

DENICE CASTANAVERAS had ceased crying only a few minutes ago. They were not tears of fear, but of anger. She had passed into a place beyond fear, into a rage so vast and elemental it bore only a passing resemblance to any emotion she had ever experienced before.

She was nine years old and she was going to kill Jerril Car- son if given an opportunity.

She sat on the floor with her twin: two black-haired Cauca- sian children with pale skin and green eyes. Both she and David had their hands snakechained behind their backs, with tape covering their mouths. Her feet were free, as were David’s; they could have stood if allowed. A few hours prior David had made the mistake of trying. A bruise on the side of his face was slowly turning purple; Councilor Carson had knocked David back down to the floor without even looking at him.

She sat with her rage, not thinking. She did not understand how the situation she was in had come to pass; did not compre- hend the details of the conflict between Carson and her father, how it had come to be that the personal animosity between Car-

Moran 219

son and her father had grown into a conflict that had, this night, pitted the Castanaveras telepaths against the armed might of the Unification.

Denice did not understand, and did not care.

She sat and thought about killing him.

Councilor Carson clutched an autoshot in his right hand; he hardly paid attention to the twins. Denice watched him, sitting in front of a huge holofield that showed an image of their home, of the Chandler Complex. He had turned off the audio; except for the whistling sound of the wind and the drum of the rain it was silent inside the hotel room. The image of the Chandler Complex vanished suddenly, was replaced with a split field; the Chandler Complex in one half of the field, a shot from the hotel’s security holocams in the other. The security holocams showed the long stretch of corridor out- side, and the two Peaceforcers who guarded it. One of the Peace- forcers stood in front of a bank of elevators, covering the entrance with an autoshot; the other lay on his stomach at one end of the corridor, covering his partner with a variable laser.

After the long silence the sound of the Peaceforcer’s voice rang shockingly loud. “We’ve lost contact with the roof.”

Carson stood with startling abruptness, turned and glared wildly at the twins. Denice met his eyes for a long moment and returned the glare: I’m going to kill you. The Gift had not touched her yet, and Carson was as deaf to thought as any nor- mal human; still he froze for a second under the sheer physical impact of her rage. He shook himself visibly then and crossed the distance between them in two strides, pulled the twins to their feet and turned them to face the door. He stood behind them holding the autoshot with his right hand, holding their snaked hands behind them with his left. Where his hand gripped her Denice could feel Carson shaking.

The holofield moved with Carson, came to hover in front of them, a meter off to the right so that Carson’s view of the door was not obscured.

For a very long time nothing happened. Twenty seconds. Thirty.

220 Tales

In the holofield, Denice watched the maglev doors curl open.

NO STAIRWAY LED down from the roof; Carl took the lift. He punched for the eighth floor. This close he could feel Carson, the fear and hatred pulsing bright and sharp and near, drowning out everything else.

The hotel was thirty-five stories high; it took the lift several seconds to drop down to the eighth floor. Carl lay belly-down on the floor of the lift and waited until the doors opened. The Peaceforcer was simply standing there, as he had expected, autoshot leveled to cover the lift at waist height. Carl shot him with a single burst from the Series Two; the Peaceforcer stiff- ened, ionization corona crackling around him; the black uniform he wore burst into flames and he fell. The stench of burnt meat filled the hallway. With his left hand Carl extended his autoshot out through the elevator door and fired twice to the left. He was flipping the autoshot over to fire to his right when the wash of maser flame struck the hand. The hand and most of his forearm cooked instantly. He grabbed the autoshot with his right hand and pumped two quick shots down the right-hand passage. The lift doors tried to close on him; still on his belly he lunged for- ward out of the lift and fired again at the crumpled form on the hallway floor fifteen meters away. The man’s body twitched slightly when the shotgun blast struck it, but did not move oth- erwise.

Carl stood slowly. The pain from his arm was astonishing, and he staggered, rising.

So much for surprise. He hoped Jerril Carson did not have many more guards for him to deal with.

Frontal assault was all he could think of that was left to him; his mind was not functioning well enough to offer him any other option. The poisons from the dead meat his arm had become were already slowing the rest of his body. He walked carefully, almost casually down the hallway, to the double doorway where the second Peaceforcer had been standing.

He dropped his autoshot and switched the Series Two over to X-laser. The twins were inside; he could feel them vaguely

Moran 221

through the malignant haze of Jerril Carson’s mind. He did not want to use a weapon that might result in injuring one of them accidentally.

He stood just to the side of the doorway. If somebody shot through the door, he did not intend to be standing in front of it. He was not certain what he was waiting for, and finally the thought occurred to him: Open the door.

He had not intended to do anything of the sort; he had not thought he was angry enough. He simply looked at the door.

The door exploded inward.

THE DOOR SLID aside with a beep.

Trent stood at the doorway, only listening for the moment. Far away he heard a hysterical babble of voices, French and English. A loud voice yelled in French, “What are they doing?”

He took a step into the corridor and looked both ways. A group of adults milled about off to his left; none of them looked toward him. To his right the admittance desk was empty. He turned and walked calmly past the admittance desk, looking neither right nor left. He walked past an office whose door was open; a Peaceforcer in full uniform was in a conference with a pair of un-uniformed men. They did not look at him.

A voice behind him stopped him dead. “Boy!”

Trent did not even consider running. He turned and faced one of the two men in civilian clothing whom he had just passed. “Yes?” The corridor was not very bright; Trent hoped there was not yet a bruise where the Peaceforcer had struck him.

“What are you doing in here?”

Trent stumbled intentionally, as though he were embar- rassed. “I—I’m looking for the bathroom, sir.”

“How did you get into this area?” The Peaceforcer looked down at Trent with a perturbed expression.

Trent’s mind raced like an engine with the load removed. “The door was open, sir?”

The Peaceforcer stared at Trent a moment longer and then swore under his breath. “Come on.” He strode down a pair of corridors Trent had not known were there, muttering to himself,

222 Tales

“No wonder the damn city’s burning, we can’t even keep little boys out of Operations,” and brought Trent at last to a door no different from any other in the long hallway. He placed his palm on the pad at the side of the door and ushered Trent through. He pointed out into a wide bright lobby. “Over there, public rest- rooms. The waiting rooms are back the other way. You here with your parents?”

“Yes, sir,” said Trent instantly.

“Don’t get lost again,” the Peaceforcer said, almost gently. “This isn’t a good night to be out wandering around.” He turned and was gone. A few of the people in the lobby looked up at Trent with some curiosity, but Trent ignored them and walked without haste to the building’s entrance, through the wide glas- site doors, and out onto the street, into the rain.

He crossed the block without haste, turned a corner, and ran for his life.

THERE WAS A brightness behind Mohammed Vance. He sat in the passenger seat of the PKF hovercar, and did not look back.

HALFWAY ACROSS the world, an ex-Peaceforcer named Chris Summers watched a holograph. In the holograph the bright mushroom cloud climbed into the black, cloud-filled skies over New York City, and he covered his face with his hands so that he would not have to see any more.

THE PERSON barely had time to realize that it was being ended.

—the images flowed through its mind in stately procession. The Person was dead already, time had simply not caught up with reality. It continued to fight, sent the nightmares screaming after its attackers, both rioters and the Peaceforcers who had been sent, not to defend it from the rioters, but to destroy it. The future cascaded through the filter of the present as the fireball ate away at it and diminished it into nothingness. The children were alive, the children would be safe, David and Denice, and the boy, Trent, in whom destiny ran so very strong—

Moran 223

The fireball climbed toward the sky, and in the flames noth- ing lived.

THE DOOR exploded open:

At that instant a flash of bright light appeared in the holofield Carson had been watching, lit the hotel room in unreal colors.

Carl appeared in the doorway, a grinning bloody apparition with emerald eyes—and hesitated at the sight of his children standing before Carson as a living shield.

In the holofield that had moments before shown an image of the Chandler Complex, a mushroom cloud was climbing into the night sky over lower Manhattan.

Carson’s autoshot blast took Carl square in the chest and lifted him off his feet and slammed him backward out into the corridor. He knew that he had only one shot and he used it cor- rectly. He fired one-handed, in mid-air, the beam of light from his Series II Excalibur slicing through the tiny space between Denice and her brother, reaching past them to touch Unification Councilor Carson. Carson’s skull came apart and Carl struck the corridor wall hard. He slumped, sliding down to the floor, leav- ing a long trail of blood on the wall. Next to her Denice saw David on the ground, bringing his bound hands under his feet and around to the front. David ripped the tape off his mouth, and in a voice rusty with disuse said, “Turn around.” Denice knew what was coming; she felt Carson’s dead hand being placed up against her wrists, the life- less thumb being pushed against the snakechain until the snakechain recognized it and released her. The sudden freedom of movement sent spasms of pain through her shoulders. She worked the tape free from her mouth with hands grown numb from lack of circulation.

Their father’s thoughts touched them both. David, get the la- sers.

Her twin vanished down the corridor, came back holding the laser with which their father had been shot.

224 Tales

Sitting in the corridor, Carl knew that he was dying, that he was nearly dead. But this last thing they had to do correctly, or it was all for nothing. He forced himself to release the laser, and it dropped to the floor. Take it, Denice.

Denice bent, scooped the laser up off the floor quickly, before her nerve could fail her. Her father’s thoughts were faint, unlike anything she had ever felt from him before. Fading. Listen. There’s a Peaceforcer downstairs, maybe two, and I cant kill them, so you have to.

David nodded. “We will, Father.”

They'll hesitate when they see you. They'll hesitate before they'll shoot children.

Denice was aware of the tears tracking down her cheeks, but her voice was steady. “We won't hesitate, Daddy.”

Carl sagged back against the wall of the corridor. Good. Re- member that youre tougher than they are. The word reached out to them, burned itself into the depths of Denice’s mind with all the strength of the dying man’s pain and lifelong rage: Better.

David nodded. “We'll remember.”

Good. Carl’s head sagged back against the wall. Go.

David rose and punched for the maglev. Denice hugged her father suddenly, fiercely, felt the pain that rolled through him at the contact. Blood covered her when she let go. “Good-bye, Daddy.” She rose and ran to the maglev when the doors opened.

Carl Castanaveras’ last thought reached out to them after the doors to the maglev had rolled shut upon them. Kill the fuckers.

As the maglev descended, David Castanaveras said grimly, “We will.”

I'VE LOST TOUCH with upstairs.

It took Charbonneau a long moment to understand what D’Argentan had said to him. His father was growing angrier and angrier over Maurice’s insistence that he was dead; Logrissen had ceased walking and now simply stood motionless at the en- trance to the hotel, staring in at Maurice. Charbonneau could see Logrissen’s lower intestines, hanging out of the hole Char-

Moran 225

bonneau’s autoshot had made in him back in the summer of ’59. Finally Maurice said, Sergeant? Did you say something?

<Sigh.> Yes. I've lost touch with Conseiller Carson.

Want me to go up and see what's happened?

Sergeant D’Argentan hesitated, then said reluctantly, No. No, don’t do that. I'll go. Watch the door, make sure nobody enters the hotel. Mau- rice nodded, and D’Argentan turned to the maglevs.

The door to the center maglev flexed slightly before D’Argentan had even touched the pressure point that controlled it.

The door curled open.

Maurice watched D’Argentan jerk as though he had touched a live wire, one hand still reaching for the pressure point, as the converging beams reached him and his uniform burst into flames.

They came out into the lobby slowly, cautiously, stepping across Sergeant D’Argentan’s burning body. As Maurice had heard, they were mere children; it was the first time Maurice had seen them since their kidnaping. Maurice sat with his auto- shot, watching the genegineered telepath children move across the lobby, toward the entrance. The boy had his laser trained on Maurice, and Maurice smiled at him. The girl was very pretty, but she did not look at Maurice after the first quick glance to make sure her brother had him covered. Maurice said politely, in heavily accented English, “Hello.”

The boy hesitated at the door after the girl had ventured out- ward, onto the slidewalk in front of the hotel. For the first time Maurice seriously considered the possibility that Sergeant D’Argentan had told him the truth; neither of the children seemed to notice Nils Logrissen’s grinning corpse standing just outside the hotel’s entrance.

The girl turned back. “David, come on!”

David Castanaveras took one slow, halting step toward Mau- rice Charbonneau. Maurice smiled at the boy one more time as David brought the maser down to focus on the center of Mau- rice’s chest.

“Hello,” Maurice said again. “I am Maurice Charbonneau.”

226 Tales

David Castanaveras whispered; Maurice had to strain to hear him. “Hello. My name is David Castanaveras, and this is for my father.”

Then for the barest instant Maurice felt a pain so great that he thought for a moment it was something else entirely—the touch of God, perhaps, calling him home. And perhaps it was. The maser beam swept across him and then there was no pain, nor anything else, for ever and ever again, amen.

The twins ran out into the night, into the riots.

Into the first hour of the Troubles.

TRENT WAS NOT certain what caused him to look back. He was out of sight of the Peaceforcer station, running through the rain as fast as he was able. Behind him something moved too fast for his eyes to track.

Brass balls.

He ducked into an alleyway, ran to its far end and turned out onto another street. He found himself on Westway Street, across the street from the Hudson River. The wind whipped the river strongly, and its waves splashed up and onto Westway Street. He was the only person on the slidewalks for three blocks in any direction. If the Peaceforcers came this far—

He ran straight across the street, down to the water.

On the other side of the street, the Peaceforcer Elite seemed to appear out of nowhere.

A single pier stretched out into the water of the Hudson River; Trent could not see a boat on the side facing him, but there had to be one on the other side. The logic did not strike him as even slightly strange; if there was no boat the cyborg would catch him. He ran the thirty meters to the pier’s entrance and reached the boardwalk only seconds ahead of the Elite and ran down its empty length without looking back. His gaze swept left and right, left and right.

There were no boats moored anywhere on the pier.

The Peaceforcer made a long arm and snagged Trent’s shirt. In a single instant of movement too fast for Trent to compre-

Moran 227

hend, much less resist, the Peaceforcer gathered Trent in and picked him up from the boardwalk.

Trent did the only thing he could think of; from a lifetime of martial arts instruction, he grasped the Peaceforcer, hugging him for traction, and kicked down at the invisible blur of the Elite’s legs. It was like thrusting his hand into a rotor. He felt his right leg snap like a stick and then the Peaceforcer went down, and together they skidded across the slick boardwalk. They did not even slow before they went over the edge into the choppy water.

There was no air in his lungs; he had not had time to draw a breath. The Peaceforcer was still holding him, and the cyborg’s great weight drew them both down into the warm summer wa- ters.

The iron grip of the Elite’s hand on his shoulder eased as though the Peaceforcer were considering the situation, and then the grip loosened further and let Trent go. With the last energy in him, Trent kicked up, to the surface of the water, and drew in a great gasping breath when he broke through to the air. A huge roaring filled his ears, and he swallowed water several times. Bright red dots hung before his eyes, and he considered, as though it were a problem that did not concern him, how to get back to land when he did not have the strength to swim. The waves brought him smashing up against one of the col- umns that bore the pier’s weight, and then again. The third time he grasped the column when he struck it, lacerating his arms against rough barnacles. The water washed over him and took his air away, and he held his breath until it receded. With his last strength he held on to the pier as the water washed over him, and held on, and held.

Interlude: Earth 2062-2067

THEY DID NOT find the boy. They did not find the twins.

IN LATER YEARS it was estimated that nearly half the population of the New York metro area was rendered permanently insane in the moments when the telepaths struck back.

The PKF moved in.

BY THE SEVENTH decade of the twenty-first century following the death of Yeshua ha Notzri, the population of Earth alone totaled eleven billion human beings. That number was not as large as it had been earlier in that century; the efforts of the Ministry of Population Control had trimmed the Earth’s total population from a high of nearly thirteen billion.

There have been larger populations of humans, across the span of Time. Seranju, capital of the Out-Empire, was home to more than thirty billion humans in the last century before the Out-Empire shattered itself upon the Great Anarchy. The cru- cial difference lay in the technology available to the Out-Empire; it fed its tens of billions, and was never in danger of not doing so.

Twenty-first-century Earth is notable, if for no other reason, in that more humans died of starvation in that one short century than in all the rest of Time put together. Of the twenty-three bil- lion human beings born between the years 2000 and 2100 Anno Domini, some eight billion died due to a lack of food to eat.

FIVE-AND-A-HALF years separate the summer of 2062 from the winter of 2067. On the surface, a world cannot change much in so short a span. Inertia alone prevents it. But in detail...

SpaceFarer technology became more common; room tempera- ture superconductor, monofilament fineline, and electric ecstasy made the transition from technological rarity to everyday real- ity. In 2062 there was nobody on Earth or off it who was ad- dicted to electric ecstasy; by the end of the decade there were over half a million juice junkies across the globe, and the num- ber only grew higher with the passage of time.

232 Tales

The Patrol Sectors were designed by the Peaceforcers as an interim measure to maintain order during the riots that followed the destruction of the telepaths. But the Peaceforcers found them useful, and instead of restoring patrol service to the entire metropolitan area, concentrated on the areas surrounding Capi- tal City and Manhattan, and left the rest of the great decaying city to the underfunded, underequipped American police.

It was cheaper that way.

In 2068, the summer following the summer in which the tele- paths were destroyed, the Unification Council outlawed manu- ally operated vehicles. The Speedfreaks revolted. It was a brief rebellion. The Speedfreaks who led it—Nathan St. Denver, Con- chita Alatorre, and Angel de Luz—thought of it as civil disobedi- ence. They never offered more than passive resistance to the Peaceforcers, and it did not matter. They made a Long Run, most of the Speedfreaks on Earth, starting in San Diego. They took their hovercars out across the ocean, across the Pacific, through Japan and New Zealand, up north across India, through Israel, and continued north through France itself.

Public sentiment was with them; the media coverage was fa- vorable. When the convoy left France and made its way west across the Atlantic Ocean, it had good reason to expect a favor- able reception upon reaching Capitol City.

The Speedfreaks never had a chance. The storm struck them midway across the Atlantic. Not one car in a hundred survived. The survivors were rounded up by members of the United Na- tions Peace Keeping Force and charged most formally with trea- son. Over 200 Speedfreaks, including Conchita Alatorre and Angel de Luz, were executed on that charge.

IN SEPTEMBER of 2063, Emile Garon returned to Earth, a Peace- forcer Elite.

In the summer of 2064, for the first time in the history of the human race, the full-blown Gift of the House of November un- folded within a human being.

Her name was Denice.

Moran 233

IT WASN’T SUPPOSED to happen like this.

Denice lay in bed, almost unable to move. Her limbs felt swollen. The fever left her delirious and shaking with weariness. After three days of sickness the administrators of the MPC’s Young Females Public Labor barracks in which she lived finally sent for a doctor. The administrators were, for the most part, not cruel people, merely underfunded and overworked. It was only when it was obvious that the child was not getting better on her own that they requested that a doctor come examine her.

Denice Castanaveras, lost in a world of her own creation, did not know it when the doctor came. The doctor who examined her finally gave up in exasperation, injected the child with a wide- spectrum antibiotic, and left to examine another patient else- where in the barracks, a girl who had undergone complications following her MPC-mandated sterilization.

Denice did not know when the doctor came, and did not know when she left. She was somewhere else, only vaguely aware of what was happening to the far-away body in which she was con- fined.

SHE WALKED ACROSS a crystal black plain that ran away to infin- ity. In the region around her a vast number of minds flickered like candles, screaming and crying and laughing, endless and unknowable. Some of the candles wavered at her passage, hu- mans with some minor telepathic skill reacting to the presence of the storm that Denice Castanaveras had become.

Denice could not find silence.

Thoughts tumbled through the back of her mind, and she could not tell whether they were her own or belonged to the minds among which she was passing. She fought desperately for stability, for some center from which she could make sense of the maelstrom of existence, of the thoughts and emotions, the fear and pain that tore through her constantly. Denice remem- bered talking to the telepathic children among whom she had been raised; they had never told her about anything like this. Her knowledge of genetics was sketchy; but she knew that she and David were the first of the telepaths to receive the tele-

234 Tales

pathic gene complex from parents rather than from the work of genegineers. It seemed clear that there were powerful recessives in the genome, masked in her parents but coming to completion in her.

One of the candles near her flickered out in a sudden burst of horror and pain; it had been murdered. Denice felt the death throes as though they were her own.

Time ceased to have meaning. She did not know when the ordeal had begun, did not know any longer even who she was with any clarity. The thoughts wouldn’t stop.

She called into the darkness, and found no response.

David, where are you?

Trent?

SOME GREAT TIME later, the danger called her up out of the dark- ness, and back into herself.

It was night; the barracks lights were dimmed, and the thirty girls in the barracks were mostly bedded down for the night.

The danger was close.

Somebody held her hand. The contact seared, burning. The pain had been going on for a very long time. Denice was vaguely aware that her sheets stank. With an effort she opened her eyes and attempted to pull her hand free.

The girl holding her hand tightened her grip. She said with real pleasure, “Deni? You awake finally?”

“Karen?” Denice had trouble focusing on the form sitting at the edge of her bottom-level bunk. “Let go of my hand. You’re hurting me.”

Karen’s grip loosened slightly, but she did not release Den- ice’s hand. “I been worried about you, you were talking in your sleep and all.” In the hazy darkness, a larger shape appeared, standing behind Karen.

“This is so nice.” Shelly, a fourteen-year-old who was due to be transferred to the Young Adults barracks before the end of the summer, sat down on the edge of the bed next to Karen. A smile that was barely visible in the gloom played around her lips. “Everybody’s been so worried about you, Deni.”

Moran 235

Denice closed her eyes in despair. Before her sickness Denice had rarely had nightmares, but when she did, they were often about Shelly. Denice felt Karen’s weight leave the bed in sensi- ble retreat. Shelly’s hand stroked Denice’s long black hair, and reached down to run a finger over the girl’s throat.

“Please,” Denice whispered, “stop that. It hurts.”

“Well, of all the...” Shelly stared at her. “I was trying to be nice to you,” she said. Her hand tightened in Denice’s tunic, and she drew the younger girl up until Denice was sitting up in bed. “Tf you can’t fucking appreciate good treatment...”

Shelly struck Denice.

Denice did not know where the anger came from, the vast and glacial rage that descended upon her. It was like nothing she had ever experienced before, an anger to match the rage she had felt toward Jerill Carson, but cold, calculating, reasoning, a fury that cleaned away all doubt and uncertainty. There was no strength in her body, but it did not matter. From another realm she reached out and became, in a fashion even her father could not have emulated, the dim and cruel person whom the world knew as Shelly. The grip in her shirt loosened, and Denice felt herself drop back to the bed, watched it happen through Shelly’s eyes.

With an ease that shocked her Denice brought the girl back to stand at the edge of Denice’s bunk, and had her lean over so that she could hear the words.

“You don’t touch me,” Denice whispered. “You don’t ever touch me. Do you hear me? Never.”

Shelly’s eyes were wide with terror.

Denice released her and the girl stumbled backward and crashed into the bunk next to Denice and Karen’s.

“Go hurt yourself,” Denice told Shelly quietly, and then called for Karen to bring her a glass of water.

IN THE YEARS following the destruction of the Speedfreaks, de- spite the fact that their credibility with the public had been ru- ined forever, the Weather Bureau wrestled the global weather patterns back to near equilibrium. It was an astonishing accom-

236 Tales

plishment, considering how nearly they had come to ruining their planet’s climactic balance. It did them no good in the public perception; only the babychasers of the Ministry of Population Control were hated more—even the PKF was more popular.

As I have said, on the surface things were little changed. Five and a half years passed, for eleven billion human beings. Some sixty billion years of cumulative experience occurred.

Five and a half years of that time belonged to a boy named Trent, who became a thief, and grew toward manhood.

And did not forget:

The boy awakes to find himself on the Chess- board. And, as always, it is for the first time.

The squares, alternately black and white, tumble to the horizon on all sides. Countless thousands of squares. Smoothly polished, gleaming endlessly in the white sun.

There is no sound. Only the weight of nonsound. The terrifying weight of silence in a great void.

The boy sits on a white square. He blinks, stretches, and looks curiously about him. He looks up at the sky, empty but for a huge, round sun. Swollen a hundred times the size of the sun we know.

The boy looks at the hard, smooth surface of his perfect white square and can see only his reflection. He smiles down at the image. It has been a wonder- ful rest, and it is certainly a glorious morning. A perfect morning. Pure and clear and perfect.

The boy has not the slightest thought of where he is to go, of what he is to do.

The others move constantly. At different inter- vals, in all directions, keeping always to the white squares. The boy is pleased to have begun on a white square. Clearly this is a fine beginning. The boy sits beautifully still for a time. It would be fool- ish to set out not knowing where one was to go.

Moran 237

He watches the others moving through the end- lessly alternating maze of black and white and black, glimmering forever under the hard, white sun. They are dressed in dull, white cloth which does not, or cannot, reflect the brilliance of the white squares through which they move so soundlessly. The boy believes that they are guards. He cannot imagine what there might be for them to guard in the purity and emptiness of such a place.

There is no air. There is no sound. The awesome enormity of his surroundings holds the boy. Black and white and black and white and black. Sterile and clear, shimmering to infinity.

The boy sits through the bright, hot morning. It is late in the afternoon when he first sees the ones who are not guards. They are few, and they are very far away, but he sees them clearly. Their cloth is black, but they are set apart from the guards even more certainly by the grace and ease of their movements. The boy believes that they are thieves but cannot imagine what there might be for them to steal in such a place. They walk with a fluid nobility that entrances the boy, and he strains his eyes to watch them until the last one is only a speck at an im- measurable distance.

The boy rises without knowing why. He unfolds his long young legs and walks to a black square. The black squares are empty, and he can look down the gleaming black diagonal to the far end of the Chessboard.

The boy walks the black diagonal, but he does not see another thief. After a time he doubts that he has ever seen one.

—Ronald J. Bass, “The Perfect Thief”

238 Tales

THERE ARE MANY beginnings; a story may begin many times, in many places.

But there must somewhere be a true beginning.

At the beginning of it all, there was an enigma.

The Star

December 21, 2067 to December 22, 2067

11.

THIS IS THE planet Earth, on Wednesday, December 21, 2067, turning blue and white and beautiful against a starry back- ground. You know what this looks like. Depending on when and where you are, you may also know what Halfway looks like: the orbital city in which much of the Solar System’s manufacturing takes place, in this year of 2067. Its been described as a bowl of noodles that somebody dropped, still falling; this does it an in- justice. Those born here, and sometimes those living here, find it a beautiful place, of lattice-thin girders and columns, of rolling O’Neills and tumbling slingshots and the huge free-fall struc- tures where Homebrews—native Halfers, born and raised in free-fall—prefer to live. There is never a time when you cannot see the glow of fusion welding torches at the eternally-under- construction Edge, the brief, actinically bright flares from tugs and sleds ferrying gear and goods among the city’s million and a half persons, its nearly 200,000 structures.

In geosynchronous orbit, along with Halfway, is the orbital junk from humanity’s hundred years in space. Hidden among the junk are the Orbital Eyes.

A variety of humans, of human organizations, and of ma- chine intelligences, look down through the hundreds of Eyes, scanning the Earth. One such Eye is doing just that, right ... now:

FROM HERE YOU can see most of North America, but the person controlling this Eye is interested in something specific; the Eye focuses in. On New York State. Its lense sweeps briefly across Manhattan—still recognizably the Manhattan of Babe Ruth and La Guardia, tripled now, still a beautiful city in its way—across the spires of the seven spacescrapers, each over a kilometer tall, that reach up from Manhattan and toward the Eye that has so briefly observed them; sweeps across the recently completed Unification Spaceport in south Manhattan, across the East River and into Brooklyn.

242 Tales

Where you see the Barrier for the first time.

The Berlin Wall had nothing on this. It’s eight meters high, more than four times the height of a tall man and it’s made out of black, supertwisted sheet monocrystal. The entire structure, end to end, is a single molecule. It can’t be cut or broken or bombed with anything less powerful than a nuclear weapon, and only the Peaceforcers have those—

The Peaceforcers built the Barrier, of course, and so they are unlikely to use nuclear weapons to destroy it.

On the west side of the Barrier are the Patrol Sectors. They're clean, theyre even reasonably safe, given that this is still New York, after all. There are Peaceforcers and police in the Patrol Sectors. On the west side of the Barrier.

On the East Side of the Barrier is the Fringe.

Here there are no police. Here there are no Peaceforcers. The life expectancy for a man is 37 years. For women it’s less. This isn’t a slum, it’s a war zone. Gangs patrol the streets, Temple Dragons in some areas, Gypsy Macoute in others, a thousand smaller gangs.

In Temple Dragon territory, in Flatbush, families on their way to Temple are escorted by armed men. From almost any- where in the Fringe, down the entire great length of Long Is- land, at any given moment you can hear (in the distant background if you’re fortunate) the flat crack of small arms fire, and the sizzle of energy weapons.

In Flatbush, rather closer to the Temple of Eris, you can hear this, if you listen carefully, the sound of the crowd listening to the Reverend Andrew Strawberry as he preaches:

... stomp stomp clap, stomp stomp clap ...

“_and the great Swami Dave Leary said to the Prophet Harry, give up the waiting of tables, and embrace your destiny! For though barriers are thrown in your way, still destiny calls—’

A small family approaches the Temple, passes the armed guards at the door, and goes inside. About fifty people, a dozen small families, are gathered here. The Temple pews are ar- ranged in a circle, and light streams in through the stained glass windows showing scenes from the life of the Prophet Harry, high

Moran 243

above them. Preaching in the center of the Temple, with the crowd around him, is the Reverend Strawberry. A huge black man, 210 centimeters, sweating and grinning, and he directs that grin at those just now entering what is now his Temple:

“destiny calls...to those who will listen!” The latecomers stop, caught by the power of that brown-eyed gaze. The grin does not waver. “And to those who can be on time, take your seats—there is a power for those who will trust it, a power in- side all of us, the power to believe, and through that belief not merely to move mountains, but to raise them up! There is no task too large for the brave, no detail too small for the pure of faith....” THREE BLOCKS AWAY, high in the rafters of a dark warehouse, a young man was busy working his way down a rope, trying to keep his breathing calm and even despite his excitement. He could not hear Reverend Pena’s sermon, but she must have been in fine form that morning, because even from that distance he could hear the crowd, stomping and clapping along with her. He hung in the blackness, dressed in black, with a black hood covering everything but his eyes, the rope running through his right hand and around his right wrist, and then looped once around his right ankle. In his left hand he held a gun. Abruptly, in mid-air, he flipped over, slid his right hand down the rope and caught it again so that he was facing downward, still touching the rope at just the wrist and ankle. For the first time he got a good look at his target. Beneath him were two uniformed guards and a small stand. Atop the stand, laid on black velvet, was a blue jewel the size of a robin’s egg. He could not get a good look at it, swaying back and forth in the darkness above their heads. The men beneath him never looked up.

Two men, one white and one black, dressed in expensive business attire, stood near the warehouse’s large sliding door. In his mind, the thief dubbed the white guy Fat Dude and the black guy Thin Dude. They were talking, but the thief could barely hear their voices.

244 Tales

A booming noise erupted, the sound of something crashing against the warehouse’s sheet metal. That would be Bird, right on time, whacking the door with a baseball bat and then run- ning away—Bird was good at hitting things, sometimes people, with a baseball bat, and then running away; he’d been doing it since he was seven. The four men beneath the thief all jumped in near unison, the two guards pulling their weapons, the Thin Dude and Fat Dude, both evidently armed, reaching for their concealed weapons and then restraining themselves. The Fat Dude and Thin Dude walked toward the warehouse door to- gether, leaving the bodyguards behind. One of the two uni- formed guards holstered his weapon, and so the thief shot the other guard first, and then the guard with the holstered weapon. In the darkness his weapon made no sound, and no light; the two men folded and the rope the thief was clinging to dipped downward, and he stored his gun, reached down with his now empty hand and lifted the jewel up off the black velvet.

Sirens exploded in an insane racket. The thief vanished back up into the darkness above—not climbing, the rope he held onto onto being pulled. The Thin Dude came sprinting back toward the stand, saw the two guards down on the ground and looked wildly around—and still didn’t look up.

The thief reached the ceiling, pushed aside a black blanket covering the hole he and his partner had cut into the roof, and light spilled down into the warehouse below. The Thin Dude fi- nally did look up—and ran for the stairs.

A young, dark-skinned man stood on the roof, under the bright winter sky. He pulled steadily on the rope, muscles straining, until the form of the black-clad man had reached the roof. He helped the thief to his feet—and Jimmy Ramirez said breathlessly, “You get it?”

—and Trent pulled the hood off and grinned at him. “It’s great to be me.”

Jimmy unhooked the rope, retied it at the edge of the roof, and shimmied over the side.

Moran 245

Abruptly the Thin Dude burst up onto the roof, through the stairwell exit, holding a laser. He took one step and yelled: “Stop! Thieves!”

Jimmy froze, halfway over the edge of the roof. “Boy, that was fast.”

Trent blinked. “They’re not usually that quick.”

Jimmy loosened his grip and slid down the rope, and Trent turned and sprinted to the other side of the roof, came to the edge and leaped without hesitating. The Thin Dude might shoot at him but there was no way the guy was going to catch him; Trent was the fastest runner in the Temple Dragons, possibly the fastest runner in the Fringe. Nobody else ran like him—nobody else was like him. He crossed two buildings, leaped over another alleway and came down on the roof facing him, ran across that roof on a diagonal in the general direction of the Temple, and finally glanced back to see how far behind he’d left his pursuit. The Thin Dude was gaining on him. Trent froze—overcame his shock, turned and ran. He hit the edge of the next roof, dropped to his stomach and grabbed the rain gutter and swung himself over the edge and dropped to the ground. He hit the ground running, flew down the alleway, turned a corner, turned another corner, saw an open doorway and ducked through that and then down a long corridor, into another building, into the space between two buildings and through the back entrance of the Temple of Eris— —where a tall black man he had never seen before, with sweat dripping off him and onto his Reverend’s robes, standing there in the center of Reverend Pena’s Temple. The tall man turned to look at Trent, features clouding with anger in the heartbeat before the door behind Trent burst open, and the Thin Dude charged through with his laser drawn, screaming at the entire Temple, but mostly at Trent:

“Nobody move!”

TRENT AND THE Thin Dude stood facing one another across the length of five meters, pointing their weapons at each other.

246 Tales

Trent said, “What are you, a track star?”

The Thin Dude was breathing heavily, and the tall Reverend, standing off to Trent’s left, spoke, his voice the only noise in the silence: “Lamont Newman. Broke the 200-meter world record back in...what, 755?”

The Thin Dude, Lamont Newman, still gasping for breath, said, “Andrew Strawberry. Small world. It was 56.” Sweat dripped off of him, and he shook his head to keep it out of his eyes, never looking away from Trent. “Andy, this bastard’s not even breathing hard.”

Reverend Andy glanced at Trent. The barest hint of amuse- ment touched him. “You got old like me, Lamont. Can’t keep up with the young bucks. It happens.”

Newman said, “I want it back.”

Trent stared at the man over his gunsight. “Put the gun down before someone gets hurt, and we'll discuss it.”

Reverend Andy walked between them. “Both of you put down your guns. I won’t have this in my church.”

Both of them moved to the side to get Reverend Andy out of their line of sight.

“Kid, I'll shoot you.”

Trent smiled at him. “No, you won't. That’s an Excalibur 3138. Emits a nice green beam.”

Newman nodded. “You’ve got good eyesight. Problem with the 313 is that green cloth reflects a lot of the wavelength. But you're wearing—’

Trent’s black outfit shimmered and turned bright green.

“Oh,” said Newman with honest admiration, “that’s a great trick,” and he fired. The green beam lashed out at Trent, and Trent lifted an arm to cover his face and stepped forward, firing. He pulled the trigger four times; and four times, squirts of liquid splashed over Newman. Newman staggered backward, dropped his gun, and collapsed.

There was a moment of silence.

Reverend Andy stared at Trent, his outrage palpable. “A squirt gun?”

Moran 247

And the crowd began to applaud. The same rhythmic ap- plause that, moments earlier, they had been giving Reverend Strawberry.

Trent smiled at the man. “Complex 8-A. Fadeaway. Great stuff.” He backed up, watching not Newman, but the man who had somehow taken over Reverend Pena’s temple, with the crowd clapping and stomping, back out the way he had come in, waved once at the crowd and turned and ran, with Reverend Andy staring after him.

EARLY THAT EVENING Trent talked with his family about what had happened.

They lived together on Crown Street near Bedford, on the top two floors of what had, before the Troubles, been an apartment complex that people paid to live in. Now it belonged to the Tem- ple Dragons, and Trent and Jimmy Ramirez, and Bird and Jodi Jodi, and Milla lived on the top two floors; a variety of Temple Dragons had lived, at various times, in the rooms on the bottom two floors. At the moment they were empty, which suited Trent and made Milla nervous—if Gypsy Macoute came, there would be no one to fight them until they reached the family she was responsible for protecting.

She was twenty-five years old, which made her ancient; dark- haired, thin, with a wiry strength. Milla looked calm, and looked quiet, and was both of those things, and Trent had seen her kill a man with her bare hands.

Trent had lived with them all, in various places, since his fourteenth birthday. He could remember thinking them an odd crowd, all four of them, when he met them; but that was so long ago now, five years, that he had to make an effort to recall why he had thought them strange. Jimmy was the first one he’d met, and Milla had adopted the two of them as soon as the Temple Dragons had allowed her to, after the Temple Dragons had re- luctantly concluded that Trent was not, after all, a webdancer. Jodi Jodi and Bird had turned up together, about a year after that; Trent did not know what had happened to either of them before Milla adopted them, except that Jodi Jodi said she

248 Tales

couldn’t remember anything between the onset of the Troubles, and being adopted by Milla; and that Bird, two years younger than Jodi Jodi, still had nightmares every other night, on aver- age.

They sat in the living room together, with a small fire burn- ing in the fireplace, the only heat in the great building. Each of them wore some prominent item of clothing in Temple Dragons colors, purple and gold.

When Milla heard the name she burst out, “The guy called him Andrew Strawberry?”

“Yeah,” Trent said. “And Strawberry called him Lamont Newman. You know him?”

Milla and Jimmy looked at each other—Trent found himself baffled by their apparent excitement. Jimmy said slowly, gain- ing speed as he went on: “Yeah...he was my second grade teacher, before the Troubles. He was on the other side when they put up the Barrier. We never saw him again.”

Trent did not think he had ever seen Milla look so animated. “He preached in the Flatbush Temple when I was a teenager. I never had him in school, but my sister who died in the Troubles, she had him. She said he was—’

Jimmy said it with her: “—the meanest man anyone ever saw.” He and Milla looked at each other and grinned and Jimmy went on. “He was in the WFL—”

Milla: “—he was a linebacker for the Beijing Bears—’

Jimmy: “—and they won two Stupendous Bowls—’

Milla: “—and he killed someone once who tried to tackle him”

Jimmy: “—and he killed students who didn’t do their home- work.”

Milla paused, then said uncertainly, “Thats not true. You don’t know that’s true.”

Trent, Jodi Jodi and Bird were looking back and forth be- tween the two of them.

A thought struck Jimmy and Milla at the same moment. They turned to Trent and said in almost the same voice: “You left a body in his Temple?”

Moran 249

Trent blinked. “It wasn’t a body. It was just...that guy I shot. He was fine. They knew each other,” he assured them. “They probably talked about old times when he woke up.”

In the silence, they considered this possibility together.

Jimmy said finally, “He knows a lot of people.”

Jodi Jodi said skeptically, “He was really famous?”

Jimmy nodded. “I haven’t heard about him since the Trou- bles, though. Five and a half years.”

“Huh. So that would be less famous.”

Milla said, “He was the best known person in Flatbush before the Troubles.”

Jimmy added, “Or afterwards.”

Bird spoke for the first time. “Until Trent.”

Everyone looked at him.

Bird shrugged. “Everyone knows who Trent is.”

Trent smiled. “The Reverend Strawberry didn’t.” A distant look touched his features. A message on his earphone, from his Image: the Orbital Eye they had hijacked earlier that day was still theirs, and it showed Reverend Strawberry making his way up the street, two Temple Dragons at his back, toward their home.

Trent said aloud, “He’s here.”

The others all glanced at one another; they didn’t even ques- tion him any longer on such matters.

A few minutes later Reverend Andy entered the room, alone, leaving his his bodyguards outside. They all rose to greet him, Trent a little slowly—Milla flung herself across the room and threw herself into Reverend Andy’s arms. The big man picked her up, hugged her, and put her back down again, a smile break- ing out, and said softly, “Milla, darlin’.”

Trent kept his features expressionless. No visible trace of jealousy or surprise touched him.

Reverend Andy shrugged out of the long coat hed worn against the cold outside, and turned to Jimmy Ramirez. “James,” he said severely, “aren’t you going to introduce your friends?”

250 Tales

It wasn’t a question, it was a command—and, second sur- prise in a row; Trent saw that Jimmy was visibibly nervous, though he stood his ground. Trent had never seen Jimmy in- timidated by anything.

“They're not my friends, Reverend. Theyre my family. This is my brother Trent, my sisters Milla and Jodi Jodi, and my brother Bird.”

Reverend Andy said gently, “I see your education suffered somewhat after I got through with you. You ever get past the second grade?”

“Third grade—well, part of it.”

Reverend Andy nodded. “I see. Well, genetics. Genetics makes the statement you just gave me unlikely. You got a white girl and a white boy,” he said, looking at Trent and Milla, “some kind of mixed race kids over here,” which was Jodi Jodi and Bird, “and you’re a mix yourself, James, but a different mix. So the genetics don’t work.”

Jimmy stiffened noticeably and the muscles in his neck tightened. “I’m not damaged and I’m not stupid. My first family died during the Troubles. Now this is my family. And don’t you insult them.”

Reverend Andy patted Jimmy on the shoulder, gently, and turned, finally, to the young man who would change his life for- ever. Trent smiled at him and Reverend Andy said, “And you’d be Trent, the young man who disrupted my service this morning and left me with a body to deal with. I’ve heard of you.”

Bird said under his breath, “He did too know who you were.”

Trent’s smile widened. “What have you heard about me?”

“Youre a man of low morals. A thief and a criminal and a corrupter of others.”

“Well, we're all criminals,” Trent said slowly. “There isn’t one of us who hasn’t broken some law, somewhere. Even you have, Reverend. Question is, what kind of criminal are you? Pm the steal from the rich, keep it and go dancing and have a good time kind. I’m telling you, it’s great to be me. Everybody likes me, be- cause I only steal from people who truly, deeply deserve it.”

“That’s rationalization.”

Moran 251

“People are rationalizing creatures...and I plead guilty to be- ing a person—I suspect that even you re a person.”

Jodi Jodi said solemnly, “A person’s a person, no matter how tall.”

Milla corrected her. “That’s ‘no matter how small.’”

Bird said patiently, “Joke, Milla.”

Milla didn’t hear him. She burst out, “Why are you here?”

Reverend Andy smiled at her. “Reverend Pena got a visa for the Patrol Sectors.”

He would not have gotten a stronger response if he’d told them that she had ascended bodily into heaven. The five of them stared at him, visibly stunned. Trent opened his mouth, then closed it again. Milla said, “But—’

Jodi Jodi said, “She got out?”

Milla whispered, “Out of the Fringe?”

Reverend Andy nodded. “The Temple Elders needed a re- placement and they couldn’t find one in the Fringe. They did find one who was willing to go into the Fringe, though. That used to be my Temple, before the Troubles began. I’m pleased to have it back.”

Trent could hear the flat skepticism in his own voice—he hadn’t intended to put it there. “The Unification is willing to let you stay.”

“They gave me a one year visa.”

“And they let Reverend Pena leave.”

The big man shrugged. “They’ve done it before—when the politics were right.”

Jimmy burst out, “Why haven’t we heard about it?”

“There are four million people in the Fringe,” said Trent, still staring at Reverend Andy. “I don’t suppose they want to adver- tise.”

Reverend Andy held Trent’s gaze. “You know, I’ve had people walk out of my sermons before—but never had one get applause doing it. I admit it’s a new experience for me.”

Trent shrugged. “I said everyone likes me. When you get to know me,” he assured Reverend Andy, “you'll like me too.”

“What are you doing?”

252 Tales

“Wrong question.”

“What do you want?”

Trent couldn’t stop the the smile from touching him again. “Better question. The greatest thief of the twentieth century, a man named Voleur, said the second rule of being a thief was to never steal anything you didn’t want—”

“—and that the first rule was to start by knowing what you wanted.”

Trent said mildly, “I think you’d make a good thief.”

“...| suppose you mean that as a compliment.”

“Suit yourself.”

“What did you steal today?”

“None of your business.”

Trent did not look away from Reverend Andy, but he did not miss the shocked looks that touched both Milla and Jimmy. Reverend Andy’s expression turned grim. “When Lamont New- man broke the 200 meter world record, that record had stood for thirty years. People wanted to test him and see if he was really a genie—he wasn’t a genie, just a very fast man. He retired about ’59 or 60. He was a millionaire a couple times over—Credit Units, not old Americans. It makes me wonder...what sort of person could make it worth his while to play nursemaid to whatever it is he wants you to return? A powerful person, that would be my guess. People like that—they don’t take being sto- len from lightly.” He held Trent’s gaze a moment longer, then shrugged his way back ino the coat he still held in one huge hand. “You don’t need to show me out.”

Trent said quietly, “Wasn't going to.”

Reverend Andy glanced at Trent in disgust, and turned and left without saying anything further. Milla sat down on the couch nearest the fireplace, almost a collapse, and sat staring at Trent. “I can’t believe how rude you were to him.”

Jimmy Ramirez said, “You have to be more polite to him.”

Trent looked back and forth between them, and then asked what seemed to him a reasonable question. “Why?”

Milla said gently, “He’s a good man.”

Moran 253

Trent thought about it. “It can be hard to tell, sometimes,” he said finally. He glanced at Jimmy. “TIl be ready in five minutes.”

IN THE FOURTH-FLOOR room Trent lived in were a bed, a shower, a closet, and nothing else.

Trent slid aside the closet door and stepped through the hanging clothes, into a small cold room with crumbling brick walls. Power cables hung down the walls and power strips ran along the baseboard of the dirty wood floor.

Along the walls, computer equipment was stacked up toward the ceiling. In the center of the room, a clean, modern desk was dimly visible.

“Command, lights.”

With the lights up the room was even more dismal. Trent picked up a pair of small gray electrodes from the desk’s surface, licked their surfaces and stuck one at each temple, and closed his eyes.

He did not go Inside. He did not call up his Image. Not for this.

Encryption protocols negotiated with one another. Thousands of passwords were exchanged, veryifying Trent’s actual identity, the actual identity of the man he wanted to speak with.

A holofield bloomed in front of Trent. In it, Booker Jamethon appeared, his appearance mercifully obscured by the holo’s low resolution.

“Lamont Newman works for Randall Getty Cristofer. Sun- Getty Oil.”

It hit Trent like an actual blow. “Oh, great... How about Strawberry?”

“Temples of Eris, 22 years. Non political, no involvement with the Erisian Claw. Member of twenty charities, on the board of directors of...this and that.”

“And the other thing?” Trent asked grimly.

Booker’s amusement was obvious. “That too.”

Trent sighed. “Thanks, Booker.”

“T don’t normally do research for other Players.”

“T was busy.”

254 Tales

Booker said, “You owe me.” He waved a hand and the holo faded into nonexistence, leaving Trent alone in the small brick room.

Trent said to the empty room, “I don’t owe you nothin’.”

IN THE SHADOWS across the street from McGee’s, the most popu- lar restaurant in the Fringe, half a dozen men stood with laser rifles, dressed in the black and red, the colors of the Gypsy Ma- coute. The group’s leader said, “You all know this guy.”

A holo appeared in midair. “Trent. Temple Dragon. They want an example made—but they want the rock more. So we get the rock first. Then kill him.”

MCGEE’S WAS NOT merely one of the few good restaurants in the Fringe; it was Trent’s favorite. Good food, clean, reliable enforc- ers, one of the few restaurants that catered to the street trade and the only one about which all those things could be said. You could get falling-down stoned and know youd live to see the morning, and the drinks and drugs were honest enough that get- ting falling-down stoned wasn’t hard. Trent and Jimmy were led to their usual table, toward the back. McGee’s had booths lining the walls, and round tables set out in the large central area. Trent didn’t like the booths; they were quiet, intimate, and he’d twice seen men die in them be- cause they couldn’t get out of them quickly enough. The round table he and Jimmy had reserved seated six or seven people comfortably, and was located roughly equidistant from the res- taurant’s three ground-floor exits.

The museum’s agent—the agent had never offered Trent his name, and Trent had never bothered to learn it—was already waiting for them. He was a short, soft-featured man whom Trent had never actually seen angry or happy about anything, before this. Trent wondered if he was about to see that change.

It was a busy night for midweek and Trent felt a flicker of annoyance; a boy and girl, teenagers, had been seated at the ta- ble next to theirs, close enough to hear if anyone at Trent’s table raised his voice.

Moran 255

The agent said, “Gentlemen.”

Trent seated himself facing the agent, able to see the rear of the restaurant from where he sat. Jimmy sat on the other side of the table, looking out over the restaurant’s front, the large win- dows that let out onto the street.

Trent took a deep breath, and still could not entirely keep the anger out of his voice. “You lied to me.”

The agent looked startled. “The property wasn’t where you were told it would be?”

“It was. That’s not the problem.”

Jimmy said grimly, “The problem is who we stole it from.”

“You've heard of Randall Cristofer.”

“Eighth richest person in the world.”

“Tm thinking we sell it back to him.”

“He’s got plenty of Credit.”

Trent said, “I was thinking a quarter million Credits. I think Cristofer would go a quarter million to get this back.”

A long day full of firsts; the agent’s alarm was palpable. “My...my principals...I don’t think I can go that high.”

Trent smiled at him. “Bummer.”

“Rough.”

The agent gestured at his briefcase. “I brought the fifty thou- sand with me. Hard Credit, SpaceFarer gold—’

The girl at the table next to them lifted turned around in her seat to stare at them. Trent stared back at her until she turned around.

Jimmy, looking over Trent’s shoulder at the front entrance, focused on something out in the street.

Trent told the agent, “It’s two-fifty now.”

“Youre breaking your contract!”

Trent leaned forward and lowered his voice. “You broke our contract.” He waved a hand and a holo document appeared in mid-air. The contract. “Clause 3a. You may not misinform or fail to inform me, if you possess the data, of the identity or employ- ers or associates of the targeted party. Your failure to fulfill the terms of your contract has caused me to piss off one of the most powerful people in the System, has—’

256 Tales

Jimmy Ramirez said softly, “Company.”

Trent broke off abruptly. From his shirt pocket he pulled his traceset free, ignoring the agent now, and put it on, settling the trodes onto his skull, closed his eyes—

—and looked down, through the Orbital Eye, toward the Earth. Found New York, found the Fringe, found McGee’s—zoom in:

The image is grainy, black and white, the gain set very high. Heat sources are bright blobs against a darker background.

Trent counted five...six shapes hidden across the street from the restaurant. Without opening his eyes he said “Six of them. Across the street.”

“Macoute?”

“Best guess.” Trent sent a command off through the traceset. ‘Tve put in a call to our boys. They'll be here in a few minutes.” He opened his eyes, shook his head slightly. To Jimmy he said, “Go meet them. No shooting, all we want is escort out of here.”

Jimmy nodded, stood up and walked calmly toward the res- taurant’s back entrance. Trent watched him go, knowing Jimmy would run the entire way back to the Temple to get reinforce- ments once he was out of sight.

“What are we doing?”

He had almost forgotten the agent. Trent turned back to him, still wearing the traceset. “Sitting here,” he said. “We’re just go- ing to sit here.”

“Tm leaving.”

“I wouldn’t do that,” said Trent. “McGee’s got treaties with the Gypsy Macoute. And the Temple Dragons, Old Ones, Syndic, Retribution Tong...everyone. No murders in the restaurant. Well, no murders within a block of the restaurant, but I figure why tempt them? Hey, you want some coffee? They have great coffee here.” He waved at a passing waiter. “Two cups of the Ja- maican Blue.”

The agent stood. “I don’t want any damn coffee, and you are not raising your fee on us.”

Moran 257

Trent said calmly, “They'll shoot you if you go outside.” The man sat back down abruptly. “And [ll give the damn thing back if you don’t pay me. Two-fifty. You want cream with that?”

ON THE ROOF of a deserted building in Flatbush, a Gypsy Ma- coute, wearing Temple Dragons colors, watching the Temple and the Dragon House next to it through a pair of PKF-issue combat binoculars. When the lights came on at the Dragon House, when a dozen armed men came swarming down into the streets, he whispered through his earphone.

“Dragons moving.”

TWO KILOMETERS AWAY, the six Gypsy Macoute waiting outside of McGee’s stepped out of the shadows, into the street.

TRENT PUT DOWN his coffee.

He said softly, “Oh, no.”

Through his traceset, through the Orbital Eye he was still monitoring, he could see the Macoute crossing the street, six bright ovals advancing on the even brighter structure of McGee's.

“Oh, no,” he said again. “This is bad.” He looked at the agent. “This is so bad. The last time the treaties broke down over five hundred people got killed—’

The agent turned to look. “They’re coming in?”

Trent snapped, “Don’t look! Don’t move until I tell you to—and then you run like a pack of Peaceforcers are behind you...three...”

Trent grasped the edge of the table with both hands, spread- ing his hands out to get the best grip—

“_..two...”

There. Rock the tabletop back and forth. It’s made of wood and it’s bolted to the base, which in turn is bolted to the floor. Hope the wood breaks. Hope the tabletop comes free of the base, and not the base from the floor, and not your arms from your shoulders—

“,..and one, go.”

258 Tales

The agent lurched backward out of his chair, falling to the floor, scrambled for his briefease—

Trent surged upward with the edges of the tabletop in his hands, heard the sound of the bolts being torn free, turned with the tabletop in his hands and threw it, spinning, toward the front entrance, toward the six men in red and black who had reached the entrance and were stepping inside, laser rifles lev- eled.

Two of them had time to open fire. One managed to get out of the way. The spinning tabletop crashed into other five, knocked all of them from their feet and two of them backwards through the windows and into the street. Glassite shattered, sprayed over the Macoute—

It was the Fringe. It had only been a second since the agent had stumbled backward out of his chair, and already the crowd was on its feet, men and women charging for the exits. Trent had his gun out, the beam set for wide dispersion, fired toward the entrance, a blast of light so bright the Macoute who were caught in it were heat-scalded and temporarily blinded. The boy and girl who'd been sitting next to Trent were on their feet, run- ning toward the kitchen; a Macoute beam caught the girl and she fell, screaming as the beams tracked around her. Trent charged toward her, scooped her up in one arm and ran through the laser fire, barreling through the double doors leading into the hallway that led to the kitchen. A Macoute had secured that exit. From the other end of the long hallway, laser fire scored the walls around Trent. He hit the ground with the girl, rolled over on his back as another Ma- coute came through the double doors right behind him, and squirted him oncc in the face. While the Macoute was still stand- ing he caught a laser blast from the other end of the hallway, and toppled forward on top of Trent and the girl.

The girl was screaming, “Oh God, they burned me, they burned me—’

Trent pushed the body off of them, hauled the girl to her feet and pulled her with him into the kitchen proper.

It was empty. The kitchen staff had fled already.

Moran 259

The hysterical shriek: “—they burned me—’

Trent ignored her. He saw in a second that the kitchen had no exit but onto the hallway in which the Macoute were waiting for them. He pushed the girl through the kitchen and toward the back, into the storage room, as the Macoute burst into the kitchen firing.

The storage room had no door, only an entryway. It was full of racks, heavy with cans and boxes; Trent threw two of the racks over in the storage room’s entry and pulled the girl down the long row of storage racks, toward the room’s back, threw down another three racks on top of one another and pulled her down behind it.

He figured they had a minute, maybe. It would take the Ma- coute that long to get the doorway cleared. Maybe another min- ute or two after that before they Macoute got up the courage to come in after a man who appeared to be armed.

The girl was still screaming. “Command,” said Trent. “Lights off.”

The darkness seemed to shock her into some semblance of sense. She was completely silent for a moment. “I’m hurt,” she said after a beat. “How bad am I hurt?”

Trent’s vision was adjusting quickly. It was only dark by comparison to the brightness of a moment ago; light from the kitchen spilled in through the storage room’s entrance.

“Quiet,” he said after a moment. “You're burned. We'll get you to a medbot, I’ve got people coming.”

A man’s voice from the doorway. “Trent!”

They knew his name. Oh, I’ve fucked this up bad, Trent thought.

Trent yelled back, “Yeah!”

“We want the stone!”

Trent didn’t hesitate. He reached into his coat without hesi- tation, pulled out the small, velvet lined bag. He threw it at the entryway, watched it bounce to a stop just inside the storeroom. “Take it!”

One of the Macoute made a long arm, reached inside and pulled out the bag.

260 Tales

Trent could feel the girl, shivering, panting at his side as though she couldn’t draw enough breath. “Are they leaving? Are they leaving?”

Trent shook his head. “Probably not.” We’re about to die, he thought very calmly.

The note of pure terror that touched her voice was one of the worst things he had ever heard. “Oh no, please, please—’

Trent turned to her. He actually saw her for the first time, clearly; she couldn’t have been more than fifteen, pretty, dark- skinned and dark-eyed. “Listen to me,” he whispered, “listen.”

She stared at him, eyes wide, panting in short, sharp breaths.

“Life is movement,” he said urgently. “We start in one place and move to another, and even death is just a part of that.”

A beat. When she spoke Trent could hear the surprise in her voice, the startled realization. She said, “Were going to die.”

Trent could not look away from her. He heard the Macoute pulling down the barrier at the storeroom’s entryway. “Don’t be afraid. We'll go together.”

Laser light cut into the darkness around them. Trent pulled the girl to him and curled up around her, protecting her body with his own. Beams cut through the darkness, illuminated her terrified features. Trent felt one of the beams touch him and heard the girl whispering over and over, “Oh God, oh no, oh no—’

He barely even heard the gunfire that saved his life.

“HERE,” SAID JIMMY. “I thought you’d want this back.”

Trent took the small bag with the jewel inside it, tucked it back in the inner pocket of the coat laying on the ground beside him. A Temple Dragon medic, Old Rodrigo—he was twenty- seven—was just finishing applying a salve to the laser burn on Trent’s back. Old Rodrigo had told Trent, regretfully, that he wouldn’t even get a good scar out of the burn, just a little patch of irregular color in all likelihood.

Trent pulled his shirt back on, and then his coat, ignoring the pain in his back. Whatever the medic had used on him, it wasn’t

Moran 261

a pain killer, or it wasn’t enough of one. He ignored Jimmy’s of- fered hand and sat in one of the dining room chairs and looked around at the wreckage of the restaurant.

Out here in the dining area it didn’t look too bad. One de- stroyed table, shattered windows, a lot of overturned chairs. Jimmy stood at Trent’s side, grinning, obviously pleased. Two dead Macoute had been propped up against the wall.

“How many dead?”

“Three Macoute,” Jimmy said proudly. “None of ours. Couple minor burns, yours was the worst.”

Trent said flatly, “You shouldn’t have come.”

Jimmy didn’t even look angry. He said blankly, “What?”

“The girl died. That makes four.” Trent paused. “You know, I hate slugthrowers even more than I hate beams. They—’ He waved a hand, vaguely. “—ricochet.”

Jimmy stared at him. The fury in his voice barely registered on Trent. “If I hadn’t come, you’d be dead.”

Trent looked up at him. “If you hadn’t come, it would only have been two. And she wouldn’t have had to make the trip alone.” He got to his feet, slowly, trying to ignore the flaming pain across his shoulders, and walked toward the front entrance, and out onto the street, without speaking again.

Jimmy stared after him. Finally he gestured to a pair of the armed Dragons standing nearby. “Escort him! Put some guns around him and escort him home!” The two of them ran out into the street, after Trent. Jimmy shook his head in disbelief, turned and went into the back of the restaurant where the medic was laying out the girl’s body.

The medic looked up at Jimmy. Jimmy couldn’t take his eyes off the dead girl’s body. She’d been burned by the lasers, three separate scores he could see, but from the bleeding it was clear her death had been caused by a slug in her stomach. The sight of the blood froze Jimmy. Abruptly he had difficulty breathing.

“Rodrigo...were any of the Macoute...carrying slug throw- ers?”

Old Rodrigo blinked lazily. He spoke with an island accent that Jimmy had always suspected was an affectation. “The Ma-

262 Tales

coute? They don’ usually carry impact weapons, man. Lasers and masers, you know.” After a moment, Jimmy said, “I think I might throw up.” “Don’t do it on the body, man,” said Old Rodrigo reproach- fully. “That’s disrespectful, you know?”

MILLA AND REVEREND ANDY sat on the porch at the rectory next door to the Temple of Eris, each of them bundled up against the cold of winter, and watched the sun sink in the cloudless sky.

“I don’t really remember it very well,” Milla said. “How the Troubles started. Most of us don’t. I was outside when it hap- pened. The telepaths—screamed—and then I remember seeing the nuke go off—seeing that mushroom cloud.” She shook her head. “Most of the grownups went crazy, and most of the crazy ones died. Kids handled it better. But afterwards there were a lot of kids with no parents. So we ended up with big kids taking care of the little kids— ‘Wendies.’ ” She glanced at him to see if he’d gotten the reference, saw him nodding. “I’m their Wendy. I love them so much it hurts. They try so hard and as hard as they try it’s barely enough just to stay alive.”

Reverend Andy sighed. “I wish I'd been here, darlin’. I was travelling when it happened. By the time I got back the Peace- forcers had sealed the area off. The rioting was—bad.” He shook his head. “Here I’m telling you about it.”

Milla shrugged. “You won't hear it the other way.”

Reverend Andy said slowly, “I've heard some of the survi- vors—saw things.”

The images were as clear to Milla as the day she’d had them. The telepaths had screamed, at her, at her personally—which was the experience everyone had had. For days she hadn’t been sure who she was, or where, or when—and she was not alone. Children struck by it survived better than adults, but there were girl children who were not old enough yet, five and a half years later, to have born children of their own, who could tell you in detail what childbirth felt like, or who knew the names of the husbands they were going to have, some day, in time to come—

Moran 263

Several days after the Troubles began, Milla’s jumbled memories straightened out, and all that she was left with were flashes. Just flashes—and until she’d met Trent she hadn’t been sure they were not the product of her own imagination. She’d never told anyone about them, and was surprised, even now, to hear herself telling Reverend Andy. The words came haltingly, but they came....

“I saw him. Not the way he was when I met him. Not even the way he is now. He’s...different. Older. He has his arms spread out, like Jesus on the cross. And then he says, ‘I love you all.” And then...” She shivered, hugging herself. “And then they shoot him.”

“Who shoots him?”

Milla simply shook her head.

“Did you see anything else?”

She shook her head again.

Reverend Andy sat quietly beside her, breath pluming in the air. After a moment he reached over and patted her on the shoulder, almost awkwardly.

Milla looked up at him and the word spilled out of her. “Help me get them out. Pm going to lose one of them if we don’t get out of here. He’s making enemies, people are starting to hear about him and know who he is. I’ve been—resigned—I gave up hoping I could make them safe and if there’s any chance I have to get them out of here!” THERE WERE TWO flashes of imagery that Milla remembered, not one. The second image she had carried away from the telepath’s assault on her was an image of herself. In it she was about her current age, and she was standing in front of the Barrier, with a laser rifle in her hands, while laser bolts rained all around her, striking her repeatedly.

She tried not to think about that image, but there were two things she was sure of:

She was going to die when that day came.

And it was going to happen on the other side of the Barrier.

264 Tales

JIMMY PUT DOWN his coffee and got to his feet, respectfully, when McGee entered the restaurant.

He didn’t know how old McGee was, except that he was old, ancient not just by the standards of the Fringe but by those of the outside world. A hundred? Older, probably. For a man of his years he was still strong—though the word that came to mind when Jimmy thought of him was, simply, evil. Not that Jimmy thought that McGee was essentially evil, necessarily, exactly; he was willing to concede that there might have been an actual per- son behind those ancient features somewhere. Jimmy just had no evidence of it.

McGee had five armed men with him, which was enough to make Jimmy grateful that several of the Temple Dragons had waited with him, helping him drink McGee’s coffee. McGee looked around the mess of his restaurant, in no particular hurry, with no particular expression.

Finally Jimmy said, “McGee—they came in shooting.”

McGee appeared to notice Jimmy for the first time. “I have thirty cameras in this place. Pm going to know what happened here.”

“Macoute broke the treaty, sir. We just came in to get Trent.”

The old man sighed. “What was he doing here?”

Jimmy thought about it. “Seeing a man about a rock.”

McGee nodded. “Where is he now?”

“At the Temple.”

“TIl want to talk to him.” McGee brushed by Jimmy, heading toward the rear of the restaurant—paused and turned back to Jimmy, and said in a tone that Jimmy would have called, in a real human being, complaint: “You have any idea how hard it is to get insurance in the Fringe?”

THE BODIES HAD been laid out in the center of the Temple, in the area where the preacher normally preached, in body bags that had been sealed up to their throats so that only their faces showed. The Temple was dark, only the lights on the altar pro- viding illumination. Reverend Andy had dressed in his official robes, and appeared to be angry about having had to.

Moran 265

Jimmy and four other Temple Dragons stood near the bodies, carrying their rifles.

“I don’t believe I’m doing this,” said Reverend Andy.

Trent, sitting in the darkness toward the back of the Temple, was looking up at the stained glass windows showing the life of the Prophet Harry. The one he was looking at showed the Prophet Harry’s beating at the hands of the IRS. Usually he liked looking at that plate; it reminded him that life was essen- tially ludicrous, even for the great. Today he barely saw it. The numbness that had stolen over him made him feel as though he could have sat there, without moving, for weeks, until his life drained out of him. He didn’t feel sad, or angry, just numb and detached.

No one answered Reverend Andy—after a moment Trent said, “There are no police in the Fringe. No Peaceforcers.” It was important the man understand. Trent knew he didn’t.

Reverend Andy didn’t even look at Trent. “’m not going to start breaking your treaties before I’ve been here 24 hours,” he said, the anger evident in him, “but by God and the Prophet Harry there will be changes here.”

In the darkness, Trent smiled. “Not long after the Barrier went up, Gypsy Macoute overran the Temple on Gold Street.”

Jimmy bowed his head slightly, and suddenly looked weary and older than he was.

Trent continued. “There was no one to stop them. There were no Temple Dragons, then. So the Macoute killed the men, killed the children, raped the women and then killed them. They didn’t kill them fast. What they did, they tied people to steel poles and poured oil on them.”

Jimmy said softly, almost a whisper, “And burned them.”

“Burned them,” Trent repeated. “Four, five at a time. When the fires burned down, they'd bring out a new batch. Whole families at once. People who were there say that—’

“Torches burned from dusk ’til dawn,” said Jimmy Ramirez.

“There’s a reason the Temple Dragons exist, Reverend, that we have treaties. You don’t have to like it ... but it would help if you understood that there are reasons.” Trent glanced over at

266 Tales

Reverend Andy, saw the man looking ill—turned back to look at the stained glass. He wondered if Reverend Andy was going to throw up. First Jimmy, and now maybe Reverend Andy. Trent couldn’t remember if he’d ever seen two people throw up on the same day just because they were upset.

Trent heard the doors to the Temple swinging open, and shifted in his seat to watch them enter.

The Macoute were here.

They came into the Temple together, six of them, unarmed. The Temple Dragons shifted their rifles, but did not point them at the Macoute.

The Macoute stepped forward, led by One-Eye, stopped ten paces away from Reverend Andy and held out the empty hands, palms up. Trent came forward to meet them.

One-Eye was about fifty years old. Old, for the Fringe. The right side of his face was savagely scarred, and the left side was only an improvement by comparison. He’d been ugly even before he’d lost his eye, Trent had heard, and what was left of his fea- tures supported that. “Trent, Jimmy.” One-Eye glanced a Rever- end Andy. “Who he?”

Trent said softly, “Hello, One-Eye.”

Reverend Andy said, in the voice he used when he was preaching, “Reverend Andrew Strawberry.”

One-Eye measured him, dismissed him with a visible shrug. “We come for our dead.”

Jimmy gestured at the girl, off to one side of the dead Ma- coute. “Do you know who the girl is? She’s not from our territory and she’s not wearing colors.”

One-Eye glanced at her. “Dominique...I don’t know her last name. She got family on Legion Street.”

Trent nodded. “One of yours...take her home. Tell her family the Flatbush Temple Dragons will pay death benefits.”

There was a stir among the Macoute. The offer obviously startled them. Trent got to his feet, came forward until he stood in front of One-Eye. “Tm sorry for your dead. I wouldn’t have had them die over—a thing.”

Moran 267

One-Eye stared at Trent briefly, warily—finally made a small gesture with one hand. His men came forward and sealed the body bags the rest of the way up, lifted them and headed for the door. One-Eye backed up with them, still looking at Trent. “I heard you stole a jewel this time.” He shrugged. “Not worth dyin’ for.”

Trent said, “Almost nothing is.”

One-Eye stopped at the door, grinned at Trent. “You and me—we know that.” He stepped backward through the Temple Doors, and Trent saw the Temple Dragons relaxing slightly.

Reverend Andy turned to Trent. “He seems to like you.”

“Yeah. Everyone likes me. Even One-Eye.”

Revernd Andy said, “Man has some appreciation for the value of life.”

Jimmy snorted. “His life.”

Trent said, “One-Eye burned Jimmy’s little brother when the Gold Street Temple was destroyed.” He paused. “He’s a bad man.”

Trent did not think he had ever seen anyone more truly, deeply appalled than Reverend Andy was at that moment. “And you made a treaty with him?”

Trent and Jimmy exchanged glances. Finally Jimmy said, “Who else? Don’t need to make treaty with people you dont hate.”

The big man was genuinely shaken. Trent couldn’t think of anything he wante to say to the man. The Macoute should be clear of the building by now, he thought. I can go. Not that he felt like moving, now or ever.

Reverend Andy said, “How can you live like this?”

Trent pushed himself to his feet, left without looking back.

Jimmy Ramirez watched him go, thinking about Reverend Andy’s question. Finally he shrugged. “It’s the Fringe.”

TRENT SAT AT the edge of Prospect Lake, in the dark. From here he could see the Barrier, and the spacescrapers in Manhattan, climbing up into the night sky. Prospect Lake was Temple Dragon territory, though by the treaties Gypsy Macoute were

268 Tales

permitted to travel through this area without being harmed. Af- ter nightfall, almost no one ever came out here, except Trent, and that only occasionally.

He had the gem in his hands. It was the first time he’d really gotten a chance to look at it, and it was too dark to really see it well. Every now and again, holding it up against the lights of the spacescrapers, he saw a glint of blue in it.

Toss it into the lake. No one would ever find it.

Instead he put it back in its bag, put the bag into his inner coat pocket, and went home to get dressed. He couldn’t go into the city wearing colors.

HALF A DOZEN vehicles were lined up at the check point, to pass through the Barrier. About twenty people on foot, standing in line, were being processed through, one at a time. Armed PKF troops patroled the check point; it was one of only four places on Long Island that people and vehicles were permitted to pass through—with proper identification.

The line moved forward, slowly it seemed to Trent, standing there in the line wearing his business suit. After what seemed a long time he was at the check point himself.

The Peaceforcer on duty said in a bored voice, “ID and retinal scan, please.” He glanced up and saw Trent for the first time. “Oh. Good morning, M. Vera.”

Trent leaned forward and put his eye up against the scanner. “Vera, Thomas. Is it morning already?”

The Peaceforcer looked down at his display. The message flashed up at him: Retinal scan and voice print match. He looked back up at Trent. “Yes, M. Vera. Two A.M.”

Trent shook his head. “It’s been such a long day.”

TRENT LET HIMSELF into Randall Getty Cristofer’s hotel room.

He had seen holos of the man, but he had never seen him in the flesh before. He was younger than Trent would have guessed from the stills he’d seen, about 40, and more handsome as well. Getty was talking to someone visible in a holo off to his side, while watching another dozen newsfeeds at the same time. He

Moran 269

broke off when Trent stepped into the room and pointed his gun at Cristofer.

“Tell them you'll call back.”

Cristofer stared at Trent. After a moment he said, in a dis- tinct Australian accent, “Command, kill the feeds.” The news- feeds vanished. “Jack, Pll have to call you back. Something’s come up.” He made a gesture with one hand and the caller dis- appeared.

Trent lowered the gun. “You're Randall Cristofer.”

“Who are you—where’s my security?”

Trent smiled at him. “Theyre asleep. Out in the hallway of this really nice hotel room you’ve got here. I hope someday to have stolen enough from people like you to be able to stay in ho- tels like this one.”

Cristofer stared at him.

Trent said, “It seems a reasonable goal.”

Cristofer said slowly, “You stole—”

Trent nodded. “I stole. This morning. It’s what I do and m very good at it.”

“Who are you?”

“Thats a great question. m not going to answer it, but I admire you for having the cojones to ask it with a straight face.”

“You're talking too much to be planning to kill me. Why are you here?”

Trent took a step toward the man. Cristofer held his ground. “T want you,” Trent said slowly, staring at the man, holding his gaze, “to never hire the Gypsy Macoute again. Ever, for any- thing. I need you to forget about your prize, because it’s gone and will not be coming back. I want you to believe that I meant no disrespect stealing from you, and if d known you were the target, Pd have been far more cautious about separating you from your property. I need you to deeply, truly, and without res- ervation, agree with me that hiring assassins to pro- tect...things—even very beautiful things—is inappropriate, unacceptable behavior.”

270 Tales

The silence stretched for a long moment after Trent was done speaking. Finally Cristofer said, “And what happens if you don’t get what you want and need?”

“The obvious answer to that,” said Trent gently, “is that the next person to come through your hotel door at three o’clock in the morning—won’t be me.” He glanced at the door, still open behind him. “I’m going to leave now. Don’t follow me.” He looked back at Cristofer. “You'd regret it.”

Cristofer nodded, once, shortly. “I believe you.”

THE CLOCK ON the wall read 4:45 A.M.

Reverend Andy and Jimmy and Milla all sat together in Rev- erend Andy’s office. Not even the coffee was managing to keep them awake any longer.

“He just does this sometimes?”

Milla sighed. “It started two, three years ago. He just—vanishes. A day, two. Three days, once. Nobody knows where he’s going.”

Reverend Andy said, “Or if he’s coming back?”

Jimmy said, “He always comes back.”

Milla added, “I’m sure he’s okay.” Pause. “He’s careful.”

Reverend Andy got to his feet. “People, it’s late, and Pm very tired, and I’ve got a long day ahead of me tomorrow. You two sit up together if you like. No need to hurry yourselves out of here.”

After he’d left, Milla said, “I’m sure he’s okay.”

Jimmy said, “I’m sure he’s alive.”

Milla said wearily, “That’s all I meant.”

Jimmy nodded.

“HEY, WAKE UP.”

Jodi Jodi opened one eye. “Wha?”

Bird said, “It’s really cold.” He looked at her expectantly.

Jodi Jodi said groggily, “Turn the heat up. Start a fire. Or something.”

Bird sat down on the edge of her bed. “Jimmy and Milla didn’t come home last night.”

She nodded. “They’re at the Temple.”

Moran 271

“Neither did Trent.”

“T know.”

A pause. He looked at her expectantly.

She looked back. “Well?”

“Can I sleep with you?”

Jodi Jodi rolled back over on her side. “You steal my covers and Pll whack you so hard your head’ll turn around.”

IT’S MORNING NOW, the planet just turned enough that the first rays of the Sun are striking the Flatbush Fringe, and Jimmy and Milla are sitting up in Reverend Andy’s office, both dead asleep.

Reverend Andy is asleep, in his bed, alone, not dreaming.

Bird and Jodi Jodi are still asleep, though Bird has kicked Jodi Jodi twice, and been kicked in return seven times; Jodi Jodi is a believer in massive retaliation, and being unconscious does not prevent her from carrying out this philosophy.

Dominique Simon is laying on the couch at her parent’s house, just as dead this morning as she was yesterday. No one at that house slept this night.

In Manhattan, Trent is walking into the office of the man who hired him. His employer is about 35 years of age and com- pletely bald. He’s dressed in clothes that cost more than most Fringe families see a year, sitting behind a desk that Trent would have been happy to steal, if it were smaller. The objects of art scattered around the office are, Trent would estimate, worth ten or fifteen thousand CU.

Security guards stand at the corners of the room, and Trent is sure that they’re the least of the precautions this man has taken before meeting with Trent.

THE MAN LOOKED startled when Trent entered the room. “You're... Trent.” “You're Gideon Hamilton, the Executive Director of Acquisi- tions for the American Museum of Natural History.” “—yov’re younger than Pd expected.”

272 = Tales

Trent stopped a few feet before the man’s desk. He didn’t bother to seat himself.

“Did you bring the stone?”

Trent said, “Call Barrister Davenport. 201311-BARD.”

A pause. Hamilton said, “Command. Call 201311-BARD.”

Another pause. The holo of a gray-haired, elderly woman ap- peared floating off to Trent’s right.

Barrister Davenport said, in a clear, calm contralto, “I have been instructed by my client to inform you that I am in posses- sion of the object. It will be delivered upon completion of the funds transfer.”

Hamilton flushed with anger. “You didn’t bring it with you?”

“To your office? With your guards? With their guns?” Trent shook his head. “No.”

“There’s a problem with the funds.”

Through the numbness that had enfolded him, Trent felt the first flicker of anger. He took another step forward, saw the se- curity tensing up. “I want my Credit!”

“We had difficulty getting together the hard Credit you re- quested—’

Trent said, “I’ll take soft Credits delivered to my barrister’s account. You have one hour. After that—”

Barrister Davenport said, “My client has instructed me to drop the object into the Atlantic Ocean.”

Hamilton said, wonder in his voice, “Do you know what you have?”

Barrister Davenport said pleasantly, “No. But I do know what my client’s instructions are.”

Hamilton made a poor villain; Trent saw the man’s shoulders slump in defeat. He said quietly, “I can arrange soft Credits in that time. The funds will be transferred before the hour is over.”

Trent turned to leave.

The man’s voice. “T'rent—’”

The words exploded out of Trent. “Four people died yester- day. Do you know that? Do you care?”

Moran 273

Gideon Hamilton said dismissively, “People die in the Fringe all the time.... You did something very important for us. We are not unappreciative.”

Trent could not keep the anger out of his voice. “You know what the problem is with you? You think you're one of the good guys.”

The man shrugged. “Yovwre one of the best contractors I’ve ever had. I hope you'll work with us again.”

Trent’s hands shook. The rage made it difficult to talk. “Tm a professional. I get treated like a professional.” He took a step to- ward the man, saw the guards reaching for weapons. “I get told the truth by my clients and I get paid—’

Only the desk was separating Trent from Hamilton. Lasers were being pointed at him. Trent stared at the man, the fury still washing through him—

Hamilton said gently, “I know.”

The words hurt his throat, coming out. “—and I'll work for anyone.”

REVEREND ANDY CLIMBED up through the trapdoor to find Trent sitting in one of several chairs scattered across the roof, watch- ing the sunset.

Trent glanced at him. “You don’t get many this pretty in De- cember.”

Reverend Andy looked around. “No. It’s nice up here.”

“T like sitting up high. Looking out over it all.”

Reverend Andy walked to the edge of the roof to look out—

Trent said dryly, “You want to get back from the edge like that. Somebody going to mistake you for a sniper.”

Reverend Andy backed up quickly, pulled a chair over and sat down next to Trent.

The question came abruptly. “Who are you?”

Trent said slowly, “Just me...trying to keep things together. Look out for my family. And I didn’t do my research and I got four people killed.”

“Not your people. Not your family.”

Trent nodded. “Not this time.”

274 Tales

“T been hearing about you for a while,” Reverend Andy said. “One of the reasons I came out here was to meet you...and now I have and I don’t know if I believe in you. Basic principal: when something seems too good to be true, it usually is.”

Trent actually laughed. “I seem too good to be true? You are one lousy judge of character.”

“What happened?”

Trent stared direclty into the orange ball of the setting sun. He thought about where to start. “About...two billion years ago, a mixture of corundum and titanium and iron oxides was pressed into a little blue ball. A 563 carat star sapphire. About four hundred years ago it was dug out of the ground in Sri Lanka. In 1900 J.P. Morgan gave it to the American Museum of Natural History. In 1964 Murph the Surf stole it from them. Rappelled over the heads of guards and customers...nobody looked up.” He smiled, quick and faint. “He didn’t get to keep it, though. They caught him. Fifty-four years after that, during the Unification War, the Museum was looted. Priceless things were taken. One of them was the Star of India.”

“So you stole it...to return it.”

“That was the contract.” He paused. “It’s a beautiful rock. I got a fifteen year old girl killed over it.”

“T got a call this afternoon. From the World Food Bank.”

Trent just looked at him.

Reverend Andy said, almost apologetically, “Tm a regional director.”

Trent nodded in resignation. Of course he was.

“Someone gave us a quarter million Credits this afternoon. On behalf of the Flatbush Temple of Eris...for a thousand Cred- its, the World Food Bank can provide food and shelter and medi- cine for one person, for two years. For a quarter million Credits...twenty-five hundred people won’t die of starvation this year. Or next. Hell of a Christmas gift.” After a long pause, Rev- erend Andy said, “When a person seems too good to believe, he usually is. But not not always. And the exceptions change the world.”

Moran 275

Trent did not reply, and after a while Reverend Andy got up, and left him alone.

LATER THAT NIGHT Milla came out to sit with him.

She brought a blanket with her, sat down in the seat Rever- end Andy had vacated some hours ago.

“You going to be up here all night? It’s supposed to snow later tonight.”

He didn’t answer. She sat beside him, and put the blanket around his shoulders. She was startled by how badly he was shaking, and she leaned forward to hold him. He wasn’t crying, just shaking, and the shaking didn’t stop, didn’t lessen, while she sat there with him.

“You know,” Milla said, some time later, “I’ve known you al- most six years. And this is just about the first time I’ve ever really thought that you were human.”

Interlude: Earth

November 5, 2068

Moran 279

ON A GRIM cold Friday night late in November of 2068, Trent stood in a doorway, drinking black coffee with the bright warm restaurant at his back, and looking off across the water, watched snow fall on Manhattan Island.

Capitol City. The Big Town.

Pale blue eyes were the most visible features in a face that was poorly lit by the cracked, aging glowpaint on McGee’s roof. Trent had turned the heating coil on the mug as high as it would go, but the top layer of liquid kept going cold regardless when he waited too long between swallows.

He stood in a bubble of silence and stillness, slightly drunk himself. The wind whipped the snow wildly only centimeters away from the end of his nose, but where he stood the air was calm and cold, which was good enough.

He did not know how long he’d been out there before some- body from the party came looking for him. Trent’s coffee cup was long since empty when Jimmy came out through the restau- rant’s roof entrance and joined him. “Word up.”

Trent inclined his head slightly.

“My brother,” said Jimmy quietly, his voice ten centimeters from Trent’s right ear. “Where are you?”

“On the roof,” said Trent without turning around.

“This I see. Where else?”

“Right here on the roof, Jimmy. Nowhere else.”

Standing immediately behind Trent, Jimmy nodded.

Without looking around, Trent added, “I can tell ’cause it’s cold.”

“Personally I think you’re on the beach again.”

The beach had been the furthest thing from Trent’s mind. “Absolutely,” he lied, and turned to look at Jimmy. “Sitting on the beach, drinking ’stralian beer, and watching the little brown girls go by.”

Jimmy grinned back after a moment. “Sho ‘nuff. You'll be there someday. Maybe the rest of us will come visit sometimes.”

280 Tales

“Sure.” Trent heard his voice as though it were emanating from someone else’s throat. “We should be in the Big Town by Christmas. One more boost like yesterday s—”

Jimmy licked his lips and leaned in on Trent. “That soon?”

Trent shook his head slowly. “Just the five of us. Four’s going to be the most I can take out with me. And I don’t trust anyone else anyway. We have to do it, you know. We can’t stay out here forever.”

Trent could hear the alcohol in Jimmy’s speech. “Ain’t so bad in the Fringe. The Patrol Sectors are safer, but man, ain’t hardly any Peaceforcers at all in here. In Patrol Sectors, all over, we gon’ have to stand there with the Peaceforcers tossing down on us, and stay calm. It’s gon’ to be hard putting up with that gene- junk.”

“We can’t stay in the Fringe forever. I don’t want to get old on the street.”

“True enough,” Jimmy conceded. “And for sure not on this cold roof. There’s people inside, bro, including Jodi Jodi who looks at you with the big eyes. What you say?”

Trent nodded. “What happened with you guys? I thought you two were made.”

Jimmy shrugged. “I don’t even know the word, Trent. Very happy and then very chilly. Not gon’ to break my heart. Be- sides,” he said simply, “you like her, I mean for real. Rather let her bounce off you than someone else.”

“Okay.”

Jimmy cocked his head slightly to one side. “I got you figured someday, my man. I think maybe you come out of the Big Time. Just—’

Trent grinned at him again. “Someday.”

“So not yet,” Jimmy conceded. “What was in your head when I came out here?”

Trent told him the truth. “A frog named Mohammed.”

“Indeed. Frenchie with an Arab name?”

“Strange but true.”

Moran 281

“Always the dramasuit,” said Jimmy softly, breath pluming, “like there’s nothing on your face except what the suit puts there.” Trent did not reply. “You gon’ to kill this frog?”

“Jimmy. Killing is—”

“wrong, I know. You keep saying.” Jimmy studied him. “You ever kill anyone?”

“Once. It was an accident,” Trent said. “He drowned.”

“Bro, what hurts?”

“Something that happened a long time ago.” When you are seventeen, six years is almost forever. He did not wait to let Ramirez say anything further. “Let’s go back in.”

IN ALL TIMES there are legends. But before the legend, there must be some piece of sharp, shiny truth to catch the light of day and hold it glowing in the midst of night’s descent.

Legends are rarely gentle. Gentleness is not remembered so long nor so well as valor or love or greed or death. Great deeds alone do not insure legend, and their lack will not prevent it— the winds of myth can rise from the lowest deserts.

I have known many of the Continuing Time’s great. I knew Ifahad bell K’Ailli briefly, and I was there when a congress of well meaning Zaradin began the Time Wars. I was there when the High King Arthur died under Camber Tremodian’s hand, and I grieved for him. I have known Shakespeare’s mind as he wrote, and Erl Moorhe’s as she composed her last and most popular sensable, the twenty-seven-hour Lord of the Rings.

I have known well all three of the deadliest night faces the human race has ever produced: Shiva Curiachen, and Ola who was Lady Blue, and Camber Tremodian himself.

Of the long list of regrets that define my life, I most regret the fact that I never knew Trent the Uncatchable.

Moran 283

About the Book And Me

EMERALD EYES is the first novel in The Tales of the Continuing Time. I believe the first published description of internet addic- tion occurs in this novel.

The text is Century Schoolbook; the headings are Albertus.

The book was purchased in 1986 by Amy Stout at Bantam Books, and was edited by her. The current edition was edited by this other person, Amy Stout-Moran. Like everything else, this was for her.

I’m currently (August 2007) maintaining a blog at: http://DanielKeysMoran.blogspot.com

Sean Fagan and David Silberstein have maintained a fan site for years at:

http://kithrup.com/dkm

And Sol Foster has maintained the Continuing Time mailing list for about fifty years now — you can sign up at at:

http://ralf.org